Nissan - Quest - Workshop Manual - 2009 - 2009

Page 1211 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered "Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 3388 Lock nut : Refer to See: Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE 1. Set the front wheels in a straight-ahead position. Then move the vehicle forward until the front wheels rest on the turning radius gauge as shown. 2. Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure the turning angles "A" and "B" as shown. Wheel turning angle (full turn) : Refer to See: Specifications. Power Door Lock System Power Sliding Door Switch: Locations Power Door Lock System POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 988 Disclaimer Page 3206 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Auto Active Test IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: - Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Cornering lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (High, Low) - A/C compressor (magnet clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System) or See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) when the auto active test cannot be performed. INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the following nine steps are repeated three times. (A): Oil pressure warning lamp is blinking when the auto active test is operating. Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Power Steering Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................... Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent. Page 1404 4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure. Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline. - Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube and No.1 spool. - Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the No.1 spool on fuel tube. - Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00). - When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. - Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. - Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 -0.08in). Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 Nm (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13in-lb) - Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. 5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22lb) to confirm fuel tube does not come off. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. 7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 8. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. - During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 10. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. Method B CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains seal ability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Rail/Service and Repair. - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. Page 1205 Figure 2. NOTE Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION Tighten the bolt no more then necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 2588 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral position. 4. Remove range lever and install Tool. Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404) 5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base line on PNP switch body. 7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to See: Valve Body/Adjustments. 10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705. Page 3763 REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly from the vehicle. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the rear blower motor. 3. Remove the variable blower control (rear). 4. Remove the rear air mix door motor. 5. Remove the rear duct and blend door assembly. Refer to See: Air Duct/Service and Repair/Manual/Removal And Installation. 6. Disassemble the rear heater and cooling unit assembly to remove the evaporator. INSTALLATION Page 3183 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System. ACTIVE TEST Locations Collision Avoidance System Switch: Locations REAR SONAR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Navigation System Navigation Module: Locations Navigation System NAVIGATION SYSTEM Component Parts Location Page 655 4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure. Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline. - Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube and No.1 spool. - Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the No.1 spool on fuel tube. - Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00). - When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. - Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. - Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 -0.08in). Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 Nm (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13in-lb) - Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. 5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22lb) to confirm fuel tube does not come off. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. 7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 8. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. - During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 10. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. Method B CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains seal ability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Rail/Service and Repair. - Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. Page 3355 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 2627 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove bolt, and turbine revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt. Page 4703 Power Sliding Door Switch: Locations Automatic Sliding Door System AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 708 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 1432 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Spark Plug Page 2563 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 5199 ^ These scratches are typically long and have several scratches concentrated together. ^ These scratches can be found anywhere on the glass surface. ^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point. 3) How to determine if glass has distortion or cracks due to manufacturing Issue. Disclaimer Page 5146 > Window glass run rubber is replaced. > Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed. Page 1648 Ignition Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 109 Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Page 2933 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Disc Brake Removal And Installation REAR DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 3. Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool, and remove cylinder body. 4. Remove caliper and disc rotor. If the disc rotor cannot be removed, remove as follows: Make sure parking brake lever is completely disengaged. - Hold down the disc rotor with the wheel nut and remove the adjuster hole plug. - Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver through the plug opening and rotate the adjuster in the direction shown to loosen and retract the brake shoes. - Prior to removing disc rotor, make alignment mark using a marker between the hub and disc rotor. - Remove wheel nut and rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install the disc rotor. Align the marks made during removal on the hub and disc rotor. 2. Install the cylinder body, and tighten the torque member bolts to specification. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View. CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off oil and grease on washer seats on axle assembly and mounting surface of cylinder body. 3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View. CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer for the union bolts. - Securely attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body. Page 201 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 3482 Control Arm: Service and Repair Rear Lower Link And Coil Spring REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Pax Run Flat Tires And Wheels See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, to relieve the coil spring tension and support the rear lower link. 3. Loosen the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut connected to the rear suspension member, using power tool. 4. Remove the rear lower link bolt and nut from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using power tool. 5. Slowly lower the transmission jack to release the coil spring tension. Then remove upper rubber seat, coil spring and lower rubber seat from the rear lower link. 6. Remove the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut from the rear suspension member using power tool, then remove the rear lower link. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. Page 3044 Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 2450 Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Page 3812 REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. WARNING: Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose and throat. - If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming removal. 2. Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the ECM from the cowl top extension and reposition it out of the way. 4. Remove the two heater pump clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater pump out of the way. Refer to See: Heater Core/Service and Repair/Heater Pump. 5. Disconnect the heater hose clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater hose out of the way. 6. Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System. 7. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 8. Carefully cut the high pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown. CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe. - A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut. - Do not allow debris to fall into the cut ends of the pipe. 9. Carefully cut the low pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown. CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe. - A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut. 10. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold collector to allow removal of the cut A/C pipes. 11. Disconnect the high pressure pipe connection (1), low pressure pipe connection (2), and the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) located near the RH front Page 4131 2. Check continuity between the following Bluetooth control unit terminals and ground. OK or NG OK - Inspection End. NG - Repair or replace harness. Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Axle Nut Page 4829 The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION maintenance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilometers). Select the "Reset" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button. Displaying the maintenance notice reminder Select the "Display Maintenance Notification" key and press the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically at the set maintenance interval. The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met: - The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition key is turned OFF. - The ignition key is turned ON the next time the vehicle will be driven. To return to the previous display after the MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press the BACK button. The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the following conditions are met: - "Reset" key is selected. - "Display Maintenance Notification" is set to OFF. - The maintenance interval is set again. Tire pressure information To display tire pressure information, press the TRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCE screen is displayed. Select the "Tire Pressure" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button. Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indicates that the pressure is being measured. After a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will be displayed randomly. The order of tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position. Page 3312 Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R Service and Repair Fluid Pump: Service and Repair REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake and 2nd Brake COMPONENTS DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove oil seal from oil pump assembly using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch oil pump assembly. Page 4172 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1213 Figure 2. NOTE Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION Tighten the bolt no more then necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 2920 CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Rear Brake Burnishing Procedure. Page 974 Wheel Bearing: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing (Rear) Page 1244 Page EM-2 Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 742 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered "Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. Page 3860 Page 3311 Inspection With CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Inspection with CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. Connect CONSULT-III and select "IPDM E/R" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 2. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Check display content in self-diagnosis results. NOTE: The Details for Display for the Period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory. Contents displayed NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.-INSPECTION END. CAN COMM CIRC-Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System. Lifting Points Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lifting Points Garage Jack And Safety Stand LIFTING POINT Garage Jack and Safety Stand WARNING: Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Make sure to avoid damaging pipes, tubes, etc. under the vehicle. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when you have to get under the vehicle. Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. - Lift at reinforced area of front suspension member where lower control arm attaches, staying in center line of wheels. 2-Pole Lift LIFTING POINT 2-Pole Lift WARNING: When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and sill spoiler. Locations Horn Relay: Locations ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 2691 Wheel Bearing: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing (Rear) Page 1710 Page 3893 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations MTC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2035 Oxygen Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2565 Page 1613 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 3694 Page 45 Locations Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Locations Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Page 3128 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 4158 Page 3105 Page 531 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 5035 - Inspection End. Page 606 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Diagram Information and Instructions Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 3786 Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Pump ATC HEATER PUMP Removal and Installation Heater Pump REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Unclip the heater pump from the cowl top extension. 4. Disconnect the heater pump electrical connector and the two heater hoses, then remove the heater pump. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the heater pump, replace the heater pump as an assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. MTC HEATER PUMP Removal and Installation Heater Pump Page 1333 Page EM-3 Page 1527 Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365) - Install the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst support bolts in the order as shown. Arrow Indicates : Engine front Three way catalyst support bolts : 22.0 N.m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb) - Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts. - Install the three way catalyst manifolds heat shield bolts. Three way catalyst manifold heat shield bolts : 8.3 N.m (0.85 kg-m, 73 in-lb) Page 4366 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. Page 924 The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION maintenance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilometers). Select the "Reset" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button. Displaying the maintenance notice reminder Select the "Display Maintenance Notification" key and press the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically at the set maintenance interval. The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met: - The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition key is turned OFF. - The ignition key is turned ON the next time the vehicle will be driven. To return to the previous display after the MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press the BACK button. The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the following conditions are met: - "Reset" key is selected. - "Display Maintenance Notification" is set to OFF. - The maintenance interval is set again. Tire pressure information To display tire pressure information, press the TRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCE screen is displayed. Select the "Tire Pressure" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button. Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indicates that the pressure is being measured. After a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will be displayed randomly. The order of tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position. Page 4118 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 1254 Page EM-12 Page 3228 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 3576 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 1525 WARNING: - Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have completely cooled down. - When removing the front and rear engine mounting through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up slightly for safety. For engine slingers, refer to See: Engine/Service and Repair. 1. Disconnect battery. Refer to See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Remove cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) connector. 4. Remove the front wheel and tires using power tool. 5. Remove the engine undercover. 6. Remove the inner wheel well splash shields. 7. If removing only air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) do so at this time through the wheel well opening, using Tool. Tool number : KV991J0050 (J-44626) 8. If removing the exhaust manifold (LH bank), remove the radiator and cooling fan assembly. Refer to See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair. 9. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Exploded View. 10. If removing the exhaust manifold (RH), remove the front suspension member. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension Member. 11. Remove the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst manifolds support bolts in the order as shown. Arrow Indicates : Engine front 12. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1), heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2), air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2). a. Remove harness connector of each sensor, and disconnect the harness from the bracket and middle clamp. b. Remove both heated oxygen sensors and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors using Tool. Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensors or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors. - Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor. 13. Remove exhaust manifold and three way catalyst manifold heat shields using power tool. 14. Remove the three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 1) and three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 2) by loosening the bolts first and then removing the nuts and through bolts using power tool. 15. Remove the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifolds. Loosen the exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown using power tool. Arrow Indicates : Engine front Page 2492 ATC Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations ATC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 1454 (1.97 in)] into water pump's upper and lower bolt holes until they reach the timing chain case. Then, alternately tighten each bolt for a half turn, and pull out the water pump. CAUTION: Pull straight out while preventing vane from contacting socket in installation area. - Remove water pump without causing sprocket to contact timing chain. 15. Remove M8 bolts and O-rings from water pump. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body and vane assembly. 2. Check for rough operation due to excessive end play. INSTALLATION 1. Install new O-rings to water pump. 2. Apply engine oil and engine coolant to the O-rings as shown. NOTE: Locate the O-ring with white paint mark to engine front side. Page 2774 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection A/T INDICATOR A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. Select "METER/M&A;" on CONSULT-III. 2. Using "DATA MONITOR", confirm each indication while operating the shift lever. NOTE: If more than one input is ON, A/T indicator will enter fail-safe function and the display will turn off. OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - GO TO 2. 2.CHECK TCM Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures. OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC. Page 1066 1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the valve lifter that was measured as being outside the standard specifications. 3. Measure the center thickness of the removed lifter with a micrometer as shown. 4. Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement. - Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 in) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: Maintenance. CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, (U) and (N), at each of proper positions. (Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.) 5. Install the selected replacement valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. Refer to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 7. Rotate the crankshaft a few turns by hand. 8. Confirm that the valve clearances are within specification. 9. After the engine has been run to full operating temperature, confirm that the valve clearances are within specification. Page 3823 - Rear air mix door motor 7. Disconnect the ducts from the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. 8. Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, and apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. NOTE: Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. - Recharge the A/C system. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. Page 3101 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 143 Page 1116 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ............. API or ILSAC Certified Energy Conserving Viscosity ............................................................ ................................................................................................................................................. SAE 5W-30 Page 2174 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion - Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of the exhaust manifold mating surfaces. Limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Arrow Indicates : Engine front - Install the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown. CAUTION: Before installing a heated oxygen sensor or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean the exhaust manifold threads using Tool, and apply anti-seize lubricant. - Do not over-tighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor or heated oxygen sensors. Doing so may cause damage. Page 1092 OIL PUMP OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Page 538 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 5118 - through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to BCM terminal 70. With the ignition switch turned to ON or START position, power is supplied through 10A fuse [No.12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to rear window defogger relay terminal 1 - through 10A fuse [No.16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to BCM terminal 38 - through 10A fuse [No. 2, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to front air control terminal 15. Ground is supplied to BCM terminal 67 - to front air control terminal 36 - through body grounds M57, M61 and M79 - to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60 - through body grounds E9, E15 and E24. When front air control (rear window defogger switch) is turned to ON, ground is supplied to BCM terminal 9 - through front air control terminal 16 - through front air control terminal 36 - through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then rear window defogger switch is illuminated. Then BCM recognizes that rear window defogger switch is turned to ON. Then it sends rear window defogger switch signals to IPDM E/R and display control unit (with color display) via CAN communication (CAN-H, CAN-L). When IPDM E/R receives rear window defogger switch signals, ground is supplied to rear window defogger relay terminal 2 - through IPDM E/R terminal 52 - through IPDM E/R terminal 60 - through body grounds E9, E15 and E24. Then rear window defogger relay is energized. With power and ground supplied, rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window. When rear window defogger relay is turned to ON (with door mirror defogger), power is supplied through rear window defogger relay terminal 5 - through fuse block (J/B) terminal 2Q - through 10A fuse [No. 8, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - through fuse block (J/B) terminal 5N - to door mirror defogger (LH and RH) terminal 6. Door mirror defogger (LH and RH) terminal 5 is grounded through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. With power and ground supplied, door mirror defogger filaments heat and defog the mirror. Page 4438 Hood Latch: Service and Repair HOOD Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control REMOVAL 1. Remove the front grille. Refer to See: Grille/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front fender protector (LH). Refer to See: Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the hood lock cable from the hood lock, and unclip it from the radiator core support upper and hoodledge. 4. Remove the bolt and the hood opener. 5. Remove the grommet on the dash lower panel, and pull the hood lock cable toward the passenger room. CAUTION: While pulling, be careful not to damage the outside of the hood lock cable. INSTALLATION 1. Pull the hood lock cable through the dash lower panel hole to the engine room. Page 3511 Brake Control/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the brake caliper assemblies from the rear wheel hub and spindle assemblies without disconnecting the brake lines, using power tool. Position the brake caliper assemblies aside using suitable wire. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear. - Leave the brake line connected to the brake caliper. - Do not to depress the brake pedal, or the piston will pop out. - Do not pull or twist the brake hose. 4. Remove the shock absorber upper end nuts using power tool. 5. Disconnect the LH and RH ABS sensor harness connectors, and disconnect the ABS sensor harness from the rear suspension member. 6. Remove the LH and RH member stay bolts using power tool. 7. Use a support jack or suitable tool, to support the rear suspension member. 8. Remove the rear suspension member nuts using power tool. Then lower the rear suspension member assembly using the support jack. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1371 Timing Cover: Service and Repair "The content of this article/image reflects the changes identified in TSB NTB 10-046" ON-VEHICLE REPAIR FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE 1. Front timing chain case 2. Seal ring 3. Collared O-ring 4. IVT control valve cover RH 5. Chain tensioner cover 6. Collared O-ring 7. Seal ring 8. IVT control valve cover LH 9. RH engine mounting bracket 10. Water pump cover 11. Water hose clamp 12. Crankshaft pulley 13. Front oil seal 14. Idler pulley 15. Idler pulley bracket A. Refer to Installation B. To A/C compressor Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove engine under cover. 2. Drain the engine oil. 3. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 4. Drain the power steering fluid. 5. Remove engine room cover. 6. Remove front air duct. 7. Remove battery tray. 8. Remove upper radiator hose. 9. Disconnect engine coolant reservoir hose from the radiator and remove engine coolant reservoir. Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft Sprocket Page 4898 Courtesy Lamp: Electrical Diagrams INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Wiring Diagram - INT/L LT-INT/L-01 Page 707 Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Classification: GI99-001F Reference: NTB99-020F Date: August 8, 2008 LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009 SERVICE INFORMATION This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing"). CAUTION: Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual. 1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT): ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components. 2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission: ^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. ^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward. ^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH. ^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission. ^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position. Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 789 9. Carefully cut the low pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown. CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe. A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut. 10. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold collector to allow removal of the cut A/C pipes. 11. Disconnect the high pressure pipe connection (1), low pressure pipe connection (2), and the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. 12. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe connector bolt (1) from the front expansion valve as shown. - Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2) - Electric throttle control actuator (3) - Arrow Indicates Front 13. Use a suitable tool to pry the pipe support clip (1) from the threaded stud on the dash panel as shown. - Arrow Indicates Front 14. Remove the top section of the high/low pressure pipe (1) as shown. Commercial Service Tools Axle Shaft Assembly: Tools and Equipment Commercial Service Tools PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool Page 2614 5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the cooler inlet hose. 6. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. 7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet hose. 8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (71 128 psi) through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining A/T fluid into the coffee filter. 9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose. 10. Perform "A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE". A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris. a. If small metal debris less than 1mm (0.040 in) in size or metal powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and the procedure is ended. b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1mm (0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in the coffee filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The radiator/fluid cooler must be replaced and the inspection procedure is ended. A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components. Service and Repair Mud Flap: Service and Repair MUDGUARD Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove screws and pushpins from mudguard. NOTE: For center mudguard, remove rear first. 2. Remove mudguard (front/rear). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Testing and Inspection Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Fusible Link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident. - Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. - Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Classification: WT09-002 Reference: NTB09-056 Date: July 14, 2009 ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts. WARNING: Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts. Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut and/or key. CLAIMS INFORMATION Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines ^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed. ^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush. ^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened. ^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks. ^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the Service Manual. Disclaimer Page 3844 1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. 2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to See: Service Precautions/Precautions/Contaminated Refrigerant. 3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to See: Service Precautions/Precautions/Contaminated Refrigerant. 4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new" compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil at this time. CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor. Page 1965 COLLECT DATA Collect CONSULT-III Data Print out or save the following CONSULT-III data. SELF-DIAG RESULTS - CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included) NOTE: Some items may not be needed depending on CAN system type of vehicle. Page 3039 The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub. Component Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3104 Page 2413 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 1081 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 2677 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Disassembly And Assembly (Left Side) FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side) DISASSEMBLY Transaxle Side 1. Mount front drive shaft in a vise. CAUTION: When mounting shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft. 2. Remove boot bands and slide the boot back. 3. Remove circlip and dust shield from slide joint housing. 4. Put matching marks on slide joint housing and shaft before separating joint assembly. 5. Remove stopper ring with a suitable tool, then pull out slide joint housing. Page 1657 4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. 9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. - Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. Page 1027 Arrow: Indicates engine front - Position the camshafts: RH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 10 o'clock. LH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 2 o'clock. 7. Before installing No. 1 camshaft brackets, apply sealant to mating surface of No. 1 camshaft bracket. Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants. Page 5157 > Window glass run rubber is replaced. > Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed. Page 3494 Radius Arm: Service and Repair RADIUS ROD Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Pax Run Flat Tires And Wheels See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, to relieve the coil spring tension and support the radius rod. 3. Disconnect the radius rod from the rear suspension member using power tool. 4. Disconnect the radius rod nut and bolt from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using power tool, then remove the radius rod. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. After installing the radius rod, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. Page 1346 Page EM-16 Page 4794 to combination meter via CAN communication line. When the combination meter receives the seat belt warning signal, it sounds the warning chime. The BCM controls the (6 second) duration of the seat belt warning chime. Page 3287 Specifications Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Injector Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection 1.FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION Check that the following fusible links or IPDM E/R fuses are not blown. OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Replace fuse or fusible link. 2.POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector E120 terminals 1, 2 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness. 3.GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121 and E124. 2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121(A) terminal 60, E124(B) terminal 38 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - Inspection End. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R ground circuit harness. Page 4135 Cellular Phone: Service and Repair TELEPHONE Removal and Installation BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT Removal 1. Remove front passenger seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove Bluetooth control unit (1) from bluetooth control unit bracket by removing screws (A) and disconnecting harness connector (2). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When replacing bluetooth control unit, Perform pairing procedure. Refer to Owner's Manual Pairing Procedure. BLUETOOTH ON INDICATOR Removal 1. Remove front overhead console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Release Bluetooth ON indicator tabs (A) and remove indicator (1). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. MICROPHONE Removal 1. Remove front overhead console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic Transaxle Fluid Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 7 7/8 qt (7.4L) Page 3028 Page 1232 Page EM-15 Page 2899 Cylinder Body CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. Check inner wall of cylinder for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace cylinder body. - Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface with a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston CAUTION: Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper. Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Check that there is no wear, damage, or cracks in the sliding pin bolts and sliding pin boots, and if there are, replace them. ASSEMBLY 1. Apply a rubber grease to the piston seal and attach to cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston seals. 2. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot cylinder-side lip into the cylinder body groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston boot. 3. Apply a brake fluid to the piston, insert into the cylinder body by hand and firmly attach the piston boot piston-side lip into the piston boot. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. Page 2657 IMPORTANT: Make sure to mark the drive shaft and hub as shown in Figure 1 before removing the drive shaft. NOTE: Do not remove the axles from the transmission for this bulletin. 2. Apply a moderate coat of Molykote M77 Grease (P/N 44003-7S000) to the entire front wheel drive shaft bearing surface (see Figure 2). Page 1755 Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair BRAKE FLUID Bleeding Brake System CAUTION: Carefully monitor brake fluid level at the sub tank during bleeding operation. - Fill the sub tank with new brake fluid. Refer to See: . Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding the air out of system. - Place a container under the sub tank to avoid spilling brake fluid. - Do not loosen the line fittings at the ABS actuator during air bleeding. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and control unit connector or negative battery terminal. 2. Connect a transparent vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal several times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release air. 5. Close air bleeder valve. 6. Release brake pedal slowly. 7. Tighten air bleeder valve to specification. Air bleeder valve : Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front/Exploded View, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View. 8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 until no more air bubbles come out of air bleeder valve. 9. Bleed the brake hydraulic system air bleeder valves in the following order: Right rear brake to Left front brake to Left rear brake to Right front brake Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 2425 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Spark Plug Page 4888 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 3293 Component Tests and General Diagnostics Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics COMBINATION SWITCH Combination Switch Inspection 1.SYSTEM CHECK 1. Referring to table below, check to which system the malfunctioning switch belongs. - GO TO 2. 2.SYSTEM CHECK With CONSULT-III 1. Connect CONSULT-III, and select "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR". 3. Select "START" and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Without CONSULT-III Operate combination switch and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT WIPER INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, operate normally. Check results Other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.-Replace lighting switch or wiper switch. Other switches in malfunctioning system do not operate normally. - GO TO 3. 3.HARNESS INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors. 3. Check for continuity between BCM harness connector of the suspect system and the corresponding combination switch connector terminals. 4. Check for continuity between each terminal of BCM harness connector in suspect malfunctioning system and ground. Page 150 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 881 Refrigerant: Service Precautions Precaution For Leak Detection Dye PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Leak Detection Dye - The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks. - Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety glasses to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of the fluorescent dye. - The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electronic refrigerant leak detector. The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). - For your safety and the customer's satisfaction, read and follow all manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions prior to performing work. - A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). - Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a future service. - Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled, clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period of time cannot be removed. - Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.). - Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system. - Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use HFC-134a (R134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection dye in HFC-134a (R134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result. - The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor failure occurs. Page 3614 3. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER) Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the rear air mix door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the rear air mix door motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4160 Rear Vision Camera: Service and Repair REAR VIEW MONITOR Rear View Camera REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove license lamp finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Exterior Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect rear view camera connector (1). 3. Remove rear view camera screw and remove rear view camera. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After installing rear view camera, perform side distance guideline correction procedure. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 2108 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection 1.FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION Check that the following fusible links or IPDM E/R fuses are not blown. OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Replace fuse or fusible link. 2.POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector E120 terminals 1, 2 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness. 3.GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121 and E124. 2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121(A) terminal 60, E124(B) terminal 38 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - Inspection End. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R ground circuit harness. Page 1219 Page EM-2 ATC Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair ATC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Component. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 3952 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three minutes. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to See: Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 3. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor (1) nuts. 4. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector (2). CAUTION: Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. - Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. - Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. - Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. VDC/TCS/ABS Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Locations VDC/TCS/ABS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1983 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) - Models with TCS - Models with VDC TCM NOTE: Replace the unit when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG". Page 122 Page 1979 5. Fill out the diagnosis sheet based on information from step 4. a. The ABS warning lamp turned ON and speedometer did not move: Assume that a possible cause is no communication between M&A; and ABS. Draw a line between M&A; and ABS. (Line 5-a in the figure below). b. The tachometer moved normally: Put check marks between ECM and M&A.; The circuit between ECM and M&A; is functioning properly (check marks 5-b in the figure below). Page 1489 ATC HEATER CORE Removal and Installation FRONT HEATER CORE Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the side cover. Page 1827 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3265 Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to the description of the slide-locking type connector. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Page 2811 Repair Flow Chart Page 1112 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets (no picture shown). NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 2301 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm assembly (5). Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Locations Impact Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 3998 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Service and Repair Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair REAR VIEW MONITOR Rear View Camera Control Unit REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the front passenger seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Removal And Installation. 3. Disconnect the rear view camera control unit connector. 4. Remove the screws (1) and remove the rear view camera control unit (2). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Classification: BT07-032A Reference: NTB07-070A Date: September 25, 2009 SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009 Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly: ^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged ^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power ^ When the sunroof motor was changed ACTION Perform the following initialization procedure: 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. 3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position. 4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally. NOTE: If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information. Page 3565 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 2289 - Position clips in grooves on the fuel injectors. - Align the protrusions of the fuel tube assembly with those of the fuel injectors. - After properly inserting the fuel injectors onto the fuel tube assembly, check that the fuel tube protrusions are engaged with those of fuel injectors, and the flanges of the fuel tube assembly are fully engaged with the clips. 3. Tighten fuel tube assembly bolts in the order as shown, in two steps: CAUTION: After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage. 4. Install the quick connector as follows: a. Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around the fuel tube and quick connector and that there is no damage. b. Align the center to insert the quick connector straight onto the fuel tube. c. Insert the fuel tube until a click is heard. d. Install the quick connector cap. 5. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Make sure there are no fuel leaks at connections as follows: 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections. CAUTION: Do not touch engine immediately after stopping as engine is extremely hot. NOTE: Use mirrors for checking on connections out of the direct line of sight. Automatic Back Door System Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Automatic Back Door System AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake. NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. 4. Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (TCS/ABS), See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (VDC/TCS/ABS). CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 5. Remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 6. Remove steering outer tie-rod cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen nut using power tool. Refer to See: Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement, Removal Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Removal LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal 1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Cover. 2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from the base. Page 2761 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 1520 b. Apply a continuous bead of RTV Silicone Sealant, or equivalent, to mating surface of chain tensioner cover and water pump cover. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants. 9. Install water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block. Water drain plug : 9.5 N.m (0.97 kg-m, 76 in-lb) 10. Tighten idler pulley bolts. Idler pulley bolts : 34.8 N.m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb) 11. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. - Refill engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. - After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge air from the high-pressure chamber of the chain tensioner. The engine may produce a rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Inspection. - Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks or A/T fluid leaks. Page 2407 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 1886 Page 1452 Water Pump: Service and Repair WATER PUMP Removal and Installation WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. CAUTION: When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belt. - Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using radiator cap tester. REMOVAL 1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove engine coolant reservoir tank. Refer to See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair. 3. Remove IPDM E/R bolts and position aside. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. 4. Remove RH wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 5. Remove fender protector (RH). Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 6. Remove drive belts. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 7. Remove idler pulley and idler pulley bracket. 8. Support engine and remove front engine insulator and bracket. Refer to See: Service and Repair. 9. Remove water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block. 10. Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover. Locations Ambient Light Sensor: Locations AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3807 3. Reposition the coolant reservoir tank aside. 4. Reposition the power steering fluid reservoir aside. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Procedures. 6. Remove the high-pressure pipe. Refer to See: Locations. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Locations. CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal And Installation For High/Low-Pressure Pipe REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure Pipe REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. WARNING: Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose and throat. - If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming removal. 2. Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the ECM from the cowl top extension and reposition it out of the way. 4. Remove the two heater pump clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater pump out of the way. Refer to See: Heater Core/Service and Repair/Heater Pump. 5. Disconnect the heater hose clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater hose out of the way. 6. Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System. 7. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 8. Carefully cut the high pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown. CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe. A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut. - Do not allow debris to fall into the cut ends of the pipe. Page 649 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 turn). If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), try the above procedure again from the beginning. Never push vehicle backward. 6. Measure distance "B" (front side). Total toe-in : Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheel Alignment. 7. Adjust toe-in by turning the adjusting bolts. NOTE: Toe changes about 1.5 mm (0.059 in) [one side] with each graduation of the adjusting bolt. 8. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. Page 3677 Page 2022 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1083 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection DRIVE BELTS Checking Drive Belts WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is not running. 1. Inspect belt for cracks, fraying, wear or oil adhesion. If necessary, replace with a new one. 2. Inspect drive belt deflections by applying 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f) on the belt midway between pulleys as shown. 3. Measure the belt tension using Tool at the locations as shown. Tool number : BT-3373-F NOTE: Inspect drive belt deflection or tension when engine is cold. - Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is not within specifications. CAUTION: - When checking belt deflection or tension immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specification value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys. - Tighten idler pulley lock nut by hand and measure deflection or tension without looseness. Page 819 8. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, use the vacuum specifications below, based on the altitude above sea level. 9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks. 10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero. CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into the cooling system. 11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening. 12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level, and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary. FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. Fill the radiator from the filler neck above the radiator upper hose and reservoir tank with clean water and reinstall radiator filler cap. 2. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load. 4. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 5. Drain the water from the system. Refer to See: . 6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator. Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement Expansion Valve: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement Classification: HA10-004 Reference: NTB10-044 Date: March 17, 2010 A/C TXV (THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE) REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2010 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) SERVICE INFORMATION The A/C TXV (thermal expansion valve) is available separately as a service part for the Applied Vehicles. If the A/C TXV needs to be replaced for any reason AND the evaporator is operating normally: ^ Replace the TXV only. Do not replace the heater and cooling unit assembly or the evaporator assembly. ^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for TXV removal and installation instructions. Page 1246 Page EM-4 Page 2560 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications CONNECTING ROD Tighten the connecting rod bolts in two steps: Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 1664 Page 1296 Tool number : (J-50288) - If the original timing chain markings are not legible, use paint or equivalent to mark the timing chains to the sprockets. 4. If removing the timing chains (secondary), loosen camshaft sprocket bolts. 5. Compress the timing chain tensioner (primary). a. Pull lever down and release plunger stopper tab. Plunger stopper tab can be pushed up to release (coaxial structure with lever). b. Insert stopper pin into timing chain tensioner (primary) body hole to hold lever, and keep the stopper tab released. c. Depress the plunger into the tensioner body by pressing the slack guide. d. Keep the slack guide pressed and lock the plunger in by pushing the stopper pin through the lever and into the chain tensioner body hole. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. 6. Remove the internal chain guide. - Slack guide does not need to be removed. 7. Remove timing chain (primary). CAUTION: Page 2547 12. Remove return spring. 13. Remove snap ring using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage oil pump assembly and 2nd brake piston. 14. While pushing the 2nd brake piston by hand, apply compressed air (4kg/cm2) into the oil passage as shown and remove 2nd brake piston (With 2nd brake sleeve). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve. 15. Remove O-rings from 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve. INSPECTION Check that the sliding surface of discs and plates is not worn or burnt. If the discs or plates is worn or burnt, replace it CAUTION: Replace new clutch discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in ATF. ASSEMBLY Page 1140 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered "Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. Page 954 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 2930 CAUTION: - Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper. - Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Sliding Pins, Sliding Pin Bolts, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pins, sliding pin bolts, and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Visual Inspection Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, secure disc rotor to the wheel hub in 2 or more positions. 2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. CAUTION: Before measuring, make sure the axle end play is 0 mm (0 in). Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle. 3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout is outside the specified value after performing the above operation, turn the disc rotor using Tool. Tool number : 38-PFM90.5 Thickness Inspection Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness does not meet specification, replace disc rotor. Page 4787 Mechanical Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Mechanical Specifications Oil Pump SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE OIL PUMP OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Regulator Valve SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE Locations Trailer Lighting Module: Locations TRAILER TOW Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2326 - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling. - Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Page 3414 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Refer to "Removal and Installation" for tightening torques. CAUTION: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. When installing wheel hub and bearing assembly to steering knuckle, align cutout in toner ring cover with wheel sensor mounting hole in steering knuckle. - When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. (When not using the alignment mark, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake.) Page 4571 Removal 1. Remove seat belt shoulder anchor and D ring. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 2. Remove front and rear kicking plates. 3. Remove center pillar lower finisher. Refer to "CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER". 4. Remove cover and screws. 5. Remove center pillar upper finisher. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR CENTER PILLAR FINISHER Removal 1. Remove rear kicking plate. 2. Remove rear kick escutcheon. 3. Remove cargo net hook using Tool. Tool number : J-47126 4. Remove rear lower finisher assembly. 5. Remove seat belt D rings from rear center pillar finisher. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Second Row Seat Belt. 6. Remove cover and screws from rear center pillar finisher. 7. Remove rear center pillar finisher. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. DASH SIDE FINISHER (UPPER, LOWER) Removal 1. Remove front kicking plate. 2. Remove upper dash side finisher. 3. Remove lower dash side finisher. CAUTION: Insert screw driver rolled with cloth between panel on vehicle and clip (as indicated with arrow), and disconnect clip. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT PILLAR FINISHER Removal 1. Remove defrost grille assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service and Repair/Automatic/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove upper dash side finisher. Refer to "DASH SIDE FINISHER (UPPER, LOWER)". 3. Release clips and remove front pillar finisher. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR LOWER FINISHER ASSEMBLY Page 3783 ATC HEATER CORE Removal and Installation FRONT HEATER CORE Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the side cover. Page 2050 Page 1418 2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown. Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214) 3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free from defects and foreign materials. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the front of the vehicle. - Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. Component Locations Information Bus: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts Location Page 500 Page 4373 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the door glass bolts. 8. Raise the door glass up into the door frame/channel and hold in place with a suitable tool (A). 9. Disconnect the harness connector for the regulator assembly. 10. Remove the regulator nuts, and remove the regulator assembly. Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. Wire wear - Regulator deformation The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". Door glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Disassembly 1. Remove the regulator motor bolts. 2. Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly. Assembly Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator nuts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the regulator motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the door glass. - Removal and installation of the door glass run. Page 4646 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Page 156 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 3117 Starter Motor: Service and Repair STARTING SYSTEM Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Refer to See: Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Remove the starter insulator. 3. Remove the harness bracket and harness protector from the starter engine room harness. 4. Disconnect the starter harness connectors. 5. Remove the two starter bolts, using power tools. 6. Remove the starter. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3921 Page 3238 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams POWER SOCKET Wiring Diagram - P/SCKT WW-P/SCKT-01 Page 1938 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 3814 NOTE: Reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3) for additional clearance to remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe as necessary. d. Pry off the pipe support clip (1) secured to the dash panel threaded stud, using a suitable tool. e. Carefully remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe (1). CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections. - Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones. - Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil. NOTE: The service replacement high/low pressure pipe is a two piece pipe assembly. 1. Install and position the new lower high/low pressure pipe without tightening the connections. NOTE: To ease installation, first remove the A/C support clip from the lower section high/low pressure pipe and secure it to the dash panel threaded stud. 2. Install the new upper high/low pressure pipe through the engine compartment. a. Install the high/low pressure pipe to the front expansion valve and only hand tighten the connector bolt (1) as shown. - Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2) - Electric throttle control actuator (3) - Arrow Indicates Front Page 1306 b. Install new seal rings on the IVT control valve covers. c. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT control valve covers. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. - Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes to install the IVT control valve covers. - Tighten the intake valve timing control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. IVT control valve cover bolts: 11.3 N-m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb) Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner) REMOVAL 1. Remove the timing chains (primary) and (secondary). 2. Remove the rocker covers. 3. Remove the camshaft brackets (No. 1). 4. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioners. Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 715 Drive Belt: Service and Repair DRIVE BELTS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove engine undercover. 2. Fully loosen each belt. Refer to See: Adjustments. Remove generator and air conditioner compressor belt and then power steering oil pump belt. CAUTION: Grease is applied to idler pulley adjusting bolt. Be careful to keep grease away from the belts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Make sure belts are correctly engaged with the pulley groove. - Clean off any oil and coolant on belts and each pulley groove. - Adjust belt tension. Refer to See: Adjustments. Page 3566 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 1419 - Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is heard. - After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with the electric fuel pump applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping. 2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections. Service and Repair Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation FRONT AIR CONTROL Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the front air control. 2. Remove cluster lid C, disconnect the front air control electrical connector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Cluster Lid C. 3. Remove the screws securing the front air control (1) to cluster lid C (2). 4. Remove the front air control. Installation Installation is the reverse order of removal. REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the rear air control (front). 2. Remove the front roof console assembly from the headlining, located over the rear view mirror. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the screws securing the rear air control (front) (1) to the front roof console assembly (2). 4. Remove the rear air control (front). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) Removal Page 3102 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4392 1. Remove sliding door rail cover. Refer to See: Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect slide door cables. 3. Remove luggage lower trim. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect sliding door motor electrical connector. 5. Remove sliding door link rollers. 6. Remove sliding door cable and motor assembly. 7. Remove sliding door motor from sliding door cable assembly. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4533 1. Move the 2nd row seat fully forward and lift the seat up. See Figure 1. NOTE: ^ These photos are for the LH side. Repeat steps 1-4 for the RH side if needed. 2. Check to see if the inner and outer anti-rattle spring has fallen off the seat. See Figure 2. ^ Replace the springs with the ones listed in the Parts Information. Page 836 Disclaimer Page 3922 Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6 Page 3313 Page 3758 6. Remove the two in-cabin microfilters. 7. Remove the evaporator. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with new ones. Apply compressor oil to the O-rings before installing them. - When installing the in-cabin microfilters, face the microfilters according to the air flow direction arrow printed on the side of the filters. Removal And Installation For Rear Evaporator REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Rear Evaporator Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 3794 - Rear air mix door motor 7. Disconnect the ducts from the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. 8. Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. NOTE: Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. - Recharge the A/C system. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Procedures. Page 1981 Past Error -- Short Circuit -- When the symptoms listed below exist, a short circuit of the CAN communication line is a possible cause. Page 5109 Page 1610 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 3923 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Seat Belt Inspection SEAT BELTS Seat Belt Inspection AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). - The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide). - The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. - Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. - The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows: a. Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning chime should sound for about seven seconds. b. Fasten driver's seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should stop. 2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III, and air bag warning lamp. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. 3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached. 4. Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels freely and that belt lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and holds securely. 5. Check retractor operation: a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. b. Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. c. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the belt does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the "SEAT BELT TAPE SET" and perform the following steps. Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor: 1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more. 2. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening. 3. Pass a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while moving it up and down several times along the belt opening surface to remove dirt. 4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean cloth. 5. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening. NOTE: Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling. 6. Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly. 7. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts. SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) NOTE: All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the belt is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the belt cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into the retractor. Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly. Page 3518 1. When installing coil spring on strut, it must be positioned as shown. 2. Install upper spring seat with alignment mark facing the outer side of vehicle, in line with strut-to-knuckle attachment points. Service and Repair Air Register: Service and Repair DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation DEFROSTER NOZZLE NOTE: The defroster nozzle is part of the instrument panel and is replaced as an assembly. Removal Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel . Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRESH AIR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel . 2. Remove the defroster nozzle. 3. Remove the fresh air duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. DEFROSTER DUCT Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the defroster duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the RH or LH side demister duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH, LH, AND CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove the RH, center, and LH ventilator duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR CONNECTOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the three clips and remove the floor connector duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 831 5. Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures using the "HOT" range on the A/T fluid level gauge. CAUTION: Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while driving. 6. Check the fluid for the following conditions: If the fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to the See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Procedures/Changing A/T Fluid. Flush the AT fluid cooling system after repairing the transaxle. - If the fluid contains frictional material (from the clutches or bands), remove the radiator and flush the cooler lines using a cleaning solvent and compressed air after completing repairs to the transaxle. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Procedures/A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning. Page 2017 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Service and Repair Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair OIL SEAL Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal REMOVAL 1. Remove the following parts: Engine undercover. - Drive belts. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Testing and Inspection See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Adjustments. - Radiator fan. Refer to See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Remove the starter motor. Refer to See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair. b. Lock the ring gear using Tool attached to the starter bolt hole. Tool number : KV10117700 (J-44716) CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear when setting the Tool. c. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt and locate bolt seating surface at 10 mm (0.39 in) from its original position. d. Position a pulley puller at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to remove crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not use a puller claw on crankshaft pulley periphery. 3. Remove front oil seal from front timing chain case. CAUTION: Service and Repair Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Bulb Replacement FRONT PARKING LAMP Refer to See: Headlamp/Headlamp Bulb/Service and Repair. LICENSE PLATE LAMP Removal 1. Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove license plate lamp socket. 3. Remove license plate lamp. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. TAIL LAMP Refer to See: Tail Lamp/Tail Light Bulb/Service and Repair. Page 1658 - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling. - Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is Noisy Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is Noisy Classification: EL09-022 Reference: NTB09-087 Date: September 10, 2009 2004 - 2009 QUEST; POWER BACK DOOR WILL NOT OPEN/CLOSE AND MAKES NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) with power back door. IF YOU CONFIRM: While operating the power back door (lift gate), ^ The power motor will not open or close the door, and/or ^ There is a grinding and popping noise inside the rear trim panel. ACTION: Check for a loose or missing bolt on the back door power lift assembly. Replace if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Access the power back door motor assembly. ^ Remove left side finishers as needed. ^ Refer to sections BL and EI in the Service Manual as needed. Page 4830 Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's operation and the outside temperature. In case of low tire pressure, a message is displayed on the screen: LOW PRESSURE - Check All Tires WARNING When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed, the SETTINGS screen will appear on the display. You can select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle. Move the joystick and press the ENTER button to select each item to be set. System settings Select the "System Settings" key by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER button. The SYSTEM SETTINGS screen will be displayed. Language/unit The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when selecting the "Language/Unit" key and pressing the ENTER button. Language: English or French Unit: US - mile, °F, MPG Metric - km, °C, L/1OO km Page 4780 DESCRIPTION Page 1925 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 3879 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Removal And Installation VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Removal and Installation VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel RH and glove box. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel. 3. Disconnect the variable blower control (front) electrical connector. 4. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (front). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the variable blower control (rear) electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (rear). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Positive Crankcase Ventilation Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Testing and Inspection Positive Crankcase Ventilation Description POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION Description SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction. On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions. Component Inspection POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION Component Inspection PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet. A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 181 Front Suspension Alignment: Specifications Front Suspension Wheel Alignment Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) Wheelarch Height SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 154 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 1334 Page EM-4 Page 4075 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Service and Repair Solar Sensor: Service and Repair OPTICAL SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front demister grille. Refer to See: Lighting and Horns/Ambient Light Sensor/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector (2). 3. Twist the optical sensor (1) counter clockwise to remove it from the defroster grille. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3569 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 1350 Page 366 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1544 The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs. NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair. 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following: ^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube. ^ Separated / missing band clamp(s). ^ Weld separation(s). 3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040 inch) space. ^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair. 4. If a weld or band clamp is separated, or the band clamp is missing, install new band clamps as needed. ^ For band clamp(s) location, refer to the pictures below that applies to your vehicle. Page 1245 Page EM-3 Checking Fluid Level Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Level POWER STEERING FLUID Checking Fluid Level Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F). CAUTION: Do not overfill. - Do not reuse any used power steering fluid. - Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to See: See: . Page 3811 a. Under the vehicle, tighten the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A) as shown to specification. b. Install the A/C pipe clamp (2) and tighten the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B). c. As necessary, reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3). d. Attach the other pipe support clip to the dash panel threaded stud. e. From the engine compartment, tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown to specification. Arrow Indicates Front CAUTION: - Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when tightening the fittings. 4. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold collector. 5. Check that there is sufficient clearance between the lower high/low pressure pipe and the front stabilizer bar. Adjust the lower high/low pressure pipe as necessary. 6. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and check the A/C system for leaks. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 7. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Removal And Installation For Low-Pressure Flexible Hose REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Procedures. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 2. Remove the engine under cover. 3. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to See: Locations. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Locations. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal And Installation For High/Low-Pressure Pipe REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure Pipe Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 865 Engine Oil: Service and Repair ENGINE OIL Changing Engine Oil WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. - Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface, then start the engine to warm up the oil. 2. Check for oil leaks from the engine. 3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Remove the oil drain plug and oil filler cap. 5. Drain the engine oil. 6. Install the oil pan drain plug. Oil pan drain plug : Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Clean the oil pan drain plug and install using a new washer. 7. Refill the engine with new engine oil. Refer to See: See: . CAUTION: The refill oil capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. - Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. 8. Warm up the engine and check the oil pan drain plug and oil filter for oil leaks. 9. Stop engine and wait at least 10 minutes. 10. Check engine oil level. Refer to See: . Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Locations Starter Relay: Locations IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement ATC Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations ATC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 1435 - Do not drop or shock spark plug. If spark plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used. Checking and adjusting spark plug gap is not required between change intervals. Spark plug gap (nominal) : 1.1 mm (0.043 in) INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions. Refer to See: Maintenance. - The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Frequent engine starts - Low ambient temperatures - The cold type spark plug is suitable when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Extended highway driving - Frequent high engine revolution. Page 155 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 2932 6. Attach the pad retainer to the torque member. CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than the torque member, as shown. 7. After assembling the shims and the shim covers to the pad, install it to the torque member. 8. Install cylinder body and tighten sliding pin to the specification. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front/Exploded View. Page 3730 1. Remove the rear air control (rear) (1) from the headlining, located over the sliding door, RH. 2. Disconnect the rear air control (rear) electrical connector and remove the rear air control (rear). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1996 Page 3351 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 1697 Oxygen Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Locations Hose/Line HVAC: Locations REFRIGERANT LINES Component Front A/C Compressor and Condenser Page 641 Alignment: Specifications Rear Suspension Wheel Alignment SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) Wheelarch Height SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) Page 3377 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 1260 Page EM-18 Page 1387 a. Install the crankshaft sprocket. - Make sure the mating marks on the crankshaft sprocket face front of engine. 4. Install the timing chain (primary). - Water pump (G). - Install timing chain (primary) so the mating mark (punched) (B) on camshaft sprocket (C) is aligned with the copper link (A) on the timing chain, while the mating mark (notched) (E) on the crankshaft sprocket (D) is aligned with the yellow one (F) on the timing chain, as shown. - When it is difficult to align mating marks of the timing chain (primary) with each sprocket, gradually turn the camshaft to align it with the mating marks. - During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating mark alignments of the secondary timing chains. Page 115 Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1117 Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection ENGINE OIL Inspection OIL LEVEL Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow five minutes before checking. - Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as indicated on the dipstick. - If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as necessary. OIL APPEARANCE Check engine oil for white milky or excessive contamination. - If engine oil becomes milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair or replace damaged parts. OIL LEAKAGE Check for oil leakage around the following areas: Upper and lower oil pan - Oil pan drain plug - Oil pressure switch - Oil filter - Oil cooler - Water pump cover - Timing chain tensioner cover - Intake valve timing (IVT) control cover and intake valve timing (IVT) control solenoid valve - Front cover - Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head - Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover - Mating surface between the front timing chain case and rear timing chain case - Crankshaft oil seal (front and rear) OIL PRESSURE CHECK WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. - Put the selector lever in the Park "P" position. 1. Check the oil level. 2. Disconnect the oil pressure switch harness connector. 3. Remove the oil pressure switch. CAUTION: Do not drop or shock oil pressure switch. ATC Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair ATC IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. The rear heater and cooling unit assembly only draws in air from the passenger compartment to recirculate into the passenger compartment, so the rear heater and cooling unit assembly is not equipped with in-cabin microfilters. REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the three screws and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. 4. Install the in-cabin microfilters, replacing the two in-cabin microfilters with new filters, into the front heater and cooling unit assembly. CAUTION: When installing the two new in-cabin microfilters make sure that the filters are facing in the direction indicated by the direction arrow for the air flow. The direction arrow is printed on the side of the in-cabin microfilters. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Install the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. Page 3552 Always replace the seal after every disassembly. 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb) 4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Timing Chain: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Classification: EM07-001D Reference: NTB07-042D Date: May 25, 2010 MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY 2004-2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 321 REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim. Page 4860 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 435 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 2485 Page 4773 Cruise Control: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures ASCD Brake Switch ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Specification data are reference values. ASCD Indicator ASCD INDICATOR CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Specification data are reference value. Page 4793 Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation WARNING CHIME System Description FUNCTION Power is supplied at all times through 50A fuse (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to BCM terminal 70, and - through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to key switch terminal 1. With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied to BCM terminal 67 - through body grounds M57, M61, and M79. NOTE: When ignition key warning chime, light warning chime, and seat belt warning chime are required at the same time, the priorities for each chime are the following. 1. Light warning chime 2. Ignition key warning chime 3. Seat belt warning chime IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME With the key inserted in the ignition switch, the ignition switch in OFF position, and the driver's door open, the warning chime will sound. Power is supplied through key switch terminal 2 - to BCM terminal 37. Ground is supplied to BCM terminal 47 - through front door switch LH terminal 1. Front door switch LH is case grounded. BCM detects key inserted into the ignition switch, and sends key warning signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. When combination meter receives key warning signal, it sounds warning chime. LIGHT WARNING CHIME With the key removed from the ignition switch, the driver's door open, and the lighting switch (part of the combination switch) in 1st or 2nd position, the warning chime will sound. [This is the operation of the light warning chime, except when headlamp battery saver control operates (for 5 minutes after ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC position) and headlamps do not illuminate.] Signal is supplied from combination switch (lighting switch) terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10 - to BCM terminals 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 32, 33, 34, 35 and 36. NOTE: BCM detected lighting switch in 1st or 2nd position. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Description and Operation/BCM (Body Control Module) System. Ground is supplied - to BCM terminal 47 - through front door switch LH terminal 1. Front door switch LH is case grounded. BCM detects headlamps are illuminated, and sends light warning signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. When combination meter receives light warning signal, it sounds warning chime. SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME When the ignition switch is turned ON with the seat belt unfastened (seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened), warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds. Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 24 - through seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1. Seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B7 and B19. Combination meter sends seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal to BCM via CAN communication line. BCM receives seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal from combination meter via CAN communication line, and sends seat belt warning signal Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral cable (2). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 1325 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets (no picture shown). NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in Page 1182 Be careful not to damage front timing chain case or crankshaft. INSTALLATION 1. Install the front oil seal on the front timing chain case using a suitable tool. Apply clean engine oil to the oil seal edges. - Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. CAUTION: Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil seal. - Press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with timing chain case end face, using a suitable drift. - Make sure the garter spring in the oil seal is in position and seal lip is not inverted. 2. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps. Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. - For the second step of angle tightening use Tool. 3. Remove Tool attached to the starter bolt hole. Tool number : KV10117700 (J-44716) Page 2509 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 2054 Page 3151 Fuse: Locations Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B) Terminal Arrangement Page 921 The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION maintenance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilometers). Select the "Reset" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button. Displaying the maintenance notice reminder Select the "Display Maintenance Notification" key and press the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically at the set maintenance interval. The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met: - The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition key is turned OFF - The ignition key is turned ON the next time the vehicle will be driven. To return to the previous display after the MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press the BACK button. The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the following conditions are met: - "Reset" key is selected. - "Display Maintenance Notification" is set OFF. - The maintenance interval is set again. HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed, the SETTINGS screen will appear on the display. You can select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle. Move the joystick and press the ENTER button to select each item to be set. System settings Select the "System Settings" key by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER button. The SYSTEM SETTINGS menu will be displayed. Page 2240 4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. 9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. - Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. Page 1169 WARNING: - To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine is hot. - The gasket for intake manifold collector (upper) is secured together with intake manifold collector (lower) bolt. Thus, when replacing only the upper gasket the lower gasket must also be replaced. 1. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the engine cover using power tool. 3. Remove air cleaner case, (upper) mass air flow sensor, and air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube as an assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair. 4. Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 5. Disconnect the following: Power brake booster vacuum hose - Coolant hoses from the intake manifold collector (upper) - Vacuum lines from the intake manifold collector (lower) and power valve - Fuel injector electrical connectors - PCV hose - Electric throttle control actuator electrical connectors - EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve hose - EGR temperature sensor electrical connector CAUTION: Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign material. 6. Remove the EGR tube [to intake manifold collector, (lower)] nuts. 7. Disconnect the power steering hose bracket from the back of the intake manifold collector (upper). 8. Remove the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve bracket bolt. Position the valve aside. 9. Remove the VIAS control solenoid valve bracket bolt. Position the valve aside. 10. Remove the vacuum tank. 11. Remove the intake manifold collector (upper) support bracket from the back of the intake manifold collector (upper) using power tool. 12. Loosen the intake manifold collector (lower) bolts in the order as shown using power tool, and remove the intake manifold collector (upper and lower) and gasket. Page 2504 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 2531 Disclaimer Page 1936 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 626 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 637 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 1498 2. Align the radiator upper clip with the radiator core connector, then insert the radiator upper clip straight into the radiator core connections until a click is heard. 3. After connecting the radiator upper clip, use the following method to make sure it is fully connected. Visually confirm that the two radiator upper clips are connected to the radiator core connections. - Move the radiator upper clip and the radiator core forward and backward to make sure they are securely connected. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Inspection. - Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks or A/T fluid leaks. Page 1811 - Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the valve lifter and camshaft. - Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement lifter size. 6. Turn crankshaft 240°. 7. Set No.3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 8. Check only those valves as shown. Page 3251 Fuse: Locations Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B) Terminal Arrangement Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6 Page 1988 Malfunction Area Chart TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Malfunction Area Chart MAIN LINE BRANCH LINE Headlamp (For USA) Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Headlamp (For USA) HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Bulb Replacement CAUTION: Do not touch bulb by hand right after being turned off. Burning may result. - Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from it. - Do not leave bulb out of front combination lamp assembly for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc. may affect the performance of the lamp. When replacing headlamp bulb, be sure to replace it with a new one. - After installing the bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket securely to ensure watertightness. HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM Removal 1. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM Removal 1. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP Removal 1. Turn the front turn signal/parking lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. 2. Pull bulb to remove it from socket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1747 DESCRIPTION Page 2770 Page 3966 Connectors. - After replacement of side curtain air bag module, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Page 312 Specifications Brake Pad: Specifications Disc Brake Pads AD35VB (Front) Standard thickness ................................................................................................... ................................................................................... 10 mm (0.394 in) Wear limit ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... 2.0 mm (0.079 in) AD14VE (Rear) Standard thickness .................................................................................................... .................................................................................. 8.5 mm (0.335 in) Wear limit ............................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... 2.0 mm (0.079 in) Page 2191 Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >>GO TO 3. No >>GO TO 5. 3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER Replace EVAP canister with a new one. >>GO TO 4. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. >>Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5.CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 6. NG >>Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 6.CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 7. NG >>Replace filler neck tube. 7.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to See: Component Inspection. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 8. NG >>Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 8.CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 9. NG >>Replace fuel filler tube. 9.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I Check one-way valve for clogging. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 10. NG >>Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. 10.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II 1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank. 2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose. Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly. Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location TCS/ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor inoperative. - Pull out the sensor, be careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness. - Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the wheel sensor bolt to the specified torque. - Before installing the wheel sensor, make sure there are no foreign materials (such as iron fragments) adhered to the pick-up part of the wheel sensor, to the inside of the wheel sensor mounting hole or on the rotor mounting surface. FRONT WHEEL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove the front wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Partially remove the front wheel fender protector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor. 4. Remove the harness wire from mounts and disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR WHEEL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor from the rear wheel hub and bearing assemblies. 2. Remove the harness wire from mounts and harness wire clips from the rear suspension member. 3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub. Page 790 - Arrow Indicates Front CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination. 15. Remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe. a. Access the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe from under the vehicle. b. Remove the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A). c. Remove the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B) to release the A/C pipe clamp (2). NOTE: Reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3) for additional clearance to remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe as necessary. d. Pry off the pipe support clip (1) secured to the dash panel threaded stud, using a suitable tool. e. Carefully remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe (1). CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections. - Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones. - Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil. NOTE: The service replacement high/low pressure pipe is a two piece pipe assembly. 1. Install and position the new lower high/low pressure pipe without tightening the connections. Page 1601 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 1921 Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6 Page 2683 1. Use new damper bands for installation. 2. Install damper from stationary-joint side while holding it securely. Page 3618 Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. PASSENGER SIDE Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Mode Door Motor MODE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation Mode Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. Page 4549 Console: Service and Repair Removal CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY Removal 1. Remove storage bin insert (1) and console mat (2). 2. Remove top cover assembly. 3. Open the front bin (1), remove the bolts (A), and center console (2). Page 3668 DESCRIPTION Page 3888 3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH. 4. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 5. Twist and pull the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2212 OK or NG OK >>GO TO 5. NG >>Repair or replace ground connections. 5.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 7. NG >>GO TO 6. 6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors F14, E5 - Harness for open or short between ECM and ground >>Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. Reconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Page 404 Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Tighten upper oil pan bolts in the order as shown. Tighten the lower oil pan bolts in order as shown. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Calculated Load Value Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Calculated Load Value SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Calculated Load Value Component Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2682 6. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown. CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Remove all grease from surfaces. 7. Make sure boot installation length "L" is the specified length indicated below. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool into the large end of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation. Boot installation length "L" : 163 mm (6.42 in) CAUTION: Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value. - Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot. 8. Install new large and small boot bands securely using Tool. Tool number : KV40107300 ( - ) NOTE: Do not reuse boot bands. CAUTION: - Secure boot band so that dimension "M" meets specification as shown. Dimension "M" : 1.0 - 4.0 mm (0.039 - 0.157 in) 9. After installing housing and shaft, rotate boot to check whether or not the actual position is correct. If boot position is not correct, remove old boot bands then reposition the boot and secure with new boot bands. Damper Page 2055 Intake Manifold Collector Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Collector INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL Page 371 Page 3628 The defroster nozzle is part of the instrument panel and is replaced as an assembly. Removal Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Fresh Air Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation FRESH AIR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove the defroster nozzle. 3. Remove the fresh air duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Defroster Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation DEFROSTER DUCT Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the defroster duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH and LH Side Demister Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the RH or LH side demister duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH, LH, and Center Ventilator Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation RH, LH, AND CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT Page 2129 Service and Repair Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair HYDRAULIC LINE Removal and Installation REMOVAL Refer to the illustration for hydraulic tube and hose routing. Remove any components necessary to access the lines. CAUTION: Be careful not to kink or bend the tubes. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Procedures/On-Vehicle Service and See: Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Procedures See: Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal and Installation for tightening torques. NOTE: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. Ensure that hose is properly installed on tube to specification. CAUTION: Do not apply power steering fluid to surface between tube and hose. To install the eye joint on the power steering pump, align the projection of the eye joint into the notch of the power steering pump. Make sure the eye joint is properly installed on the power steering pump, then tighten the eye bolt to specification. - Connect the harness connector into the power steering pressure switch securely. Specifications Fuel Injector: Specifications Fuel Injector Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 624 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 3340 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 4901 LT-INT/L-04 Body - Windshield Cracking Information Windshield: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Cracking Information Classification: BT09-052 Reference: NTB09-091 Date: August 25, 2009 WINDSHIELD CRACKING APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models SERVICE INFORMATION The Purpose of this bulletin is to give Nissan dealers guidelines to help determine if windshield breakage is covered under warranty or is the customer's responsibility. Nissan North America (NNA) is not responsible for damage to glass that is a result of objects striking or scratching the glass. However, NNA is responsible for manufacturing issues such as distorted glass and cracks that are due to improper installation or damage to the glass during vehicle assembly. NNA typically does not find any type of cracks in the windshield due to stress in vehicles with over 5000 miles. Glass damage can be categorized in 3 general areas: 1. Cracks due to objects striking the glass. 2. Cracks due to scratch in glass surface. 3. Distortion or cracks due to manufacturing issues. CLAIMS INFORMATION Part Return Process Reminder Refer to WB/07-010: Nissan is announcing a new requirement in the process for parts return to assist engineers in analyzing part issues. Dealers are now required to mark glass and other components returned that have "visible issues" using a grease pencil or similar instrument to highlight the area damaged. 1) How to determine if glass damage is due to objects striking the glass. Cracks from objects striking the glass Page 403 - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling. - Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Page 2109 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. Locations Door Switch: Locations WARNING CHIME Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Front FRONT DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 3. Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool, then remove cylinder body. 4. Remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on both disc rotor and wheel hub when removing disc rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. CAUTION: Align matching marks made during removal when reusing disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten torque member bolts to specification. Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front/Exploded View. CAUTION: Before installing the cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe any oil off the knuckle spindle washers and cylinder body attachment surfaces. 3. Install brake hose to the cylinder body, and tighten union bolt to the specification. Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front/Exploded View. CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer for union bolts. - Attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body attachment part. 4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5. Install wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. CAUTION: Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations SUNROOF Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4906 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP System Description When lamps on demand switch is in DOOR position, room/map lamp and personal lamp ON/OFF is controlled by timer according to signals from switches including key switch, door switches, unlock signal from keyfob, door lock and unlock switch, key cylinder switch, and ignition switch. When room/map lamp and personal lamp turns ON, there is a gradual brightening over 1 second. When room/map lamp and personal lamp turns OFF, there is a gradual dimming over 1 second. The room/map lamp and personal lamp timer is controlled by the BCM (body control module). Room/map lamp and personal lamp timer control settings can be changed with CONSULT-III. Ignition keyhole illumination turns ON when front door LH is opened (door switch ON) or key is removed from key cylinder. Illumination turns OFF when front door LH is closed (door switch OFF). Step and foot lamp turns ON when any door is opened (door switch ON). Lamp turns OFF when all doors are closed (all door switches OFF). POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND Power is supplied at all times through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] Page 4029 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3315 Page 4274 Disclaimer Page 3631 Removal and Installation GRILLES Removal 1. Remove the interior trim panel(s) as necessary that contains the grille to be removed. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair or See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the grille from the interior trim panel. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3074 ^ Batteries installed in vehicles produced in Japan have a JIS number embossed in the plastic on top of the battery. ^ These vehicles have a VIN that begins with the letter "J". Batteries with CCA (Cold Cranking Amps) Number ^ Batteries installed in vehicles produced in North America have a CCA number displayed on the label attached to the top of the battery. ^ These vehicles have a VIN that begins with a number: 1, 3, or 5. Selecting CCA or JIS in the GR-8 Battery Tester Vehicles with JIS Battery ^ Select JIS, then choose the option that matches the first five (5) characters of the JIS number on the battery. NOTE: DO NOT select CCA when testing a JIS battery. Vehicles with CCA Battery ^ Select CCA, then choose the option that matches the number following "Cold Cranking Amps" on the battery. Reference Material The following information can be printed and attached to the GR-8, if needed. Page 107 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF. Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 1085 - For specified belt deflection and tension, refer to See: Testing and Inspection. NOTE: Adjusting bolt (E) is loosened with counterclockwise rotation. 5. Tighten adjusting bolt (C). Adjusting bolt (C) : 28.0 N.m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb) 6. Tighten power steering oil pump bolt (D). Power steering pump bolt (D) : 43.2 N.m (4.4 kg-m, 32 ft-lb) Page 3413 7. Disconnect the outer tie-rod end from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly, temporarily tighten mounting nut. Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A) 8. Remove transverse link and steering knuckle pinch bolt and nut using power tool. Refer to See: Suspension/Control Arm/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. 9. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft using a puller or suitable tool. CAUTION: When removing wheel hub and bearing assembly, do not apply an excessive angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint. - Support drive shaft when removing. 10. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 11. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. 12. Remove the lower strut bolts and nuts using power tool. Refer to See: Suspension/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension . 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. Ball Joint Inspection Check for boot breakage, axial looseness, and torque of transverse link ball joint. Refer to See: Suspension/Control Arm/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. INSTALLATION Page 3220 Page 3138 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams POWER SOCKET Wiring Diagram - P/SCKT WW-P/SCKT-01 Page 1677 Locations Combination Switch: Locations CORNERING LAMP Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4999 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Page 3519 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear Lower Link And Coil Spring REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Pax Run Flat Tires And Wheels See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, to relieve the coil spring tension and support the rear lower link. 3. Loosen the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut connected to the rear suspension member, using power tool. 4. Remove the rear lower link bolt and nut from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using power tool. 5. Slowly lower the transmission jack to release the coil spring tension. Then remove upper rubber seat, coil spring and lower rubber seat from the rear lower link. 6. Remove the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut from the rear suspension member using power tool, then remove the rear lower link. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. Page 3652 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair MTC AMBIENT SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor connector. NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening, in front of the condenser. 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1490 3. Remove the front heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new front heater core. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR HEATER CORE Removal 1. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. 4. Remove the rear heater core bracket. 5. Remove the rear heater core. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. MTC HEATER CORE Removal and Installation FRONT HEATER CORE Removal Page 4355 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. Page 1221 Page EM-4 Page 3752 REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim. Page 5188 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. Page 3833 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Air Conditioner REFRIGERANT Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... HFC-134a (R-134a) Manual Air Conditioner REFRIGERANT Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... HFC-134a (R-134a) Locations Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location TCS/ABS Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque specifications when connecting the brake tubes. - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). Page 1907 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 3286 Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL TOP Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove RH/LH wiper arms. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System. 2. Remove cowl top cover. a. Release fastener covers and clips. b. Remove cowl top seal by releasing ends from tabs on cowl top cover, then releasing plastic clips. c. Remove cowl top weatherstrip. d. Remove windshield washer nozzles and hoses from cowl top cover. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Hose/Diagrams 3. Remove cowl top extension. a. Remove heater pump from cowl top extension. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Heater Core/Service and Repair/Heater Pump. b. Disconnect clip attaching coolant control valve hose to cowl top extension. Page 2084 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Page 3407 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) CAUTION: Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the tire and wheel will result. - If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly. REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 4. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 6. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. NOTE: Page 557 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 1462 ^ Blue LLC one quart concentrate: P/N 999MP - L255QTP > The one quart concentrate containers are intended for extreme cold weather application. > Use the concentrate without mixing (do not add water). > Add directly to the cooling system in specific amounts as directed on the container label. Additional Information for using Blue LLC Blue LLC and Green-colored Nissan LLC (P/N 999MP-AF000P) are compatible with each other: ^ Blue can be mixed/added with Green ^ Green can be mixed/added with Blue CAUTION: ^ Adding Green LLC to Blue LLC will reduce/shorten the life expectancy of the Blue LLC to that of the Green LLC (4 years / 60,000 miles). ^ LLC must always be used with demineralized or distilled water, otherwise the life expectancy of the LLC (Blue or Green) will be degraded and cooling system damage may occur. Page 3956 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification system sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Seat Cushion/Disassembly and Assembly to remove the seat, and See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Seat Cushion to replace the seat cushion assembly. Page 4310 5. Remove screws and rear bumper fascia. 6. Remove rear bumper side brackets RH/LH. 7. Remove rear bumper reinforcement. - Separate rear bumper energy absorber from rear bumper reinforcement. 8. Remove rear bumper step pad from rear bumper fascia. 9. Remove sonar sensors and retainers from rear bumper fascia, if equipped. Separate sonar sensors and retainers. 10. Remove sonar sensor harness from rear bumper fascia. 11. Remove drafter duct from rear bumper area. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1993 - Models with VDC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to the following. Models with TCS: See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Description and Operation/TCS/ABS Schematic - Models with VDC: See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Description and Operation/VDC/TCS/ABS Schematic OK or NG OK - Present error: Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to the following. - Models with TCS: See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/TCS/ABS - Models with VDC: See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS - Past error: Error was detected in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. BCM Branch Line Circuit TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS BCM Branch Line Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of BCM. 2. Check the resistance between the BCM harness connector terminals. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the BCM branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. OK or NG Page 1588 Page 1134 Figure 2. NOTE Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION Tighten the bolt no more then necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 269 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Power Door Lock System POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3637 2. Remove the RH, center, and LH ventilator duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Floor Connector Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation FLOOR CONNECTOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the three clips and remove the floor connector duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Floor Distribution Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation FLOOR DISTRIBUTION DUCT Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Floor Junction Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct. 3. Remove the floor junction duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Floor Junction Duct Extension DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT EXTENSION Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. Page 304 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations MTC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 696 - Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the valve lifter and camshaft. - Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement lifter size. 6. Turn crankshaft 240°. 7. Set No.3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 8. Check only those valves as shown. Page 2085 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 3020 Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly. Locations Courtesy Lamp: Locations INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1637 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral cable (2). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 1894 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection 1.FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION Check that the following fusible links or IPDM E/R fuses are not blown. OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Replace fuse or fusible link. 2.POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector E120 terminals 1, 2 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness. 3.GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121 and E124. 2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121(A) terminal 60, E124(B) terminal 38 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - Inspection End. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R ground circuit harness. Page 2884 CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis as shown. 3. Turn input rod to adjust the brake pedal to the specified height. When the brake pedal is adjusted to specification, tighten the lock nut to specification. Refer to See: Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Brake Booster/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Booster. Tool number : - (J-46532) 4. With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD cancel switch in until the threaded ends contact the rubber stops. 5. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch contacting the rubber stops, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock them in place. CAUTION: Make sure that the gap "C1" and "C2" between the rubber stops and switch ends are within specification. 6. Check the pedal play "A". CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released. 7. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it. Page 4181 AV-DVD-02 MODELS WITHOUT REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY Page 4889 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Page 5034 OK or NG OK - GO TO 4. NG - Check harness between BCM and combination switch for open or short circuit. 4.BCM OUTPUT TERMINAL INSPECTION 1. Turn lighting switch and wiper switch to OFF. 2. Set wiper dial to position 4. 3. Connect BCM and combination switch connectors. 4. Turn ignition switch ON, and check combination switch input (BCM output) terminal voltage waveform of suspect malfunctioning system. OK or NG OK - Open circuit in combination switch, GO TO 5. NG - Replace BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair. 5.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION Referring to table below, perform combination switch inspection. Page 1347 Page EM-17 Page 2081 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Suspension Arm Control Arm: Testing and Inspection Suspension Arm SUSPENSION ARM Inspection - Check suspension arm for damage, cracks, deformation and replace if necessary. - Check rubber bushing for damage, cracks and deformation. Replace suspension arm assembly if necessary. - Check ball joint. Replace suspension arm assembly if any of the following exists: - Ball stud is worn. - Joint is hard to swing. - Play in axial direction is excessive. - Before checking, turn ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that ball joint is properly broken in. Locations Remote Switch: Locations REAR VIEW MONITOR Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1951 Information Bus: Description and Operation TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Schematic Page 368 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattles Heat Shield: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattles Classification: EM10-003 Reference: NTB10-097 Date: August 23, 2010 EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002 - 2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35DE (V6) engine only 2007 - 2010 Altima Sedan (L32) 2008 - 2010 Altima Coupe (CL32) 2007 - 2010 Altima Hybrid (L32HV) 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2009 - 2010 Maxima (A35) 2004- 2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle. ACTION: Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION). ^ Refer to REPAIR PROCEDURE. Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE WARNING: Page 466 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. Page 149 Attachment General Procedure Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Engine Oil: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Classification: EM07-001D Reference: NTB07-042D Date: May 25, 2010 MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY 2004-2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 2201 EGR Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 212 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both terminals and wait at least three minutes. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 3. Remove center console lower cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 4. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 5. Remove bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts. - Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to make sure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one. - Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/CONSULT-III Function (Air Bag). Page 2230 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Fuel Pressure Check FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because V42 models never have fuel return system. Method A CAUTION: The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other purposes. - Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge. - Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector). - To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check. - Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it. - Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. 3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover. Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake Manifold Collector Page 5102 DESCRIPTION Page 3314 Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Maintenance Information CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (With and Without Navigation System) COLOR SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start. Reference symbols: ENTER button - This is a button on the control panel. By pressing this button you can select the item or perform this action. "Display" key - This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function. HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND ENTER BUTTON Use the joystick to choose an item on the display screen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right to highlight an item. Then press the ENTER button to select the item or perform the action. HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON This button has two functions. - Go back to the previous display (cancel). If you press the BACK button during setup, the setup will be canceled and/or the display will return to the previous screen. - Finish setup. In some screens pressing the BACK button accepts the changes made during setup. HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON Page 2952 3. Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. 4. Bleed air from the brake system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Page 1828 Page 1295 1. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(LH) 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket RH (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Timing chain (secondary) 10. Camshaft sprocket LH (EXH) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Tension guide CAUTION: - After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will strike the pistons. - When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. - Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets, camshaft brackets, and crankshaft pulley. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the rocker covers or intake manifold collector to remove or install the timing chain(s). Removal 1. Set No. 1 cylinder to TDC. - Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing indicator. 2. Remove front timing chain case. 3. Check timing chain markings to confirm No. 1 cylinder is at TDC of its compression stroke. - If not, remove Ring Gear Stopper Tool and turn crankshaft clockwise 360° (one revolution). Re-install Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B) Terminal Arrangement Page 3615 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair MTC Defroster Door Motor DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation Defroster Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the steering member from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Disconnect the defroster door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the two screws and remove the defroster door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Component INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Component Page 1977 3. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST): Check the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST) of units indicating "U1000" or "U1001" on SELF-DIAG RESULTS. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible error circuit. NOTE: While an error occurred in the past according to SELF-DIAG RESULTS, it is unclear which signal is not received. Assume that errors were detected from all reception items. - Draw a single line among the unit and all reception items. (Work flow differs from CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST).) a. Reception item of "EPS": Assume that the unit could not receive the signals from ECM, ABS, and M&A.; Draw a line among EPS, ECM, ABS, and M&A; (line 3-a in the figure below). b. Reception item of "ABS": Assume that the unit could not receive the signal from ECM. Draw a line between ABS and ECM (line 3-b in the figure below). Page 162 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Page 774 4. After warming up the engine, check for engine oil leaks. 5. Install the RH splash shield. 6. Check engine oil level and add engine oil as necessary. Refer to See: Fluids/Engine Oil/Service and Repair. Page 1143 Oil Filter: Service and Repair OIL FILTER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the RH splash shield. 2. Remove the oil filter using Tool. Tool number : KV10115801 (J-38956) WARNING: Be careful not to get burned, the engine and engine oil may be hot. CAUTION: The oil filter is equipped with a relief valve. Use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent. - When removing the oil filter, use a shop cloth to absorb any oil leaks or spills. - Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts. - Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. INSTALLATION 1. Remove any foreign material adhering to the oil filter installation surface. 2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of the new oil filter as shown. 3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by turning another 2/3 turn as shown. Or tighten to specification using Tool. Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair BRAKE FLUID Bleeding Brake System CAUTION: Carefully monitor brake fluid level at the sub tank during bleeding operation. - Fill the sub tank with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding the air out of system. - Place a container under the sub tank to avoid spilling brake fluid. - Do not loosen the line fittings at the ABS actuator during air bleeding. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and control unit connector or negative battery terminal. 2. Connect a transparent vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal several times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release air. 5. Close air bleeder valve. 6. Release brake pedal slowly. 7. Tighten air bleeder valve to specification. Air bleeder valve : Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front/Exploded View, See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View. 8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 until no more air bubbles come out of air bleeder valve. 9. Bleed the brake hydraulic system air bleeder valves in the following order: Right rear brake to Left front brake to Left rear brake to Right front brake Page 4039 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Service and Repair Door Locks: Service and Repair SLIDE DOOR LOCK Removal and Installation OUTSIDE HANDLE 1. Remove the sliding door finisher. Refer to See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the grommet, and the outside handle escutcheon bolt (TORX T30) from grommet hole. 3. While pulling the outside handle (1), remove outside handle escutcheon (2). 4. While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle to remove (2). 5. Remove the front gasket and rear gasket. Page 3620 Removal and Installation AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel. 3. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR) Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the rear air mix door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the rear air mix door motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1617 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 2551 Piston stroke :0.76 - 1.44mm (0.0299 - 0.0567in) 21. Install thrust washer facing the flat surface up. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. 22. Install oil seal into oil pump assembly until it is flush using Tool. Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405) CAUTION: Do not reuse oil seal. - Apply ATF to oil seal. Page 877 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Air Conditioner REFRIGERANT Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... HFC-134a (R-134a) Manual Air Conditioner REFRIGERANT Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... HFC-134a (R-134a) Page 2135 Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Component Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3341 Page 5036 Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures COMBINATION SWITCH CONSULT-III Function (BCM) CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be monitored. 6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Page 147 Page 732 - Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is heard. - After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with the electric fuel pump applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping. 2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 1326 Figure 2. NOTE Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION Tighten the bolt no more then necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3 minutes. Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing. Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it. Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and delete the memory by CONSULT-III. If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to Page 2557 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 2426 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUG Page 5124 Check continuity between rear window defogger relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. OK or NG OK - GO TO 4. NG - Replace rear window defogger relay. 4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Install rear window defogger relay. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E121 terminal 52 and ground. OK or NG OK - Rear window defogger power supply circuit check is OK. NG - GO TO 5. 5.CHECK IPDM E/R HARNESS 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R and rear window defogger relay. 3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E121 (A) terminal 52 and rear window defogger relay connector B4 (B) terminal 2. 52 - 2 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. Page 375 Combination Switch: Electrical Diagrams COMBINATION SWITCH Wiring Diagram - COMBSW LT-COMBSW-01 Page 3302 - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. Page 1235 Page EM-18 Page 770 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Page 1271 9. Install upper oil pan bolts as shown. Upper oil pan bolts : 22.0 N-m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb) 10. Install lower oil pan. 11. Install IVT control valve covers as follows: a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides). b. Install new seal rings on the IVT control valve covers. c. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT control valve covers. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. - Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes to install the IVT control valve covers. - Tighten the intake valve timing control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. - A: Bank 1 (Conventional RH bank) - B: Bank 2 (Conventional LH bank) Page 4541 3. Using needle nose pliers, install the anti-rattle spring as shown in Figure 3. 4. Check to make sure both ends of the anti-rattle spring are correctly installed and fully seated as shown in Figure 4. 5. Check to make sure the seat is operating properly and the anti-rattle spring stays in place. Page 1659 Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. Page 4128 functions will be disabled based on driving conditions. Bluetooth ON Indicator The Bluetooth ON indicator is located in the overhead console. The indicator will flash during power up while the Bluetooth control unit is initializing. This process may take up to 10 seconds. After initialization, the indicator will remain on to indicate that the system is ready for voice commands. Audio Unit The audio unit receives signals from the Bluetooth control unit and sends audio signals to the speakers. Page 3379 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 494 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3027 Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Locations Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 1546 Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp. 7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair. Page 2764 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3649 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations MTC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Parking Brake Control Parking Brake Control: Specifications Parking Brake Control SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Parking Brake Control Page 1234 Page EM-17 Page 2772 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 559 Always replace the seal after every disassembly. 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb) 4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 1338 Page EM-8 Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Oil Filter: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Classification: EM07-001D Reference: NTB07-042D Date: May 25, 2010 MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY 2004-2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 3578 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 1974 Present Error -- Short Circuit -- When the symptoms listed below exist, a short circuit of the CAN communication line is a possible cause. Error symptom Most the units connected to the CAN communication system go into fail-safe mode or are deactivated. Inspection procedure - Refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis/Malfunction Area Chart. Page 1063 Valve Clearance: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT Valve Clearance CHECKING Perform inspection as follows after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve related parts, or if there is unusual engine conditions regarding valve clearance. NOTE: Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running. 1. Remove the intake manifold collectors. Refer to See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Collector. 2. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation LH (LH) and See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation RH (RH). 3. Remove the rocker covers. See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair. 4. Set No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. Align pointer (A) with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. - Check that the valve lifters on No.1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No.4 are tight. If not, turn the crankshaft one full revolution (360°) and align as shown. - RH cylinder head (1) - White Arrow Indicates Engine front 5. Check only the valves as shown. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Capacity With Reservoir ..................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 2-3/4 gal(10.5L) Page 1280 a. Install the crankshaft sprocket. - Make sure the mating marks on the crankshaft sprocket face front of engine. 4. Install the timing chain (primary). - Water pump (G). - Install timing chain (primary) so the mating mark (punched) (B) on camshaft sprocket (C) is aligned with the copper link (A) on the timing chain, while the mating mark (notched) (E) on the crankshaft sprocket (D) is aligned with the yellow one (F) on the timing chain, as shown. - When it is difficult to align mating marks of the timing chain (primary) with each sprocket, gradually turn the camshaft to align it with the mating marks. - During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating mark alignments of the secondary timing chains. Page 3784 3. Remove the front heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new front heater core. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR HEATER CORE Removal 1. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. 4. Remove the rear heater core bracket. 5. Remove the rear heater core. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. MTC HEATER CORE Removal and Installation FRONT HEATER CORE Removal Page 4180 Entertainment Systems: Electrical Diagrams DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Wiring Diagram - DVD AV-DVD-01 Page 1318 Figure 2. NOTE Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION Tighten the bolt no more then necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 4177 Page 784 Hose/Line HVAC: Removal and Replacement Component REFRIGERANT LINES Component Front A/C Compressor and Condenser Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 4540 1. Move the 2nd row seat fully forward and lift the seat up. See Figure 1. NOTE: ^ These photos are for the LH side. Repeat steps 1-4 for the RH side if needed. 2. Check to see if the inner and outer anti-rattle spring has fallen off the seat. See Figure 2. ^ Replace the springs with the ones listed in the Parts Information. Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Page 5025 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS ATC Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations ATC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 1935 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 4761 ASCD Indicator ASCD INDICATOR Wiring Diagram Page 3941 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both terminals and wait at least three minutes. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 3. Remove center console lower cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 4. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 5. Remove bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts. - Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to make sure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one. - Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/CONSULT-III Function (Air Bag). Page 4643 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 3316 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove coolant reservoir fasteners. 3. Move coolant reservoir aside. 4. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 5. Remove IPDM E/R harness cover. 6. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 7. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1298 - When handling camshaft sprocket (INT), be careful of the following: CAUTION: - Handle carefully to avoid any shock to camshaft sprocket. - Do not disassemble. (Do not loosen bolts (A) as shown). NOTE: For removal of timing chain tensioner (secondary), refer to Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner). [Removing camshaft bracket (No. 1) is required.] Inspection Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Classification: EL10-028 Reference: NTB10-106 Date: September 10, 2010 NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System SERVICE INFORMATION All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic. VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic: ^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not operate. ^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM, I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information as needed. Procedures Hose/Line HVAC: Procedures REFRIGERANT LINES HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Discharging Refrigerant WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers. Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant Page 1967 CREATE DIAGNOSIS SHEET NOTE: Be sure to use the diagnosis sheet for the correct CAN system type. Print Diagnosis Sheet Print the diagnosis sheet for the applicable CAN system type. Check Collected Data Make sure that all ECUs are received, referring to "ECU list". For abbreviations, refer to See: CAN/Abbreviation List. Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 1299 Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary. - Inspect all timing chains and associated parts for wear or damage, replace as necessary. Installation Page 1854 DESCRIPTION Page 4439 Be careful not to bend the cable too much, keeping the radius 100mm (3.94 in) or more. 2. Make sure the cable is not offset from the positioning grommet, and push the grommet into the panel hole securely. 3. Apply the sealant around the grommet at * mark. 4. Install the cable securely to the lock. 5. After installing, check the hood lock adjustment and hood opener operation. Refer to See: Adjustments. Page 3472 Ball Joint: Specifications Rear Suspension Ball Joint Page 2471 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral position. 4. Remove range lever and install Tool. Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404) 5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base line on PNP switch body. 7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments. 10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705. Page 4828 select the item or perform the action. HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON When the TRIP button is pressed, the following modes will display on the screen. Warning message (if any) -- TRIP 1 -- TRIP 2 -- FUEL ECONOMY -- MAINTENANCE -- Audio or OFF -- TRIP 1 Maintenance items Press the TRIP button to display maintenance information or set maintenance intervals for the following: - Engine Oil - Tire Rotation - Tire Pressure (if so equipped) For setting the Tire Pressure display1 refer to "Tire pressure information" later in this section. Changing the maintenance interval Select the "Engine Oil" or "Tire Rotation" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button to display the screen to change the maintenance interval. Select the "Maintenance Schedule" key using the joystick and move the joystick to right or left to set the maintenance interval. Resetting the maintenance interval Component Tests and General Diagnostics Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics COMBINATION SWITCH Combination Switch Inspection 1.SYSTEM CHECK 1. Referring to table below, check to which system the malfunctioning switch belongs. - GO TO 2. 2.SYSTEM CHECK With CONSULT-III 1. Connect CONSULT-III, and select "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR". 3. Select "START" and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Without CONSULT-III Operate combination switch and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT WIPER INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, operate normally. Check results Other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.-Replace lighting switch or wiper switch. Other switches in malfunctioning system do not operate normally. - GO TO 3. 3.HARNESS INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors. 3. Check for continuity between BCM harness connector of the suspect system and the corresponding combination switch connector terminals. 4. Check for continuity between each terminal of BCM harness connector in suspect malfunctioning system and ground. Page 3708 Compressor Clutch: Specifications Manual Air Conditioner Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance (B) ....................................................................................................................................... 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Testing and Inspection Radius Arm: Testing and Inspection RADIUS ROD Inspection - Check radius rod for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary. Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 2765 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4912 Courtesy Lamp: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONSULT-III Function (BCM) CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. Touch "CHANGE SETT". 6. The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END". Display Item List Reference between "MODE" and "TIME" for "TURN ON/OFF". DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". Page 1577 Page 2148 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater Component Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2382 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 850 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets (no picture shown). NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Bulb: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1348 Page EM-18 Page 1456 b. Apply a continuous bead of RTV Silicone Sealant, or equivalent, to mating surface of chain tensioner cover and water pump cover. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants. 9. Install water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block. Water drain plug : 9.5 N.m (0.97 kg-m, 76 in-lb) 10. Tighten idler pulley bolts. Idler pulley bolts : 34.8 N.m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb) 11. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. - Refill engine coolant. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. - After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to purge air from the high-pressure chamber of the chain tensioner. The engine may produce a rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Inspection. - Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks or A/T fluid leaks. Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 5022 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1386 - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. b. Before installing timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets, confirm mating marks are visible. If necessary, use paint or equivalent to re-mark the camshaft sprockets at each mating mark. c. Install timing chains (secondary) (8) and camshaft sprockets [INT (1) and EXH (9)]. - Left bank mating marks (6) - Align the timing chain mating marks (secondary) (2) (yellow color link) with the ones on camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH)(4), (5), (7) and (10)(punched), and install them. NOTE: - Mating marks for camshaft sprocket (INT) are on the back side of camshaft sprocket (secondary). - There are two types of mating marks, circle (7), (10) and oval (4), (5) types. They should be used for the right and left banks, respectively. Right bank : Use circle type (7) and (10). Left bank : Use oval type (4) and (5). - Align dowel pin (3) and pin hole on camshafts with the groove (11) and dowel pin on sprockets, and install them. - On the intake side, align pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft front end with dowel pin (3) on the back side of camshaft sprocket, and install them. - On the exhaust side, align dowel pin on camshaft front end with pin groove (11) on camshaft sprocket, and install them. - In case that positions of each mating mark and each dowel pin do not fit on mating parts, make fine adjustment to the position by slightly turning camshaft(s). - Bolts for camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is enough to prevent the dislocation of dowel pins. d. Confirm the mating marks are aligned, then finger tighten camshaft sprocket bolts. Final tightening will be done with all timing chains installed. e. Remove stopper pins out from timing chain tensioners (secondary). 3. Install timing chain (primary) as follows: Page 1631 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 2002 CAN System Specification Chart TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CAN System Specification Chart Determine CAN system type from the following specification chart. Then choose the correct diagnosis sheet. NOTE: Refer to See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis Work Flow/Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for how to use CAN system specification chart. Service and Repair Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair FENDER PROTECTOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove splash guard. Refer to See: Bumper/Front Bumper/Service and Repair. 2. Remove pushpin clips. 3. Remove screws. 4. Remove front fender protector. 5. Remove metal clips. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the fresh air duct. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the mass air flow sensor. 3. Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator. 4. Disconnect the PCV hose. 5. Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper) with the mass air flow sensor attached. 6. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case (upper), as necessary. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. Do not shock it. - Do not disassemble it. - Do not touch the sensor. 7. Remove the air cleaner case (lower). 8. Remove resonator in the fender, lifting left fender protector, as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER NOTE: Page 4015 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF OUTBOARD SEAT BELT RETRACTOR Removal 1. Remove the upper anchor bolt cover. 2. Remove the D-ring anchor bolt cover and D-ring anchor bolt. 3. Remove the seat belt lower anchor. 4. Remove the upper luggage area trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolt and retractor assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER SEAT BELT RETRACTOR Removal 1. Remove the upper luggage area trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Lower the rear portion of the headliner. 3. Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolts and retractor assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE Removal 1. Rotate third row seat assembly rearward to expose underside. 2. Release seat cushion trim cover locking strip. 3. Remove the seat belt buckle anchor bolt and seat belt buckle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Seat belt buckle anchor bolt : 49 N.m (5.0 kg-m, 36 ft-lb) Page 5094 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Installation LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2493 Page 2567 Page 1113 Figure 2. NOTE Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION Tighten the bolt no more then necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 2173 WARNING: - Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have completely cooled down. - When removing the front and rear engine mounting through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up slightly for safety. For engine slingers, refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair. 1. Disconnect battery. Refer to See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Remove cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) connector. 4. Remove the front wheel and tires using power tool. 5. Remove the engine undercover. 6. Remove the inner wheel well splash shields. 7. If removing only air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) do so at this time through the wheel well opening, using Tool. Tool number : KV991J0050 (J-44626) 8. If removing the exhaust manifold (LH bank), remove the radiator and cooling fan assembly. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair. 9. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Service and Repair/Exploded View. 10. If removing the exhaust manifold (RH), remove the front suspension member. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension Member. 11. Remove the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst manifolds support bolts in the order as shown. Arrow Indicates : Engine front 12. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1), heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2), air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2). a. Remove harness connector of each sensor, and disconnect the harness from the bracket and middle clamp. b. Remove both heated oxygen sensors and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors using Tool. Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensors or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors. - Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor. 13. Remove exhaust manifold and three way catalyst manifold heat shields using power tool. 14. Remove the three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 1) and three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 2) by loosening the bolts first and then removing the nuts and through bolts using power tool. 15. Remove the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifolds. Loosen the exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown using power tool. Arrow Indicates : Engine front Page 2894 CAUTION: - Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper. - Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Sliding Pins, Sliding Pin Bolts, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pins, sliding pin bolts, and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Visual Inspection Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, secure disc rotor to the wheel hub in 2 or more positions. 2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. CAUTION: Before measuring, make sure the axle end play is 0 mm (0 in). Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle. 3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout is outside the specified value after performing the above operation, turn the disc rotor using Tool. Tool number : 38-PFM90.5 Thickness Inspection Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness does not meet specification, replace disc rotor. Page 5132 OK or NG OK - Rear window defogger switch check is OK. NG - GO TO 2. 2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM and front air control. 3. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 (A) terminal 9 and front air control connector M49 (B) terminal 16. 9 - 16 : Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 9 and ground 9 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. Connect BCM. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 9 and ground. 9 - Ground : Approx. 5V OK or NG OK - Replace front air control. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Assembly/Service and Repair. NG - Replace BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair. Page 4757 Page 491 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 1093 Engine Oil Pressure: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE OIL PUMP OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Service and Repair Headliner: Service and Repair HEADLINING Removal and Installation Without Sunroof With Sunroof Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Page 294 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console lower cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts. CAUTION: Do not use power tools to remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. - Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts to specification. CAUTION: Do not use power tools to install the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. - Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Page 4951 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Page 2486 Page 714 - For specified belt deflection and tension, refer to See: Testing and Inspection. NOTE: Adjusting bolt (E) is loosened with counterclockwise rotation. 5. Tighten adjusting bolt (C). Adjusting bolt (C) : 28.0 N.m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb) 6. Tighten power steering oil pump bolt (D). Power steering pump bolt (D) : 43.2 N.m (4.4 kg-m, 32 ft-lb) Page 612 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 536 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 3306 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Auto Active Test IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: - Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Cornering lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (High, Low) - A/C compressor (magnet clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System) or See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) when the auto active test cannot be performed. INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the following nine steps are repeated three times. (A): Oil pressure warning lamp is blinking when the auto active test is operating. Locations Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1531 Install the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown. Page 3237 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 1583 Electrical Units Location Wiper Motor: Locations Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 671 Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm assembly (5). Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications CRANKSHAFT Page 3331 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Service and Repair Sliding Door Window Glass: Service and Repair SLIDE DOOR GLASS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Apply protective tape around the slide door glass to protect the painted surface from damage. 2. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: When a slide door glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. - While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. - The rubber seal must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. - Inform customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesives are flammable. - The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. - Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. if affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to area with fresh air. Driving the vehicle before urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the slide door glass in case of an accident. CAUTION: Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Page 1493 REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Unclip the heater pump from the cowl top extension. 4. Disconnect the heater pump electrical connector and the two heater hoses, then remove the heater pump. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the heater pump, replace the heater pump as an assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3267 HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Page 4887 DESCRIPTION Page 2489 Page 1439 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CYLINDER HEAD On-Vehicle Service CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. Release fuel pressure and leave the fuel pump electrically disconnected. Refer to See: Fuel Pressure/Testing and Inspection. 4. Remove all six spark plugs. Refer to See: Spark Plug/Service and Repair. 5. Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. 6. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep the electric throttle control actuator butterfly-valve wide open to maximize air intake flow. 7. Crank the engine and record the highest gauge indication. 8. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder (steps 5 - 7). NOTE: Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. 9. If compression in one or more cylinders is low: a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through the spark plug holes. b. Retest compression (steps 5 - 8). - If adding oil helps raise compression pressure, then the piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston. - If the pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or is seating improperly. Inspect and repair the valve and/or valve seat. Refer to See: Maintenance. If the valve and/or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace as necessary. - If compression stays low in two or more cylinders that are next to each other: - The cylinder head gasket may be leaking. - Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary. 10. After inspection is complete, install removed components. 11. Start engine and confirm that engine runs smoothly. 12. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis Introduction. Page 2149 Oxygen Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Component Console: Service and Repair Component CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY Component Page 3551 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) CAUTION: Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the tire and wheel will result. - If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly. REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 4. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 6. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. NOTE: Page 2059 Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 2960 - Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Locations Hose/Line HVAC: Locations REFRIGERANT LINES Component Front A/C Compressor and Condenser Navigation Sysetm - Various Garmin Nuvi(R) Issues Global Positioning System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Sysetm - Various Garmin Nuvi(R) Issues Classification: EL09-017 Reference: NTB09-047 Date: June 17, 2009 NISSAN (GARMIN) PORTABLE NAVIGATION UNIT ISSUES APPLIED VEHICLES: Any equipped with the Nissan (Garmin) Nuvi 750 unit. SERVICE INFORMATION If there is any incident with the function of the Nuvi 750 Portable Navigation Unit BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY REPAIRS: Perform a System Reset of the Unit by sliding the "Power Key" to the left and hold for eight (8) seconds, then return it to the normal position. If a System Reset resolves the incident inform the customer that this System Reset can be performed by them at any time such an incident may occur. NOTE: ^ DO NOT REPLACE the Unit when a System Reset will resolve an incident, if one should occur. ^ This action will perform a "Soft Reset" (i.e. "reboot") of the Unit. ^ This action will not affect stored user data such as "Favorites", "Recently Found", etc. ^ This System Reset instruction is in the Unit Owner's Manual and referenced in NNA CLAIMS BULLETIN WB/09-014* "Replacement Procedures for Nissan (Garmin) Portable Navigation Unit". *This CLAIMS BULLETIN can be found at NNAnet.com. Go to: Applications > My Documents Click on Advanced in the Search area Under Advanced Search select the Include archives box Type GARMIN in the Keywords box and click on SEARCH Disclaimer Page 2453 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams A/T INDICATOR Wiring Diagram - AT/IND DI-AT/IND-01 Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb Page 1895 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 2009 3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) Check the continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector. OK or NG OK >> Present error: Check the following items again. - Decision of CAN system type. - Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included)]. - Not copied from on-board diagnosis. - Procedure for detecting root cause. - Past error: Error was detected in the main line between the TCM and the data link connector. NG >> Repair the main line between the harness connector M91 and the data link connector. Steering Angle Sensor Branch Line Circuit TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Steering Angle Sensor Branch Line Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of steering angle sensor. 2. Check the resistance between the steering angle sensor harness connector terminals. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the steering angle sensor branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Description and Operation/VDC/TCS/ABS Schematic. OK or NG OK >>. Present error: Replace the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension/Sensors and Switches - Steering/Steering Angle Sensor/Service and Repair. - Past error: Error was detected in the steering angle sensor branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. TCM Branch Line Circuit TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TCM Branch Line Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE Page 2875 CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 2306 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Locations Remote Control Module: Locations AUDIO Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 497 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Page 2767 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 2324 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. Page 4175 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 108 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Auto Active Test IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: - Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Cornering lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (High, Low) - A/C compressor (magnet clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System) or See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) when the auto active test cannot be performed. INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the following nine steps are repeated three times. (A): Oil pressure warning lamp is blinking when the auto active test is operating. Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) And Rear Power Socket (Cargo) Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) And Rear Power Socket (Cargo) POWER SOCKET Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) and Rear Power Socket (Cargo) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove inner socket from ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 3. Disconnect power socket electrical connector. 4. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2001 CAN System (Type 3) TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CAN System (Type 3) DIAGNOSIS SHEET Service and Repair Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation FRONT AIR CONTROL Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the front air control. 2. Remove cluster lid C, disconnect the front air control electrical connector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Cluster Lid C. 3. Remove the screws securing the front air control (1) to cluster lid C (2). 4. Remove the front air control. Installation Installation is the reverse order of removal. REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the rear air control (front). 2. Remove the front roof console assembly from the headlining, located over the rear view mirror. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the screws securing the rear air control (front) (1) to the front roof console assembly (2). 4. Remove the rear air control (front). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) Removal Electrical - Starting/Charging/Battery Testing Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Starting/Charging/Battery Testing Classification: EL99-016V Reference: NTB99-048V Date: March 11, 2010 BATTERY / STARTING / CHARGING SYSTEM TESTING This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissans including Altima Hybrid HEV* 12 volt battery *For information on using this tool with Altima Hybrid 12 volt batteries, refer to NTB07-007. SERVICE INFORMATION The Midtronics GR-8 - Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station is the factory-approved battery, starter, and alternator tester. ^ For warranty documentation purposes, as of September 30, 2008 the GR-8 is the only approved diagnostic tool for batteries, starters, and alternators. ^ Print-outs from this tester are required for claim reimbursements related to batteries, starters, and/or alternators. ^ For additional information regarding claims reimbursements, refer to the current Nissan Assurance Products Resource Manual. ^ For the complete GR-8 User Guide, refer to ASIST - TOOLS & EQUIPMENT. ^ Additional tools and replacement parts can be ordered from TECH-MATE. ^ This essential tool was shipped to your dealership and invoiced to your Nissan Non-Vehicle account in three equal installments of $641.00 (plus applicable taxes) in accordance with your dealer agreement with Nissan North America, Inc. This price includes both the GR8-1200-NI and the EXP-800-NI shipped in April 2008. Nissan vehicles equipped with standard lead/acid batteries use one of two different types with unique battery rating specifications: JIS & CCA. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Classification: EM07-001D Reference: NTB07-042D Date: May 25, 2010 MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY 2004-2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 114 Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R Removal and Installation (Right Side) Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Removal and Installation (Right Side) FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Removal and Installation (Right Side) REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (TCS/ABS) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (VDC/TCS/ABS). 3. Remove cotter pin. Then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 4. Remove brake hose lock plate. Then remove brake hose from strut. 5. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt using power tool, then separate lower ball joint from steering knuckle. Refer to See: Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle. 6. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly, using a puller or suitable tool. CAUTION: When removing drive shaft, do not apply an excessive angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint. Page 378 OK or NG OK - GO TO 4. NG - Check harness between BCM and combination switch for open or short circuit. 4.BCM OUTPUT TERMINAL INSPECTION 1. Turn lighting switch and wiper switch to OFF. 2. Set wiper dial to position 4. 3. Connect BCM and combination switch connectors. 4. Turn ignition switch ON, and check combination switch input (BCM output) terminal voltage waveform of suspect malfunctioning system. OK or NG OK - Open circuit in combination switch, GO TO 5. NG - Replace BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair. 5.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION Referring to table below, perform combination switch inspection. Mechanical Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Mechanical Specifications Oil Pump SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE OIL PUMP OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Regulator Valve SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE Page 1944 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Wiring Diagram - CAN LAN-CAN-01 Page 5123 3. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or battery voltage. 4. To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the point. Rear Window Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Rear Window Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection 1.CHECK FUSES Check if any of the following fuses in fuse block (J/B) and IPDM E/R are blown. OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse, refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Description and Operation. 2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rear window defogger relay. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between rear window defogger relay connector and ground. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY Page 1989 SHORT CIRCUIT Front Wiper And Washer System Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Front Wiper And Washer System FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Washer Fluid Reservoir REMOVAL 1. Remove fender protector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the washer fluid reservoir (2) from the vehicle. Twist and pull out washer fluid reservoir inlet (1). - Remove front and rear washer motor electrical connector (3) and washer fluid level sensor electrical connector. - Remove washer fluid reservoir screws (A). - Remove front and rear washer hoses. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Washer fluid reservoir screws : 5.5 N.m (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb) CAUTION: After installation, add water up to the upper level of the washer fluid reservoir inlet, and check for water leaks. Page 5075 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2966 Brake Master Cylinder: Overhaul BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER Disassembly and Assembly WITHOUT VDC MODELS Disassembly 1. Lift up the tabs on the stopper cap and remove it from the master cylinder using a suitable tool as shown. The piston inside the master cylinder might pop out when this is done, so hold the stopper cap down at the same time. Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information Classification: EM09-001A Reference: NTB09-040A Date: May 14, 2010 NEW BLUE NISSAN LONG LIFE ANTIFREEZE/COOLANT This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. SERVICE INFORMATION In calendar year 2009, Nissan began filling some vehicles at the factory with a NEW Nissan Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (LLC) that is blue in color. NOTE: LLC = Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant The transition to this new Blue LLC continued though MY 2010. Beginning with MY 2011, all Nissan vehicles are filled at the factory with the Blue LLC. ^ MY 2009 and 2010: Some vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC. ^ MY 2011: All vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC. Blue LLC is designed to have a service life of 7 years/105,000 miles for the factory fill, and 5 years/75,000 miles for subsequent replacement fills. Nissan Blue Super LLC is available through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order link via dealer portal www.NNAnet.com or order direct www.NissanChemicals.com. ^ Blue LLC one gallon pre-diluted: P/N 999MP - LP25500P > The one gallon containers are pre-diluted with 50% antifreeze and 50% distilled water. > Do not add additional water when using pre-diluted Blue LLC. Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Page 3289 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove coolant reservoir fasteners. 3. Move coolant reservoir aside. 4. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 5. Remove IPDM E/R harness cover. 6. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 7. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2242 Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. Page 1226 Page EM-9 Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6 Page 50 - To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). - Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 948 Always replace the seal after every disassembly. 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb) 4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 4431 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 3141 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket - 2 (RH) And Rear Power Socket (2nd Row) POWER SOCKET Front Power Socket - 2 (RH) and Rear Power Socket (2nd Row) REMOVAL and INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove inner socket from ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 2. Disconnect power socket electrical connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. In-Vehicle Sensor Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Sensor IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel. 2. Remove the two screws and remove the in-vehicle sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2550 14. Install 2nd coast brake flange, 2nd coast brake discs and 2nd coast brake plates. 15. Place clutch spring compressor on 2nd coast brake flange, and compress return spring with a press. Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) 16. Install snap ring using suitable tool. 17. Set a dial indicator as shown. 18. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2) into the oil passage as shown, measure 2nd brake piston stroke and check 2nd brake piston moves smoothly. Piston stroke :1.10 - 1.50mm (0.0433 - 0.0591in) If 2nd brake piston stroke is out standards, select another flange. Refer to See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Clutch, Gear And Brakes. 19. Set a dial indicator as shown. 20. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2) into the oil passage as shown, measure 2nd coast brake piston stroke and check 2nd coast brake piston moves smoothly. Page 888 1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. 2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Precautions/Contaminated Refrigerant. 3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Precautions/Contaminated Refrigerant. 4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new" compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port opening. 9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil at this time. CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor. Page 782 Page 4223 Pedal Positioning Motor: Locations Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) COMPONENT PARTS AND HARNESS CONNECTOR LOCATION Page 964 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Page 1801 - Do not drop or shock spark plug. If spark plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used. Checking and adjusting spark plug gap is not required between change intervals. Spark plug gap (nominal) : 1.1 mm (0.043 in) INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions. Refer to See: Maintenance. - The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Frequent engine starts - Low ambient temperatures - The cold type spark plug is suitable when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Extended highway driving - Frequent high engine revolution. Page 3166 HARNESS CONNECTOR (LEVER LOCKING TYPE) Lever locking type harness connectors are used on certain control units and control modules such as ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), etc. - Lever locking type harness connectors are also used on super multiple junction (SMJ) connectors. - Always confirm the lever is fully locked in place by moving the lever as far as it will go to ensure full connection. CAUTION: Always confirm the lever is fully released (loosened) before attempting to disconnect or connect these connectors to avoid damage to the connector housing or terminals. Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Page 3131 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Locations Heated Glass Element: Locations REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ATC Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair ATC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Component. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 152 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 5044 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Cluster Lid C. 2. Press tabs and remove hazard switch (1). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2452 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 574 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove bolt, and turbine revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt. Page 1065 9. Turn the crankshaft 240° and align as above. 10. Set No.5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 11. Check only those valves as shown. 12. If all valve clearances are within specification, installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. If the valve clearances are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances. VALVE ADJUSTING CAUTION: Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. NOTE: Perform adjustment by selecting the correct head thickness of the valve lifter (adjusting shims are not used). - The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use specifications for hot engine condition to confirm valve clearances. Front Suspension Control Arm: Service and Repair Front Suspension TRANSVERSE LINK Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove lower ball joint pinch bolt and nut using power tool, then separate transverse link from the wheel hub and steering knuckle assembly. 3. Remove the two transverse link pivot bolts and transverse link bolt using power tool. 4. Remove the transverse link. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Visual Check Check the transverse link for damage, cracks or deformation. Replace it if necessary. - Check the bushing for damage, cracks and deformation. Replace the transverse link if necessary. Lower Ball Joint Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the transverse link assembly if any of the following exists: - Lower ball joint stud is worn. - Lower ball joint is hard to swing. - Lower ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive. Swinging Force Check ball joint swinging force. NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Swinging force "A" (measuring at groove of ball stud) : 7.8 - 54.9 N (0.8 - 5.6 kg-f, 1.8 - 12.3 lb-f) Turning Force Check ball joint turning force. NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Page 5128 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between door mirror LH connector D13 terminal 5 and ground. 5 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER Check continuity between door mirror LH terminals 5 and 6. 6 - 5 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - Repair or replace harness. NG - Replace door mirror LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Door Mirror/Door Mirror Assembly. Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Inspection REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Inspection 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect door mirror RH. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground. Interior - Anti-Rattle Spring Falls Off 2nd Row Seats Seat Latch: Customer Interest Interior - Anti-Rattle Spring Falls Off 2nd Row Seats Classification: BT09-003 Reference: NTB09-034 Date: April 24, 2009 ANTI-RATTLE SPRING HAS FALLEN OFF THE LEFT AND / OR RIGHT 2ND ROW SEAT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM The inner and/or outer anti-rattle spring has fallen off from the left and/or right 2nd row seat. AND The seat continues to latch and otherwise operate normally. ACTION Install a new anti-rattle spring. NOTE: Do not replace the seat assembly for this incident if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE WARNING: Make sure to wear safety glasses when performing this Service Procedure. Page 2180 Page 3387 2. If the camber, caster or kingpin inclination is not within specification, inspect the front suspension parts. Replace any damaged or worn out parts. TOE-IN WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. - Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub center as shown. These marks are measuring points. 4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side of the front tires as shown. 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn). CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. 6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. Total toe-in : Refer to See: Specifications. 7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer tie-rods. a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out. Standard length "L" : Refer to See: Steering/Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And Linkage. c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specified torque. Page 3375 SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. Page 816 Coolant: Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT Changing Engine Coolant WARNING: To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. - Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove. DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Remove engine undercover. 2. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator and remove the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required for a partial cooling system drain (radiator only). 3. For a complete cooling system drain, remove the reservoir tank and drain the coolant, and then clean the reservoir tank before installation. CAUTION: Do not allow coolant to spill on the drive belts. 4. When performing a complete cooling system drain (to remove the engine or for engine repair), remove the cylinder block front drain plug and the cylinder block RH and LH drain plugs. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in place of the cylinder block LH drain plug, do not remove the engine block heater. Page 3849 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations MTC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 779 Rear A/C CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or around the connection. Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil Capacity With oil filter change ............................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 4-1/4 qt (4.0L) Without oil filter change ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 3-7/8 qt (3.7L) Front Suspension Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Suspension Removal and Installation COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Remove cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the wheel sensor wire and front brake hose from the brackets on the front shock absorber (strut). 4. Disconnect the connecting rod upper link using power tool. 5. Support the wheel hub and steering knuckle assembly with a suitable wire. 6. Remove the shock absorber (strut) lower bolts and nuts using power tool. 7. Remove the three upper strut mounting nuts using power tool. CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut on vehicle. 8. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber (strut) assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. - When installing the strut spacer, it must be positioned as shown. - Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension. WARNING: Always replace the shock absorber (strut) lower mounting nuts. - When installing shock absorber (strut) to steering knuckle, be sure to hold bolts when tightening nuts. - Install wheel and tire. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. Disassembly and Assembly COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Page 2508 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 3717 Check the clearance (B) all the way around between the clutch disc (1) and pulley (2) using a suitable tool (A) as shown. Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance (B) : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) If the specified clearance (B) is not obtained, replace the adjusting shim(s) and recheck the clearance (B) as shown. BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque. Page 2083 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 3568 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Locations Impact Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Page 1810 Valve Clearance: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT Valve Clearance CHECKING Perform inspection as follows after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve related parts, or if there is unusual engine conditions regarding valve clearance. NOTE: Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running. 1. Remove the intake manifold collectors. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Collector. 2. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation LH (LH) and See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation RH (RH). 3. Remove the rocker covers. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair. 4. Set No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. Align pointer (A) with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. - Check that the valve lifters on No.1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No.4 are tight. If not, turn the crankshaft one full revolution (360°) and align as shown. - RH cylinder head (1) - White Arrow Indicates Engine front 5. Check only the valves as shown. Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4483 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Power Door Lock System POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 449 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral position. 4. Remove range lever and install Tool. Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404) 5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base line on PNP switch body. 7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments. 10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705. Page 2444 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1865 Data Link Connector: Electrical Diagrams MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR Wiring Diagram EC-MIL/DL-01 Page 3619 2. Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the mode door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Component AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR Component Air Mix Door Motor (Front) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Removal And Installation AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR Page 3061 Page 228 Control Module: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 622 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 2675 2. Cover serrated part of shaft with tape. Install new boot and boot band onto shaft. Be careful not to damage boot. CAUTION: Discard old boot and boot band; replace with new ones. 3. Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft. 4. Attach new circlip to shaft. The circlip must fit securely into shaft groove. Attach nut to joint sub-assembly. Use a suitable tool to press-fit. CAUTION: Discard old circlip; replace with new ones. 5. Insert the amount of new grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) listed below into housing from large end of boot. Grease amount : 170 - 190 g (6.00 - 6.70 oz) 6. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown. CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Remove all grease from surfaces. 7. Make sure boot installation length "L" is the specified length. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool into the large end of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation. Boot installation length "L" : 163 mm (6.42 in) CAUTION: Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value. - Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot. Page 1590 Attachment General Procedure Page 3613 Removal And Installation AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation FRONT AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER) Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel. Page 743 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets (no picture shown). NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in Page 4753 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 3002 Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Specifications Disc Brake SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Disc Brake Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column covers. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Cover. 2. Remove wiper washer switch electrical connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 104 - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. Page 647 Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Suspension REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY Rear Wheel Alignment Before checking rear wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION Check tires for wear and for improper inflation. - Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Wheels/Testing and Inspection. - Check rear wheel bearings for looseness. - Check rear suspension for looseness. - Check that rear shock absorber works properly. - Check wheelarch height (unladen*). Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheelarch Height. GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed. This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle. - The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is centered. - The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle. - The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level. 2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. - Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule. THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed. Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheel Alignment. 1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators. - The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators may not be correct. - This may result in an ERROR. 2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method. - Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways. - See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information. CAMBER Measure camber of both right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust in accordance with the following procedures. Camber : Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheel Alignment. - If camber is not within specification, adjust by turning the adjusting bolts in the same direction. Page 731 2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown. Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214) 3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free from defects and foreign materials. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the front of the vehicle. - Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. Front Side Air Bag Side Air Bag: Description and Operation Front Side Air Bag SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Front Side Air Bag Front side air bag modules are built into the front seatback assemblies. Vehicles with side air bags are equipped with labels as shown. Page 3384 Page 2824 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque specifications when connecting the brake tubes. - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). Page 2986 Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Removal and Installation PARKING BRAKE SHOE Removal and Installation CAUTION: Clean dust on the disc and back plate with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed air. REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove the disc rotor with the parking brake pedal completely in the released position. 3. If disc rotor cannot be removed, remove as follows: a. Secure the disc rotor in place with wheel nuts and remove disc rotor plug. b. Rotate adjuster in direction "B" to retract and loosen brake shoes, using a suitable tool. 4. Remove the anti-rattle pins, retainers, and anti-rattle springs, then return springs. 5. Remove the parking brake shoes, adjuster assembly, and toggle lever. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Lining Thickness Inspection Check thickness of lining. Drum Inner Diameter Inspection Check drum inner diameter. Page 3212 Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R Page 2848 Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3 minutes. Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing. Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it. Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and delete the memory by CONSULT-III. If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral cable (2). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 2634 Valve Body: Service and Repair ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Control Valve Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove side cover. Refer to See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect solenoid valve connectors. 3. Disconnect control valve assembly bolts and remove control valve assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal. - Install bolts in sequence as shown. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Automatic Transmission/Component for specified torque. Page 1278 1. Internal chain guide 2. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 3. Mating mark (copper link) 4. Mating mark (punched) 5. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) 6. Mating mark (yellow link) 7. Timing chain (secondary) 8. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 9. Tension guide 10. Water pump 11. Crankshaft sprocket 12. Mating mark (notched) 13. Timing chain (primary) 14. Slack guide 15. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 16. Mating mark (back side) 17. Crankshaft key NOTE: The figure above shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that on the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed. 1. Make sure that dowel pin hole, dowel pin of camshaft and crankshaft key are located as shown. (No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC) NOTE: - Though camshaft does not stop at the position as shown, for the placement of cam nose, it is generally accepted camshaft is placed for the same direction of the figure. Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side) : At cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side) : At cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Crankshaft key : At cylinder head side of right bank. 2. Install the timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows: CAUTION: Mating marks between timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all mating mark positions repeatedly during the installation process. a. Push plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. Page 1890 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 2707 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Classification: EL09-033A Reference: NTB09-095A Date: May 5, 2010 POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) 2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42) 2007-2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM A power window "Auto Up" will not work. ACTION Reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. 4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the top position. NOTES: > If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further diagnosis and repair information. > The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur: > Battery cable is disconnected. > Power window switch connector is disconnected. > Power window regulator is replaced. > Power window motor is replaced. > Window glass is removed. Page 2873 2. Inspect the right side (inboard side) of the brake pedal pivot pin (see Figure 2). ^ See Figure 3 below for photos of OK and NG, conditions. Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Classification: EL10-028 Reference: NTB10-106 Date: September 10, 2010 NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System SERVICE INFORMATION All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic. VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic: ^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not operate. ^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM, I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information as needed. Page 1900 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Locations Remote Control Module: Locations AUDIO Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2901 CAUTION: Before measuring, make sure the axle end play is 0 mm (0 in). Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection/Rear Wheel Hub. 3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout is outside the specified value after performing the above operation, turn the disc rotor using Tool. Tool number : 38-PFM90.5 Thickness Inspection Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness is not within specification, replace disc rotor. Page 1980 6. The circuit which has the most amount of lines are the possible cause. Error is detected from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line (shaded in the figure below). NOTE: For abbreviations, refer to See: CAN/Abbreviation List. 7. Perform the inspection procedure for the possible cause. Refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis/Malfunction Area Chart. Page 4768 NG>> GO TO 3. 2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-III Check "BRAKE SW2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode. Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG>> GO TO 7. 3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage Page 3373 ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 1904 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Page 827 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................ Genuine Nissan Matic "K" NOTE:Using Automatic Transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. Page 953 3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2. ^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process Tire: ^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area) NOTE: Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may become un-balanced. Wheel: ^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area. ^ Do not apply lube to the flange area 4. Before inflating the tire: ^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks. Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps. - Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. - For the second step of angle tightening. Using Tool. Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Maintenance Information CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (With and Without Navigation System) COLOR SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start. Reference symbols: ENTER button - This is a button on the control panel. By pressing this button you can select the item or perform this action. "Display" key - This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function. HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND ENTER BUTTON Use the joystick to choose an item on the display screen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right to highlight an item. Then press the ENTER button to select the item or perform the action. HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON This button has two functions. - Go back to the previous display (cancel). If you press the BACK button during setup, the setup will be canceled and/or the display will return to the previous screen. - Finish setup. In some screens pressing the BACK button accepts the changes made during setup. HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON Page 1344 Page EM-14 Page 4113 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 3802 Page 3215 Page 4896 Rear Combination Lamp Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair Rear Combination Lamp REAR COMBINATION LAMP Bulb Replacement REMOVAL 1. Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Turn rear combination lamp socket counterclockwise and remove from rear combination lamp. 3. Remove bulb from rear combination lamp socket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3054 DESCRIPTION Page 327 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations MTC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 1086 Drive Belt: Service and Repair DRIVE BELTS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove engine undercover. 2. Fully loosen each belt. Refer to See: Adjustments. Remove generator and air conditioner compressor belt and then power steering oil pump belt. CAUTION: Grease is applied to idler pulley adjusting bolt. Be careful to keep grease away from the belts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Make sure belts are correctly engaged with the pulley groove. - Clean off any oil and coolant on belts and each pulley groove. - Adjust belt tension. Refer to See: Adjustments. Page 4577 6. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), remove the door lock assembly. 7. Remove the TORX bolt (T30), and remove the outside handle bracket. 8. While pulling outside handle, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle and door lock assembly. 9. Disconnect the door lock actuator connector. 10. Separate outside handle cable from the outside handle bracket. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SLIDING DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY Page 4520 5. Install the new insert into the armrest. ^ Use the insert listed in the Parts Information. 6. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to the threads on the bolt. ^ See the Parts Information for Threadlocker details. 7. Reinstall the armrest on the seat. ^ Bolt torque: 28 Nm (2.85 kg-m, 20.6 lb-ft) Page 4084 Antenna: Service and Repair AUDIO ANTENNA Window Antenna Repair ELEMENT CHECK 1. Attach probe circuit tester (ohm setting) to antenna terminal on each side. - When measuring continuity, wrap tin foil around the top of probe. Then, press the foil against the wire with your finger. 2. If an element is broken, no continuity will exist. Heater Core Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Core ATC HEATER CORE Component Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 5049 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Installation LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1959 How To Use CAN Communication Signal Chart TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart The CAN communication signal chart lists the signals needed for trouble diagnosis. It is useful for detecting the root cause by finding a signal related to the symptom, and by checking transmission and reception unit. Information Needed For Trouble Diagnosis TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW Information Needed for Trouble Diagnosis CAN communication system performs trouble diagnosis with the following tools. Page 4749 DESCRIPTION Page 2742 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral position. 4. Remove range lever and install Tool. Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404) 5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base line on PNP switch body. 7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments. 10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb Page 130 Page 1961 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW Trouble Diagnosis Procedure INTERVIEW WITH CUSTOMER Interview with the customer is important to detect the root cause of CAN communication system errors and to understand vehicle condition and symptoms for proper trouble diagnosis. Points in interview What: Parts name, system name - When: Date, Frequency - Where: Road condition, Place - In what condition: Driving condition/environment - Result: Symptom NOTE: Check normal units as well as error symptoms. - Example: Circuit between ECM and the combination meter is judged normal if the customer indicates tachometer functions normally. - When a CAN communication system error is present, multiple control units may malfunction or go into fail-safe mode. Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Classification: BT07-032A Reference: NTB07-070A Date: September 25, 2009 SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009 Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly: ^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged ^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power ^ When the sunroof motor was changed ACTION Perform the following initialization procedure: 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. 3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position. 4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally. NOTE: If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information. Page 636 Page 1946 LAN-CAN-03 Page 3712 3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, and then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers. Tool number : - (J-38873-A) 4. Install the clutch disc (1) on the drive shaft, together with the original shim(s) (2) using a suitable tool (A). Press the clutch disc down using Tool. Tool number : - (J-38873-A) 5. Install the center bolt using suitable tool (A). Center bolt : 12 N.m (1.2 kg-m, 9 ft-lb) - After tightening the center bolt to specification, check that the pulley rotates smoothly. 6. Install the compressor. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal And Installation For Compressor. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Page 516 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three minutes. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 3. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor (1) nuts. 4. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector (2). CAUTION: Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. - Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. - Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. - Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Page 2317 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 3181 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Display Item List Page 3060 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Automatic Air Conditioner Compressor Clutch: Specifications Automatic Air Conditioner Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance (B) ....................................................................................................................................... 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) Page 4174 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 1305 4. Remove the Bank 1 (RH) IVT control valve cover. - Loosen the IVT control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. CAUTION: The shaft in the IVT control valve cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the IVT control valve cover by pulling straight out until the IVT control valve cover disengages from the camshaft sprocket. 5. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner as follows: a. Pull the lever (C) down to release the plunger stopper tab (B). b. Insert the stopper pin A into the tensioner body hole to hold the lever (C) and keep the plunger stopper tab (B) released. c. Compress the plunger (D) into the tensioner body (1) by pressing the slack guide (2). d. Keep the slack guide (2) pressed and lock the plunger (D) in by pushing the stopper pin A through the lever (C) and into the chain tensioner body hole. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. e. Remove timing chain tensioner bolts and then remove the timing chain tensioner. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop timing chain tensioner bolts inside timing chain case. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing primary timing chain tensioner, push in plunger and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the back and the mounting surfaces of primary timing chain tensioner. - After installation, pull out stopper pin. - When installing the IVT control valve covers perform the following steps. 1. Install IVT control valve covers as follows: a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides). Page 2566 Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the fresh air duct. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the mass air flow sensor. 3. Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator. 4. Disconnect the PCV hose. 5. Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper) with the mass air flow sensor attached. 6. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case (upper), as necessary. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. Do not shock it. - Do not disassemble it. - Do not touch the sensor. 7. Remove the air cleaner case (lower). 8. Remove resonator in the fender, lifting left fender protector, as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER NOTE: Diagram Information and Instructions Courtesy Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 4191 OK or NG OK - Inspection End. NG - - Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. - Repair harness or connector. Page 1845 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 2782 Control Module: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 2909 2. Install pad retainers and pad assemblies to the torque member. CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than the torque member, as shown. 3. Push the piston in so that the pad is firmly attached, and install the cylinder body to the torque member. CAUTION: By pushing in the piston, the brake fluid returns to the master cylinder reservoir tank and sub tank. Watch the level of the fluid in the sub tank. NOTE: Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), makes it easier to push in the piston. 4. Install the sliding pin and tighten to specification. Refer to See: Front/Exploded View. 5. Check brake for drag. 6. Install wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Brake Burnishing Procedure. Exploded View REAR DISC BRAKE Component Page 4116 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 534 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 744 Figure 2. NOTE Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION Tighten the bolt no more then necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Precaution For Working With HFC-134a (R-134a) Refrigerant: Service Precautions Precaution For Working With HFC-134a (R-134a) PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) WARNING: CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants are mixed compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer to See: Service Precautions/Contaminated Refrigerant. To determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. Use only specified oil for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If oil other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur. The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) oil rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following handling precautions must be observed: - When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. - When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the entry of moisture into system. - Only use the specified oil from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of oil. Without proper sealing, oil will become moisture saturated and should not be used. - Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment] or J2209 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment]. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and oil manufacturers. - Do not allow refrigerant oil to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result. VIN Registration Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and ID/Model Variation. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display. Page 1342 Page EM-12 ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 709 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 3310 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System. ACTIVE TEST Page 4170 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. System Description Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, oil pressure switch signal reception, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (High, Low) - Parking lamps - Tail and license plate lamps - Cornering lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger relay. 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor (magnet clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows: IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status Page 1822 4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. 9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. - Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Page 750 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered "Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. Page 1285 INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe) REMOVAL 1. Remove the timing chains (secondary). 2. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe by evenly prying at base of shoe with suitable tool as shown. INSTALLATION 1. Install new secondary timing chain tensioner shoe using Tool (A) as shown. - Tighten the bolt until the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe is fully seated on the secondary timing chain tensioner. CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolt. Tool number : (J-50246) 2. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1532 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation REMOVAL Automatic Back Door System Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Automatic Back Door System AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ATC Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations ATC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 2056 Page 1277 Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary. - Inspect all timing chains and associated parts for wear or damage, replace as necessary. Installation Page 4827 Language/unit The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when selecting the "Language/Unit" key and pressing the ENTER button. Language: English or French Unit: US - mile, °F, MPG Metric - km, °C, L/1OO km You can select the language and unit using the joystick or pressing the ENTER button. The settings are automatically saved when you exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button. COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if So equipped) Note: For Navigation system control buttons, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner1s Manual. If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start. Reference symbols: ENTER button - This is a button on the control panel. By pressing this button you can select the item or perform the action. "Display" key - This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function. HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND ENTER BUTTON Use the joystick to choose an item on the display screen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right to highlight an item. Then press the ENTER button to Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline Classification: GI99-001F Reference: NTB99-020F Date: August 8, 2008 LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009 SERVICE INFORMATION This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing"). CAUTION: Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual. 1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT): ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components. 2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission: ^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components. ^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels. ^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product. 4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission: ^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. ^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward. ^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH. ^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission. ^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position. Page 4447 4. For power doors, disconnect the cinch motor electrical connector. 5. Remove the back door latch assembly (power door) or the back door lock assembly (manual door). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Align the back door latch. Refer to See: Doors/Front Door/Adjustments. Page 3776 Expansion Valve: Service and Repair MTC Removal And Installation For Front Expansion Valve REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Front Expansion Valve REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Procedures. 2. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the cooler grommet. 4. Remove the expansion valve. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks Removal And Installation For Rear Expansion Valve REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Rear Expansion Valve REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Procedures. 2. Remove the rear RH interior side trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the A/C refrigerant pipes from the expansion valve. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the A/C refrigerant pipe ends with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air and contaminants. 4. Remove the expansion valve. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks Page 113 Inspection With CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Inspection with CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. Connect CONSULT-III and select "IPDM E/R" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 2. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Check display content in self-diagnosis results. NOTE: The Details for Display for the Period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory. Contents displayed NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.-INSPECTION END. CAN COMM CIRC-Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System. Diagnosis Procedure Refueling Vapor Recovery System: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis Procedure ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) Diagnosis Procedure SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. 1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >>GO TO 2. NG >>GO TO 3. 2.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >>GO TO 3. No >>GO TO 5. 3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER Replace EVAP canister with a new one. >>GO TO 4. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. >>Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to See: Component Inspection. OK or NG OK >>INSPECTION END NG >>Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING. 1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >>GO TO 2. NG >>GO TO 3. 2.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER Page 4797 Audible Warning Device: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Combination Meter Harness Connector Terminal Layout WARNING CHIME Combination Meter Harness Connector Terminal Layout Terminal And Reference Value For Combination Meter WARNING CHIME Terminal and Reference Value for Combination Meter Terminal And Reference Value For BCM Terminal and Reference Value for BCM Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters/Terminal And Reference Value For BCM. Page 3611 3. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. PASSENGER SIDE Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Mode Door Motor MODE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation Mode Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. Page 1599 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. A circuit breaker is used for the following systems: Power windows - Power sunroof Page 3617 Removal And Installation INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation DRIVER SIDE Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel. 3. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor. Navigation System Navigation Module: Locations Navigation System NAVIGATION SYSTEM Component Parts Location Page 3209 NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory. DATA MONITOR All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 1252 Page EM-10 A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information Compressor Clutch: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information Classification: HA10-006 Reference: NTB10-043 Date: March 17, 2010 A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH REPLACEMENT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2008 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50) SERVICE INFORMATION The A/C compressor clutch is available separately as a service part for the Applied Vehicles. If the compressor clutch needs to be replaced for any reason AND the compressor is operating normally: ^ Replace the compressor clutch only. Do not replace the compressor assembly. ^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for compressor clutch removal and installation instructions. Page 1029 9. Measure difference in levels between front end faces of No.1 camshaft bracket and cylinder head. Standard : - 0.14 ( - 0.0055 in) - If measurement is outside the specified range, re-install camshaft and camshaft bracket. 10. Install the IVT control solenoid valves with new gaskets. 11. If necessary, install camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (RH and LH bank.) 12. Install the timing chains. Refer to See: Timing Components/Timing Chain/Service and Repair. Page 157 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 4895 Front Wiper And Washer System Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Front Wiper And Washer System FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Wiper Motor and Linkage COMPONENTS REMOVAL 1. Operate the front wiper motor, and stop it at the OFF (auto stop) position. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect front wiper motor electrical connector. 4. Remove wiper frame assembly bolts, and remove wiper frame assembly. 5. Remove front wiper motor from wiper frame assembly. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts. - Check the grease conditions of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary. 1. Connect front wiper motor to electrical connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate front wiper motor, then turn the wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Disconnect front wiper motor electrical connector. 3. Install front wiper motor to wiper frame assembly, and install assembly into the vehicle. 4. Connect front wiper motor electrical connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the front wiper motor, then turn wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 5. Install cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 6. Install wiper arms. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System. Component Tests and General Diagnostics Cellular Phone: Component Tests and General Diagnostics TELEPHONE Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Bluetooth Control Unit 1.CHECK FUSES Make sure the following fuses for the Bluetooth control unit are not blown. OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Description and Operation. 2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect Bluetooth control unit connector B506. 2. Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Check harness for open between Bluetooth control unit and fuse. 3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUITS 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. Page 2771 Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR GLASS Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the inside seal. 8. Remove the door glass bolts. 9. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear end to pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR Removal Page 611 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Oil Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Classification: EM07-001D Reference: NTB07-042D Date: May 25, 2010 MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY 2004-2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1728 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1079 DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART Page 1154 11. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Start the engine and check for leaks. Refer to . - Inspect the engine oil level. Refer to . CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil. Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Locations Collision Avoidance System Switch: Locations REAR SONAR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3077 Battery: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Battery Page 2078 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 3308 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Display Item List Page 1174 INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - If removed, install the stud bolts. Stud bolts : 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb) - Install intake manifold nuts and bolts in the order in two steps as shown. Page 1720 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2825 - Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 1922 Engine Control Module: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3975 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification system sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Seat Cushion/Disassembly and Assembly to remove the seat, and See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Seat Cushion to replace the seat cushion assembly. Component Tests and General Diagnostics Cruise Control: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Component Description ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD)/System Description for the ASCD function. Diagnosis Procedure ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Diagnosis Procedure 1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select "BRAKE SW1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Check "BRAKE SW1" indication under the following conditions. Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. OK or NG OK>> GO TO 2. Page 1492 Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Pump ATC HEATER PUMP Removal and Installation Heater Pump REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Unclip the heater pump from the cowl top extension. 4. Disconnect the heater pump electrical connector and the two heater hoses, then remove the heater pump. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the heater pump, replace the heater pump as an assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. MTC HEATER PUMP Removal and Installation Heater Pump Page 5071 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is Noisy Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is Noisy Classification: EL09-022 Reference: NTB09-087 Date: September 10, 2009 2004 - 2009 QUEST; POWER BACK DOOR WILL NOT OPEN/CLOSE AND MAKES NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) with power back door. IF YOU CONFIRM: While operating the power back door (lift gate), ^ The power motor will not open or close the door, and/or ^ There is a grinding and popping noise inside the rear trim panel. ACTION: Check for a loose or missing bolt on the back door power lift assembly. Replace if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Access the power back door motor assembly. ^ Remove left side finishers as needed. ^ Refer to sections BL and EI in the Service Manual as needed. Page 623 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 1616 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 3013 - Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Diagram Information and Instructions Antenna: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 1964 CREATE INTERVIEW SHEET Fill out the symptom described by the customer, vehicle condition, and CAN system type on the interview sheet. Interview Sheet (Example) Variable Blower Control Blower Motor: Service and Repair Variable Blower Control Component VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Component Variable Blower Control (Front) Variable Blower Control (Rear) Page 5105 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3167 HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) - SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. - Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. - Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: - Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6 Page 357 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Removal and Installation OPTICAL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove defrost grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel . 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from defroster grille. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location ATC Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair ATC AMBIENT SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor connector. NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening, in front of the condenser. 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1287 9. Disconnect engine coolant reservoir hose from the radiator and remove engine coolant reservoir. 10. Remove cooling fan assembly. 11. Disconnect lower radiator hose from engine. 12. Disconnect the power steering fluid reservoir tank hose from the power steering pump and fluid cooler and remove the power steering fluid reservoir tank. 13. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. 14. Remove the fender protector side cover RH. 15. Remove the drive belt. 16. Remove the power steering pump. 17. Remove the lower oil pan. Loosen the lower oil pan bolts using power tool in order as shown. a. Cut the sealant using Tool and remove the lower oil pan. Tool number : (J-37228) CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the mating surface. - Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. b. Slide the Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the lower oil pan. 18. Remove upper oil pan bolts in reverse order as shown. 19. Remove the generator. 20. Remove the A/C compressor bolts and position the A/C compressor aside. 21. Remove the generator bracket. 22. Support the engine with suitable jack and remove the RH engine, mount and bracket. 23. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Remove access plate and install Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Page 4756 Page 4300 Page 51 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque specifications when connecting the brake tubes. - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Page 4430 Page 4122 Page 590 Locations Power Sliding Door Release Actuator: Locations POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4331 Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly FRONT DOOR LOCK Disassembly and Assembly DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY Remove the key cylinder escutcheon pawl and remove the door key cylinder. Page 4854 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 2943 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Changing Brake Fluid BRAKE FLUID Changing Brake Fluid CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. - Always keep fluid level higher than "MIN" line on sub tank. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 1. Connect a vinyl tube and container to the air bleeder. 2. Depressing the brake pedal, drain the brake fluid gradually from the air bleeder of each wheel. 3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the ABS actuator and control unit connector or negative battery terminal. 4. Clean the inside of the sub tank, and refill the sub tank with new brake fluid. 5. Bleed the brake system refilling the system with new fluid. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Removal and Installation Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel tank. Refer to See: Fuel Tank/Service and Repair. Page 1111 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered "Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. Page 3885 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Intake Sensor ATC INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation Intake Sensor REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. Removal and Installation Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR LOCK Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door window regulator assembly. Refer to See: Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front door window rear glass run. 3. Remove the grommet, and remove door key cylinder assembly (driver side) or outside handle escutcheon (passenger side) bolts (TORX T30) from grommet hole. 4. While pulling the outside handle (1), remove door key cylinder assembly or escutcheon (2). 5. Separate the key cylinder rod from the door key cylinder assembly (if equipped). 6. While pulling outside handle (2), slide toward rear of vehicle to remove (1). 7. Remove the front and rear gaskets. Testing and Inspection Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Testing and Inspection SHOCK ABSORBER Inspection - Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. - Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions. - Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Classification: EL09-014 Reference: NTB09-036 Date: April 27, 2009 IPDM SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM SERVICE INFORMATION The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly. The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses. ^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays. ^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed. ^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable". CAUTION: NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM. Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle. Such incidents may include: ^ Headlights inoperative. ^ Radiator fan inoperative ^ Fog lamps inoperative ^ Wiper inoperative Page 2580 Control Module: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 1997 NOTE: CAN data of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is not used by usual service work, thus it is omitted. TYPE 3 NOTE: Refer to See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/CAN/Abbreviation List for the abbreviations of the connecting units. Page 5072 DESCRIPTION Page 1009 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CYLINDER HEAD On-Vehicle Service CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. Release fuel pressure and leave the fuel pump electrically disconnected. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Fuel Pressure/Testing and Inspection. 4. Remove all six spark plugs. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair. 5. Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. 6. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep the electric throttle control actuator butterfly-valve wide open to maximize air intake flow. 7. Crank the engine and record the highest gauge indication. 8. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder (steps 5 - 7). NOTE: Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. 9. If compression in one or more cylinders is low: a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through the spark plug holes. b. Retest compression (steps 5 - 8). - If adding oil helps raise compression pressure, then the piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston. - If the pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or is seating improperly. Inspect and repair the valve and/or valve seat. Refer to See: Maintenance. If the valve and/or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace as necessary. - If compression stays low in two or more cylinders that are next to each other: - The cylinder head gasket may be leaking. - Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary. 10. After inspection is complete, install removed components. 11. Start engine and confirm that engine runs smoothly. 12. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis Introduction. Page 2830 Page 1289 29. Remove the front timing chain case. a. Loosen the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. b. Insert the appropriate size tool into the notch (1) at the top of the front timing chain case as shown. c. Pry off the case by moving the suitable tool (2) as shown. - Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. CAUTION: - Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool. - After removal, handle carefully so it does not bend, or warp under a load. 30. Remove O-rings from rear timing chain case. CAUTION: Use new O-rings for installation. 31. Remove the front oil seal from the front timing chain case using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the front cover. Page 3288 Page 3625 Ducts - Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 3870 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations MTC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 625 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 2097 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 633 SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. Page 1863 Component Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2250 - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling. - Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Page 313 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Removal And Installation VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Removal and Installation VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel RH and glove box. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel. 3. Disconnect the variable blower control (front) electrical connector. 4. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (front). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the variable blower control (rear) electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (rear). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4553 Console: Service and Repair Installation CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1025 - Measure the outer diameter of the valve lifter. Refer to See: Maintenance. - If out of the specified range, replace the valve lifter. Valve Lifter Bore Diameter - Using inside micrometer, measure diameter of valve lifter bore of cylinder head. Refer to See: Maintenance. - If out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head assembly. Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance (Valve lifter clearance) = (hole diameter for valve lifter) - (outer diameter of valve lifter). Refer to See: Maintenance. - If out of specified range, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head assembly. INSTALLATION 1. Before installation, remove any old Silicone RTV Sealant from component mating surfaces using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces. NOTE: Remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the bolt holes and threads. Page 3674 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 3421 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Leakage POWER STEERING FLUID Checking Fluid Leakage Check the lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. 1. Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm. Make sure temperature of fluid in oil tank rises to 60° - 80°C (140° - 176°F). 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each lock position for five seconds and carefully check for fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds. 4. If fluid leakage at connectors is noticed, loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. 5. If fluid leakage from power steering oil pump is noticed, check the power steering oil pump. Refer to See: Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Procedures. 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of power steering fluid, indicating a steering gear leak. Page 5101 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 1257 Page EM-15 Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose Sliding Door Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose Classification: BT09-006 Reference: NTB09-014 Date: March 4, 2009 SLIDING DOOR WELT HAS LOOSENED FROM THE DOOR PANEL APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 - 2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM The door welt (rubber trim) is coming loose from the sliding door panel (clips have detached). ACTION Check to see if the clips are missing from the door welt: ^ If the clips are missing, replace the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape. ^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1954 MONITOR ITEM (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS) NOTE: For some models, CAN communication diagnosis result is received from the vehicle monitor. (CONSULT-III is not available.) - Refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis/CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor for the details. Condition Of Error Detection TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Condition of Error Detection "U1000" or "U1001" is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-III if CAN communication signal is not transmitted or received between units for 2 seconds or more. CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ERROR CAN communication line open (CAN-H, CAN-L, or both) - CAN communication line short (ground, between CAN communication lines, other harnesses) - Error of CAN communication control circuit of the unit connected to CAN communication line WHEN "U1000" OR "U1001" IS INDICATED EVEN THOUGH CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IS NORMAL Removal/installation of parts: Error may be detected when removing and installing CAN communication unit and related parts while turning the ignition switch ON. (A DTC except for CAN communication may be detected.) - Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may cease. - Voltage drop: Error may be detected if voltage drops due to discharged battery when turning the ignition switch ON (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication). - Error may be detected if the power supply circuit of the control unit, which carries out CAN communication, malfunctions (Depending on the Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3 minutes. Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing. Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it. Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and delete the memory by CONSULT-III. If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to Lifting Points Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lifting Points Garage Jack And Safety Stand LIFTING POINT Garage Jack and Safety Stand WARNING: Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Make sure to avoid damaging pipes, tubes, etc. under the vehicle. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when you have to get under the vehicle. Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. - Lift at reinforced area of front suspension member where lower control arm attaches, staying in center line of wheels. 2-Pole Lift LIFTING POINT 2-Pole Lift WARNING: When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and sill spoiler. Page 4754 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 4853 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1618 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 2499 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 4123 Page 190 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4374 Resetting After installing each component to the vehicle, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the door glass automatically to raise the door glass to the top position. Page 1118 4. Install Tools. 5. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 6. Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load. Refer to See: Engine Oil Pressure/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications. CAUTION: If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and blockages. 7. After the inspections, install the oil pressure switch as follows: a. Remove the old sealant adhering to oil pressure switch and engine. b. Apply thread sealant and tighten the oil pressure switch to specification. - Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants. Oil pressure switch : 14.8 N.m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb) Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection 1.FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION Check that the following fusible links or IPDM E/R fuses are not blown. OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Replace fuse or fusible link. 2.POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector E120 terminals 1, 2 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness. 3.GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121 and E124. 2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121(A) terminal 60, E124(B) terminal 38 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - Inspection End. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R ground circuit harness. Page 2411 Page 2284 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4792 DI-CHIME-02 Page 824 Disclaimer Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 185 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Page 2143 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 5122 Heated Glass Element: Component Tests and General Diagnostics BCM Power Supply And Ground Circuit Inspection REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Filament Check REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Filament Check 1. When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the negative probe. Then press the foil against the wire with your finger. 2. Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of each filament. Page 2404 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 3236 Page 3761 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair MTC Removal And Installation For Front Evaporator REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Front Evaporator Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the blower motor side cover. 3. Remove the front blower motor. 4. Remove the heater core and evaporator case bottom cover. 5. Remove the blower motor case. Testing and Inspection Stabilizer Bar: Testing and Inspection STABILIZER BAR Inspection - Check stabilizer bar for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary. - Check rubber bushings for deterioration, or cracks and replace if necessary. Page 1072 - Apply sealant to the areas on the front corners. Refer to See: Compression Check/Testing and Inspection. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants. - Tighten the rocker cover bolts in two steps in the order as shown. Page 4930 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Page 3639 Panel/Service and Repair or See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the grille from the interior trim panel. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4593 Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Keyfob Battery Replacement Page 2885 Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair BRAKE PEDAL Removal and Installation Non-adjustable Pedal Adjustable Pedal Page 5024 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 496 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 12 Navigation Module: Locations Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 4572 Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove rear kicking plate. 3. Remove rear kick escutcheon. 4. Remove 3rd row seat spring escutcheon. 5. Remove cargo net hooks using Tool. Tool number : J-47126 6. Release clips and remove rear lower finisher assembly. For LH, disconnect harness connectors. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR PILLAR UPPER FINISHER Removal 1. Remove rear kicking plate. 2. Remove rear kick escutcheon. 3. Remove cargo net hooks using Tool. Tool number : J-47126 4. Remove seat belt D rings from rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Third Row Seat Belt. 5. Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to "REAR LOWER FINISHER ASSEMBLY". 6. Remove screw covers and screws, then remove rear pillar upper finisher. For LH, disconnect harness connectors. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER Removal 1. Remove pull handle covers. 2. Remove screws and remove back door pull handle. 3. Release clips and remove back door lower finisher. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. BACK DOOR UPPER FINISHER Removal 1. Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to "BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER". 2. Disconnect top of door open/close link. Refer to See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Adjustments. 3. Release clips and remove back door upper finisher. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Service and Repair Front Door Panel: Service and Repair DOOR FINISHER Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR Removal 1. Release clip and remove front corner cover. 2. Remove screw cover then screw from cup of power window and door lock/unlock switch assembly. 3. Remove power window and door lock/unlock switch assembly. Release clip and disconnect harness connectors. 4. Remove memory seat/fuel door release switch assembly. Release clip and disconnect harness connectors. 5. Remove step light. Release tab and disconnect harness connectors. 6. Remove door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from door handle assembly. Release clips and remove door lock cable and door handle cable. Refer to See: Locations See: Front Door Latch/Service and Repair. 7. Remove screws and front door release handle from front door finisher. Installation Page 1905 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Specifications Thermostat: Specifications THERMOSTAT Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations SUNROOF Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1078 Locations Hazard Warning Switch: Locations TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 539 Page 1614 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 1103 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered "Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. Heater Core Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Core ATC HEATER CORE Component Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 182 Engine Control Module: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Locations Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL TOP Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove RH/LH wiper arms. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System. 2. Remove cowl top cover. a. Release fastener covers and clips. b. Remove cowl top seal by releasing ends from tabs on cowl top cover, then releasing plastic clips. c. Remove cowl top weatherstrip. d. Remove windshield washer nozzles and hoses from cowl top cover. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Hose/Diagrams 3. Remove cowl top extension. a. Remove heater pump from cowl top extension. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Heater Core/Service and Repair/Heater Pump. b. Disconnect clip attaching coolant control valve hose to cowl top extension. Page 3526 Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, under the rear lower link to relieve the coil spring tension, then remove the shock absorber lower end bolt using power tool. NOTE: The rear brake rotor has been removed for clarity only. 3. Remove the transmission jack supporting the rear lower link. 4. Remove the shock absorber upper end nuts using power tool. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Timing Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Classification: EM07-001D Reference: NTB07-042D Date: May 25, 2010 MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY 2004-2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 2293 8110 - 10-Pc. Line Disconnect Set Page 2128 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1267 29. Remove the front timing chain case. a. Loosen the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. b. Insert the appropriate size tool into the notch (1) at the top of the front timing chain case as shown. c. Pry off the case by moving the suitable tool (2) as shown. - Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. CAUTION: - Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool. - After removal, handle carefully so it does not bend, or warp under a load. 30. Remove O-rings from rear timing chain case. CAUTION: Use new O-rings for installation. 31. Remove the front oil seal from the front timing chain case using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the front cover. Page 1021 2. If necessary, remove camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (right and left bank) from cylinder head back side. CAUTION: Handle carefully to avoid dropping and shocks. - Do not disassemble. - Do not allow any metal particles to adhere to magnetic part at sensor tip. - Do not place sensors in a location where they are exposed to magnetism. 3. Remove the IVT control solenoid valves. Discard the IVT control solenoid valve gaskets and use new gaskets for installation. 4. Remove the intake and exhaust camshaft brackets and the camshafts. Mark the camshafts, camshaft brackets, and bolts so they are placed in the same position and direction for installation. - Equally loosen the camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in the order as shown. 5. Remove valve lifters. NOTE: Identify installation positions to ensure proper installation. Page 365 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 364 DESCRIPTION Page 4762 EC-ASCIND-01 Page 3815 b. Hand tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown. - Arrow Indicates Front c. Hand tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. d. Install the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) to the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. e. Attach the high/low pressure pipe to the A/C support clip (secured to the dash panel threaded stud). f. Tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown to specification. 3. Complete the installation of the lower high/low pressure pipe. CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections. - Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones. - Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil. a. Under the vehicle, tighten the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A) as shown to specification. b. Install the A/C pipe clamp (2) and tighten the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B). c. As necessary, reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3). d. Attach the other pipe support clip to the dash panel threaded stud. Page 2241 - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling. - Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Page 1998 Page 110 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Display Item List Page 196 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1335 Page EM-5 Page 4579 1. Remove sliding door rail cover. Refer to See: Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect slide door cables. 3. Remove luggage lower trim. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect sliding door motor electrical connector. 5. Remove sliding door link rollers. 6. Remove sliding door cable and motor assembly. 7. Remove sliding door motor from sliding door cable assembly. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Valve Body: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 1753 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 2111 Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling. - Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. Page 4289 ^ When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a power-type module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. A power-type module/converter uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle taillight, stoplight, and turn signal circuits only as a signal source. (See the illustration above.) The module/converter must draw no more than 5 milliamps from the vehicle turn signal circuits and no more than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail light circuits. CAUTION: Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements listed above may negatively affect the performance and function of the vehicle's electrical system. See a professional trailer dealer or trailer rental agency for installation of the proper equipment. Customers who inquire about towing should be reminded of the following: ^ Always check for correct operation of the turn signals, stoplights, and taillights every time a trailer is hitched up for towing. ^ The towing capacity for 350Z (Coupe Only), Altima, Maxima, and Sentra is 1,000 lbs. For more information, refer customers to the Owner's Manual as well as the Nissan Towing Guide, available online at NissanUSA.com. Page 1812 9. Turn the crankshaft 240° and align as above. 10. Set No.5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 11. Check only those valves as shown. 12. If all valve clearances are within specification, installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. If the valve clearances are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances. VALVE ADJUSTING CAUTION: Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. NOTE: Perform adjustment by selecting the correct head thickness of the valve lifter (adjusting shims are not used). - The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use specifications for hot engine condition to confirm valve clearances. Page 2496 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 3134 Page 632 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Page 2075 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 3997 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 925 Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's operation and the outside temperature. In case of low tire pressure, a message is displayed on the screen: LOW PRESSURE - Check All Tires WARNING When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed, the SETTINGS screen will appear on the display. You can select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle. Move the joystick and press the ENTER button to select each item to be set. System settings Select the "System Settings" key by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER button. The SYSTEM SETTINGS screen will be displayed. Language/unit The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when selecting the "Language/Unit" key and pressing the ENTER button. Language: English or French Unit: US - mile, °F, MPG Metric - km, °C, L/1OO km Specifications Camshaft Bearing: Specifications Camshaft Bearing Cap Tighten the camshaft brackets in the four steps, as shown. Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt Retractor: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 1290 32. Remove all old Silicone RTV Sealant from all the bolt holes and bolts. CAUTION: Do not damage the threads or mating surfaces. 33. Use a scraper to remove all of the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the front timing chain case and opposite mating surfaces. CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces. INSTALLATION 1. Install dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up to a point close to taper in order to shorten protrusion length. 2. Install the new front oil seal on the front timing chain case. Apply new engine oil to the oil seal edges. NOTE: Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. a. Install the new front oil seal so that it becomes flush with the face with front timing chain case using suitable drift. Page 3673 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 1858 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 1870 Electronic Throttle Actuator: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Procedures Vacuum Brake Booster: Procedures BRAKE BOOSTER On-Vehicle Service OPERATING CHECK With the engine stopped, change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure by depressing the brake pedal several times. Then with brake pedal fully depressed, start the engine and when the vacuum pressure reaches the standard, check that the clearance between the brake pedal and floor panel decreases. CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds. AIRTIGHT CHECK - Run the engine at idle for approximately 1 minute, and stop it after applying vacuum to the booster. Depress the brake pedal normally to change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure. Check that distance between the brake pedal and floor panel gradually increases. - Depress the brake pedal while the engine is running, then stop the engine with the pedal depressed. The pedal stroke should not change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds. CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds. Page 3606 Page 3078 Battery: Testing and Inspection BATTERY Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester Refer to diagnostic station instruction manual. Page 880 Refrigerant: Service Precautions General Refrigerant Precaution PRECAUTIONS General Refrigerant Precaution WARNING: Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged. Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F). Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a warm pail of water. Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a) have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers. Page 1453 11. Remove the timing chain tensioner assembly. a. Pull the lever down and release the plunger stopper tab. b. Insert the stopper pin into the tensioner body hole to hold the lever and keep the stopper tab released. NOTE: An allen wrench [2.5 mm (0.098 in)] is used for a stopper pin as an example. c. Insert the plunger into the tensioner body by pressing the timing chain slack guide. d. Keep the slack guide pressed and hold the plunger stopper tab in by pushing the stopper pin deeper through the lever and into the timing chain tensioner body hole. e. Make a gap between water pump gear and timing chain by turning the crankshaft pulley approximately 20° clockwise. 12. Remove timing chain tensioner. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop timing chain tensioner bolts inside front timing chain case. 13. Remove the three water pump bolts. Make a maximum gap between water pump gear and timing chain by turning crankshaft pulley counterclockwise until timing chain loosens on water pump sprocket. 14. Screw M8 bolts [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.49 in) length: approx. 50 mm Page 5198 condition. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify wiper scratches as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Inspect the wiper paths (may be a single scratch of a group of scratches) ^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during driving, or wind pressure. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify metal object scratches as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Scratches can occur from metal objects such as keys and metal buttons. ^ These scratches are typically sharp and can be found anywhere on the glass surface. ^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point. ^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during driving, or wind pressure. A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify scratches caused by a contaminated towel as a start point of cracks in the glass. ^ Scratches can occur from wiping the glass with a towel that has sand particles or dirt on it. Lifting Points Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lifting Points Garage Jack And Safety Stand LIFTING POINT Garage Jack and Safety Stand WARNING: Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Make sure to avoid damaging pipes, tubes, etc. under the vehicle. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when you have to get under the vehicle. Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. - Lift at reinforced area of front suspension member where lower control arm attaches, staying in center line of wheels. 2-Pole Lift LIFTING POINT 2-Pole Lift WARNING: When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and sill spoiler. Page 2970 2. Remove pin on the reservoir tank, using a suitable tool [commercial service tool: diameter approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)]. 3. Remove master cylinder assembly from the vise. 4. Remove reservoir tank and grommets from cylinder body. 5. Remove brake fluid level switch from reservoir tank, if necessary. 6. Push in the primary piston and remove the piston stopper from the cylinder body. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the inner wall of the cylinder. 7. Carefully pull the primary piston assembly straight out to prevent cylinder inner wall from being damaged using a suitable tool. 8. Holding the rod of the primary piston, remove the primary piston assembly, the plate and the guide. CAUTION: Pull components straight out to prevent cylinder inner wall from being damaged. 9. Remove the plate and guide from the primary piston. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rod on the inner wall of the plate. Inspection After Disassembly Master cylinder Check that there is no damage, friction, rusting, or pinholes on the cylinder inner wall, and replace if there are any non-standard conditions. Piston Check cup for damage. Replace the piston if damage is found. Assembly CAUTION: Never use mineral oils such as kerosene, gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process. - Make sure there is no foreign matter such as dirt or dust attached to the inner cylinder walls, the piston, or the cap seal, and use care to Page 4073 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3630 Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove the clip and remove the floor junction duct extension. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Floor Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation FLOOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the floor duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear Overhead Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation REAR OVERHEAD DUCT Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the headliner. Refer to . NOTE: The rear headliner duct connected to the rear overhead duct is part of the headlining trim panel and is replaced as an assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the bolt and two clips, and remove the rear overhead duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear Floor Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation REAR FLOOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Reposition the floor carpet out of the way. 3. Remove the screw and clip, then remove the rear floor duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Grilles DUCTS AND GRILLES Page 2082 Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 2633 Valve Body: Adjustments ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Control Cable Adjustment Move selector lever from the P position to the D position. You should be able to feel the detent in each position. If the detent cannot be felt or the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned, the control cable needs adjustment. 1. Place selector lever in the P position. CAUTION: Turn wheels more than 1/4 turn and apply the parking brake. 2. Loosen control cable lock nut. 3. Using the specified force, push control cable in the direction of the arrow shown. Specified force : 9.8 N (1.0 kg, 2.2 lb) 4. Tighten control cable lock nut. 5. Move selector lever from P to D position. Make sure that selector lever moves smoothly. Make sure that the starter operates when the selector lever is placed in the N or P position. - Make sure that the transmission is locked properly when the selector lever is placed in the P position. Page 2116 Page 4427 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 631 ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 4183 AV-DVD-04 MODELS WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY (DUAL MONITOR) Page 3099 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3095 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 4891 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 178 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap SPARK PLUG VDC/TCS/ABS Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations VDC/TCS/ABS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 959 Tires: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Tire Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement System Description Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, oil pressure switch signal reception, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (High, Low) - Parking lamps - Tail and license plate lamps - Cornering lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger relay. 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor (magnet clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows: IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status Page 1985 Combination Meter IPDM E/R Page 3580 Wheels: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Road Wheel Page 3332 Page 2381 Page 684 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUG Page 4099 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 1611 Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 3083 Required Procedures After Battery Disconnection BATTERY Required Procedures After Battery Disconnection Removal and Installation Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel tank. Refer to See: Service and Repair. Page 1809 Page 3382 Page 4825 When the TRIP button is pressed, the followin9 modes will display on the screen. Warning message (if any) -- TRIP 1 -- TRIP 2 -- FUEL ECONOMY -- MAINTENANCE -- Audio or OFF -- TRIP 1 Maintenance items Press the TRIP button to display maintenance information or set maintenance intervals for the following: - Engine Oil - Tire Rotation - Tire Pressure (if so equipped) For setting the Tire Pressure display, refer to "Tire pressure information" later in this article. Changing the maintenance interval Select the "Engine Oil" or "Tire Rotation" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button to display the screen to change the maintenance interval. Select the "Maintenance Schedule" key using the joystick and move the joystick to right or left to set the maintenance interval. Resetting the maintenance interval Page 1005 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3581 Wheels: Testing and Inspection ROAD WHEEL Inspection 1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. 2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. a. Remove tire from aluminum wheel and mount on a tire balance machine. b. Set dial indicator as shown. Wheel runout (Dial indicator value) : Refer to See: Specifications. 3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. Refer to See: Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle. 4. Check front suspension for looseness. Refer to See: Suspension/Service and Repair/Procedures/Front Suspension Assembly. Page 1561 Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Classification: EL10-028 Reference: NTB10-106 Date: September 10, 2010 NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System SERVICE INFORMATION All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic. VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic: ^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not operate. ^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM, I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information as needed. Page 1466 Coolant: Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT Changing Engine Coolant WARNING: To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. - Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove. DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Remove engine undercover. 2. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator and remove the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required for a partial cooling system drain (radiator only). 3. For a complete cooling system drain, remove the reservoir tank and drain the coolant, and then clean the reservoir tank before installation. CAUTION: Do not allow coolant to spill on the drive belts. 4. When performing a complete cooling system drain (to remove the engine or for engine repair), remove the cylinder block front drain plug and the cylinder block RH and LH drain plugs. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in place of the cylinder block LH drain plug, do not remove the engine block heater. Page 2505 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 5133 Heated Glass Element: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONSULT-III Function (BCM) CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. DATA MONITOR Display Item List ACTIVE TEST Display Item List Page 5228 3. Remove cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect washer tube from nozzle and remove washer nozzle from cowl top. 5. Cut off upper portion of spring legs (2) from washer nozzle (1) as shown. 6. Install the selected size washer nozzle shim (2) onto washer nozzle (1) as shown. 7. Install washer spray nozzle (1) into cowl top cover (2), then install spring clip (A) between spring legs (3) as shown. Page 3567 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 4071 DESCRIPTION Page 1144 4. After warming up the engine, check for engine oil leaks. 5. Install the RH splash shield. 6. Check engine oil level and add engine oil as necessary. Refer to See: Engine Oil/Service and Repair. Page 1763 Page 1028 - Before installation, wipe off any protruding sealant. - Refer to See: Service Precautions/Precaution For Liquid Gasket. - Install remaining camshaft brackets in their original positions and direction. Align the stamp marks as shown. - If checking and adjusting any part of valve assembly or camshaft, check valve clearance according to the reference data. Refer to . 8. Tighten the camshaft brackets in the four steps, as shown. Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. A circuit breaker is used for the following systems: Power windows - Power sunroof Front Suspension Alignment: Service and Repair Front Suspension FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY Front Wheel Alignment DESCRIPTION NOTE: Before checking the front wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection (Unladen*). *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION Check the tires for wear and improper inflation. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Specifications. - Check the wheel runout. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Wheels/Testing and Inspection. - Check the front wheel bearings for looseness. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle. - Check the front suspension for looseness. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Procedures/Front Suspension Assembly. - Check the steering linkage for looseness. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Procedures/On-Vehicle Service. - Check that the front shock absorbers work properly. - Check the vehicle height (posture) in the unladen condition. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Procedures/Front Suspension Assembly. GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed. This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle. - The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is centered. - The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle. - The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level. 2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. - Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule. THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in this. Refer to See: Specifications. 1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators. - The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators may not be correct. - This may result in an ERROR. 2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method. - Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways. - See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information. CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION NOTE: Camber, caster and kingpin inclination are preset at factory and cannot be adjusted. 1. Measure the camber, caster and kingpin inclination of both the right and left wheels using attachment Tool and a suitable alignment gauge. Page 1595 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Page 1183 4. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns smoothly. 5. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb Page 3910 - When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench. - After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture. - When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for connection. - Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components. - Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant. - Always replace used O-rings. - When connecting tube, apply oil to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not to apply oil to threaded portion. - O-ring must be closely attached to dented portion of tube. - When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube. - Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that the O-ring is installed to tube correctly. - After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections. When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten connections of seal seat to the specified torque. Service and Repair Shifter A/T: Service and Repair SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation CONTROL DEVICE SELECTOR KNOB Removal 1. Slide the selector knob cover (1) downwards with fingers to reveal the selector knob clip (2). - Arrow Indicates: Front of Vehicle. 2. Gently pry the selector knob clip (2) outward to remove it using suitable tool. 3. Lift the selector knob up to remove. Installation 1. Set the selector knob in place on the selector lever and push the selector knob downward. 2. Install the selector knob clip into the groove on the selector knob. 3. Slide the selector knob cover upwards to conceal the selector knob clip. TCS/ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor inoperative. - Pull out the sensor, be careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness. - Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the wheel sensor bolt to the specified torque. - Before installing the wheel sensor, make sure there are no foreign materials (such as iron fragments) adhered to the pick-up part of the wheel sensor, to the inside of the wheel sensor mounting hole or on the rotor mounting surface. FRONT WHEEL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove the front wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Partially remove the front wheel fender protector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor. 4. Remove the harness wire from mounts and disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR WHEEL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor from the rear wheel hub and bearing assemblies. 2. Remove the harness wire from mounts and harness wire clips from the rear suspension member. 3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub. Automatic Back Door System Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Automatic Back Door System AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 851 Figure 2. NOTE Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION Tighten the bolt no more then necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 2482 Page 160 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Diagram Information and Instructions Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 2981 Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Removal And Installation PARKING BRAKE CONTROL Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove instrument lower panel LH and knee protector using power tool. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 2. Disconnect parking brake switch electrical connector. 3. Remove adjusting nut from threaded end of front cable and discard the adjusting nut. CAUTION: Do not reuse the adjusting nut. 4. Remove parking brake pedal assembly nuts. 5. Disconnect front cable from parking brake pedal assembly while compressing legs of spring clip. 6. Remove parking brake pedal assembly. 7. Remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 8. Remove front cable bolts, then remove front cable. 9. Remove rear disc rotors. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear. 10. Remove rear cables from toggle levers. 11. Remove right and left rear cables nuts and bolts, then remove right and left cable assemblies. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten the nuts and bolts to specification. - Adjust the parking brake. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. CAUTION: Do not reuse the adjusting nut. For Frontal Collision Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair For Frontal Collision COLLISION DIAGNOSIS For Frontal Collision Check the SRS components using the following table. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) Page 46 Repair Flow Chart Page 2277 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Fuel Pressure Check FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because V42 models never have fuel return system. Method A CAUTION: The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other purposes. - Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge. - Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector). - To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check. - Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it. - Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. 3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover. Page 2058 Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM Removal and Installation EVAP CANISTER Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure. EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. 2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. Always replace O-ring with a new one. Page 2086 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 2028 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 1024 2. Install dial gauge in thrust direction on front end of camshaft. Measure end play when camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis) as shown. - If out of the specified range, replace with new camshaft and measure again. - If out of the specified range again, replace with new cylinder head. Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. Put V-block on precise flat bed and support No. 2 and No. 4 journal of camshaft as shown. 2. Install camshaft sprocket on camshaft. 3. Measure camshaft sprocket runout. Limit : 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) 4. If sprocket runout exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket. Valve Lifter - Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any excessive wear or cracks, replace as necessary. Valve Lifter Clearance Outer Diameter of Valve Lifter Page 2700 Flex Plate: Specifications Torque Drive Plate Tighten the drive plate bolts crosswise several times using a suitable tool. Component Locations Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4551 6. Remove screws and split RH from LH case. Page 2323 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4909 Key is in ignition key cylinder (key switch ON), power is supplied - through key switch terminal 2 - to BCM terminal 37. When key is removed from key switch (key switch OFF), power supply to BCM terminal 37 is terminated. BCM detects that key has been removed, determines that interior room/map lamp timer conditions are met, and turns the interior room/map lamp ON for 30 seconds. When front door LH opens to closes and the key is not inserted in the key switch (key switch OFF), BCM terminal 47 changes between 0V (door open) to 12V (door closed). The BCM determines that conditions for interior room/map lamp operation are met and turns the interior room/map lamp ON for 30 seconds. Timer control is canceled under the following conditions. Front door LH is locked [when locked with keyfob, main power window and door lock/unlock switch or front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)] - Front door LH is opened (front door switch LH turns ON) - Ignition switch ON. INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL If interior lamp is left "ON", it will not be turned out even when door is closed. BCM turns off interior lamp automatically to save battery 30 minutes after ignition switch is turned OFF. BCM controls interior lamps listed below: Vanity lamp (if equipped) - Room/map lamp - Cargo lamp - Personal lamp - Step lamps - Foot lamps - Ignition keyhole illumination After lamps turn OFF by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when signal received from keyfob, or main power window and door lock/unlock switch or front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is locked or unlocked - door is opened or closed - key is removed from or inserted in ignition key cylinder. Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-III and through the display (with color display). Page 2842 The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub. Page 1603 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info. Trailer Adapter Kit: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info. Classification: EL03-043H Reference: NTB04-049H Date: April 13, 2011 TRAILER LIGHT WIRING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard previous versions of this is bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES SERVICE INFORMATION NOTE: This bulletin provides information to be shared with all affected customers. ^ This TSB contains the appropriate hookup points for connecting a trailer light wiring harness to the towing vehicle's electrical system. ^ The wiring diagrams contained in this bulletin are for Nissan vehicles that have trailer towing capability (see the owners manual) but do not have a Genuine Nissan accessory towing kit (with wiring) available. Service and Repair Carpet: Service and Repair FLOOR TRIM Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove front seats. Refer to See: Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove rear seats. Refer to See: Seats/Service and Repair/Rear Seat. 4. Remove 3rd row rear seat assembly. Refer to See: Seats/Service and Repair/Rear Seat. 5. Remove kicking plates. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 6. Remove center console. Refer to See: Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 7. Remove lower seat belt anchors. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 8. Remove rear seat striker covers. 9. Remove tailgate kicking plate. 10. Remove front carpet. 11. Remove floor mat hooks from front carpet. 12. Remove rear carpet. 13. Remove front floor spacer. 14. Remove cargo organizer cover. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 111 NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory. DATA MONITOR All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Page 3129 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1339 Page EM-9 Page 1261 Page EM-19 Page 635 The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 3456 Boot - Check condition of boot. If cracked, replace it. - Check boots for accumulation of power steering fluid indicating a steering gear leak. If found, replace the steering gear as an assembly. Gear Thoroughly examine steering gear. If damaged, cracked, leaking, or worn, replace it. Inner and Outer Tie-rods Check ball joints for swinging force: Outer tie-rod outer and inner ball joints swinging force "A". Refer to See: Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And Linkage. - Check ball joint for rotating torque: Outer tie-rod outer ball joint rotating torque "B". Refer to See: Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And Linkage. - Check ball joints for axial end play: Outer tie-rod outer and inner ball joints axial end play "C". Refer to See: Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And Linkage. - Check condition of dust cover. If cracked, replace outer tie-rod. ASSEMBLY 1. Install the inner tie-rods. 2. Install the outer tie-rods to the specified length and tighten the outer tie-rod lock nut to specification. Refer to See: Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And Linkage. Use Genuine High Temperature, High Strength Thread Locking Sealant (Red) or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants. 3. Measure rack stroke. Refer to See: Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And Linkage. Page 1669 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Locations Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal Assembly Brake Pedal Assy: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal Assembly VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2008-2010 Nissan/Armada 2008-2010 Nissan/Quest 2008-2009 Nissan/Titan 2008-2010 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V072000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Pedals and Linkages Potential Number of Units Affected: 179383 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2008-2010 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56, and model year 2008-2009 Nissan Quest vehicles. The brake pedal pivot pin end was not spin-formed to specification during the manufacturing process of the brake pedal assembly. The pivot pin could slide and cause the brake pedal to partially disengage from the brake pedal bracket. CONSEQUENCE: The driver will experience unusual and noticeable looseness in the pedal and a reduction in braking force increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect to see if the pivot pin had been formed properly and will replace the brake pedal assembly if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 3462 Steering Shaft: Specifications Steering Gear And Linkage SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Steering Gear and Linkage Page 4012 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Second Row Seat Belt SEAT BELTS Second Row Seat Belt COMPONENTS REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR Removal 1. Remove seat belt lower anchor bolt. 2. Remove the D-ring anchor bolt cover and D-ring anchor bolt. 3. Remove the upper luggage area trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 4. Remove the seat belt guide bolt. 5. Remove seat belt retractor anchor bolt and the assembly. 6. Remove the height adjuster assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel tank. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair. Page 3014 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque specifications when connecting the brake tubes. - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). Page 4040 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 1596 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 2072 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 4178 Service and Repair Wiper Arm: Service and Repair REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Rear Wiper Arm REMOVAL 1. Operate rear wiper motor one full cycle, then turn OFF (auto stop). 2. Remove wiper arm cover, remove wiper arm nut, then remove rear wiper arm. INSTALLATION 1. Prior to rear wiper arm installation, operate wiper motor one full cycle then turn OFF (auto stop). Operate wiper motor one full cycle, then turn OFF (auto stop). - Using a suitable brush, clean pivot area as shown. This will reduce the possibility of wiper arm looseness. 2. Install rear wiper arm onto pivot and ensure wiper blade is parallel to the ground. 3. Tighten wiper arm nut to specification, install wiper arm cover. Wiper arm nut : 15.5 N.m (1.6 kg-m, 11 ft-lb) Page 1133 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets (no picture shown). NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in Locations Exterior View Display Monitor: Locations REAR VIEW MONITOR Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1253 Page EM-11 Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. A circuit breaker is used for the following systems: Power windows - Power sunroof Page 5214 Windshield Washer Motor: Locations Rear Wiper And Washer System REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1448 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Before starting engine, check the levels of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of engine coolant, engine oil, working fluid, fuel and exhaust gas. - Bleed air from passages in pipes and tubes of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. - After cooling down engine, again check amounts of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items: Page 169 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 2041 Body Control Module: Locations ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 2949 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Brake Piping And Hose BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE Front Brake Piping and Hose REMOVAL CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. - All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling. - Cover the open end of lines and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. 1. Connect vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve. 2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal. 3. Remove the flare nut connecting the brake tube and hose, then withdraw the lock spring. 4. Remove the connecting bolt and disconnect the brake hose from the caliper assembly. 5. Remove lock springs from the mounting portion of the brake tube and the mounting portion of the strut. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Attach the brake hose to the caliper assembly, then temporarily tighten the connecting bolt by hand. CAUTION: Correctly attach the brake hose to the cylinder body. - The copper washers of the connecting bolt have to be replaced with new ones every time the fitting is disconnected. 2. Attach the brake hose to the strut, then secure it with a lock spring. 3. Attach the brake hose to the brake tube and temporarily tighten the flare nut as much as possible by hand, then secure it with a lock spring. Page 698 1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the valve lifter that was measured as being outside the standard specifications. 3. Measure the center thickness of the removed lifter with a micrometer as shown. 4. Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement. - Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 in) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: . CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, (U) and (N), at each of proper positions. (Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.) 5. Install the selected replacement valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 7. Rotate the crankshaft a few turns by hand. 8. Confirm that the valve clearances are within specification. 9. After the engine has been run to full operating temperature, confirm that the valve clearances are within specification. Page 3406 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 669 2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown. Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214) 3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free from defects and foreign materials. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the front of the vehicle. - Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. Page 558 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) CAUTION: Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the tire and wheel will result. - If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly. REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 4. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 6. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. NOTE: Page 3367 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 2288 a. Remove quick connector cap. b. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool onto fuel tube. c. Insert Tool into quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool on that position. CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector. Hold Tool where it contacts and goes no further. d. Pull the quick connector straight out from the fuel tube. CAUTION: Pull quick connector holding it at the (A) position, as shown. - Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged. - Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out. - Avoid fire and sparks. - Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage and entry of foreign materials. 4. Remove the fuel rail with the fuel injectors attached, from the intake manifold. Remove the fuel injector O-rings and use new O-rings for installation. 5. If necessary, remove fuel damper bolts and the fuel dampers. Remove fuel damper O-rings and use new O-rings for installation. INSTALLATION 1. If necessary, install fuel dampers and fuel damper bolts. Use new O-rings for installation. 2. Install the fuel rails with fuel injectors attached. NOTE: Carefully install O-ring. - Lubricate O-rings by lightly coating with new engine oil. - Be careful not to damage the O-rings and surfaces for O-ring sealing surfaces. Do not expand or twist O-rings. - Discard old clips; replace with new ones. - Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation. Page 1357 1. Check to see if the 2 clips have come unattached from the sliding door welt. ^ If the clips are missing replace the door welt and proceed to step 2. ^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt by inserting the clips into the 2 holes located on the door welt, then proceed to step 2. 2. Prepare the surface by applying 3M(TM) Automotive Adhesion Promoter or equivalent on the door welt and sliding door panel. 3. Apply 3M(TM) Acrylic Plus Tape or equivalent to the area as shown in Figure 2. ^ Tape size 5 mm x 20 mm x 1 mm (0.19 in x 0.78 in x 0.039 in) 4. Firmly press the door welt onto the sliding door panel. ^ Make sure the clips are securely inserted into the 2 holes located on the sliding door panel. 5. Check to make sure this issue has been resolved. Page 1820 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4858 Page 141 Page 4306 3. Remove engine under cover. 4. Remove engine under cover seal. 5. Remove front grille. Refer to See: Grille/Service and Repair. 6. Disconnect fog lamps, if equipped. 7. Remove clips from top and screws from side of front bumper fascia. 8. Remove front bumper fascia. 9. Remove energy absorbing foam. 10. Remove front bumper reinforcement. 11. Remove front bumper stay assemblies. 12. Remove fog lamp assembly brackets RH/LH, if equipped. 13. Remove fog lamp assemblies RH/LH, if equipped. 14. Remove side front bumper brackets RH/LH. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Collision Avoidance Module: Locations REAR SONAR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1966 Create On-board Diagnosis Copy Sheet Display the trouble diagnosis result of CAN communication with the on-board diagnosis function on the vehicle monitor, etc. Copy them on the on-board diagnosis copy sheet. NOTE: - For some models, CAN communication diagnosis result is received from the vehicle monitor. (CONSULT-III is not available.) - For the details, refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis/Data Sheet. Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedure Timing Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedure Classification: EM10-001 Reference: NTB10-046 Date: March 19, 2010 ALTIMA, MAXIMA, AND QUEST; REVISED VQ35 ENGINE TIMING CHAIN PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Altima (L31) - VQ35DE engine ONLY 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2009 Quest (V42) SERVICE INFORMATION Removal and installation procedures for the VQ35 engine front timing chain case and timing chains (primary and secondary) have been updated to no longer require removal of the rocker covers and intake collector. In addition, new removal and installation procedures have been added for the timing chain tensioners (primary and secondary) and secondary timing chain tensioner shoe. The updated procedures are available via hyperlink in this bulletin (see below). Nissan Service Manuals for 2004-2006 Altima, 2004-2008 Maxima, and 2004-2009 Quest vehicles will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible. Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown below for any VQ35 engine front timing chain case, timing chain, or timing chain tensioner-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle. Page 3178 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF. Page 3136 Page 4681 1. Move the 2nd row seat fully forward and lift the seat up. See Figure 1. NOTE: ^ These photos are for the LH side. Repeat steps 1-4 for the RH side if needed. 2. Check to see if the inner and outer anti-rattle spring has fallen off the seat. See Figure 2. ^ Replace the springs with the ones listed in the Parts Information. Page 872 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Air Bleeding Hydraulic System POWER STEERING FLUID Bleeding Hydraulic System 1. Raise the front end of vehicle until the wheels are clear of the ground. 2. Add Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent into the steering fluid reservoir tank to the specified level. Refer to See: See: . Then quickly turn the steering wheel fully to right and left and lightly touch steering stoppers. Repeat steering wheel operation until the fluid level no longer decreases. 3. Start the engine then repeat step 2 above. Incomplete air bleeding will cause the following symptoms: Air bubbles in reservoir tank - Clicking noise in oil pump - Excessive buzzing in oil pump If this happens, bleed out the air repeating step 2 above. Fluid noise may occur in the valve or oil pump. This is common when the vehicle is stationary or while turning the steering wheel slowly. This does not affect the performance or durability of the system. Page 1602 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 1030 Camshaft: Service and Repair Inspection CAMSHAFT Inspection After Installation INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET (INT) OIL GROOVE WARNING: Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from any splashing engine oil. CAUTION: Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 or P0021 are detected in self-diagnostic results of CONSULT-III and it is directed according to inspection procedure of Engine Control System. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/CONSULT-III Function. 1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Engine Oil/Service and Repair. 2. Perform the following procedure so as to prevent the engine from being unintentionally started while checking. a. Release fuel pressure. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Fuel Pressure/Testing and Inspection. b. Disconnect ignition coil and injector harness connectors. 3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to See: Removal And Installation. 4. Crank the engine, and then make sure that engine oil comes out from camshaft bracket (No. 1) oil hole. End cranking after checking. WARNING: Be careful not to touch rotating parts (drive belts, idler pulley, and crankshaft pulley, etc.). CAUTION: Engine oil may squirt from intake valve timing control solenoid valve installation hole during cranking. Use a shop cloth to protect the engine components and the vehicle. - Do not allow engine oil to get on rubber components such as drive belt or engine mount insulators. Immediately wipe off any splashed engine oil. - Clean oil groove between oil strainer and intake valve timing control solenoid valve if engine oil does not come out from camshaft bracket (No. 1) oil hole. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Diagrams/Lubrication Circuit. 5. Remove components between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket (INT), and then check each oil groove for clogging. - Clean oil groove if necessary. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Diagrams/Lubrication Circuit. 6. After inspection, install removed parts. Page 3369 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 4750 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 4784 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Locations Ignition Coil: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 374 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 2669 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Move joint up/down, left/right, and in axial direction. Check for any rough movement or significant looseness. - Check boot for cracks or other damage, and for grease leakage. - If damaged, disassemble drive shaft to verify damage, and repair or replace as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Refer to "Removal and Installation (Left Side)" for tightening torque. CAUTION: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. - In order to prevent damage to differential side oil seal, place Tool "A" onto oil seal before inserting drive shaft as shown. Slide drive shaft into slide joint and tap with a hammer to install securely. Tool number : KV38106700 (J-34296) - Install new circlip on drive shaft in the circular clip groove on transaxle side. Refer to See: Disassembly And Assembly (Left Side). CAUTION: Make sure the new circlip on the drive shaft is securely fastened. After its insertion, try to pull the flange out of the slide joint by hand. If it pulls out, the circlip is not properly meshed with the transaxle side gear. Page 1220 Page EM-3 Page 4852 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1916 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Component Locations EGR Temperature Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3281 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Display Item List Page 3284 Inspection With CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Inspection with CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. Connect CONSULT-III and select "IPDM E/R" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 2. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Check display content in self-diagnosis results. NOTE: The Details for Display for the Period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory. Contents displayed NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.-INSPECTION END. CAN COMM CIRC-Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System. Page 4110 Cellular Phone: Locations Telephone TELEPHONE Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 5225 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Adjustments REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Rear Washer Nozzle Adjustment Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown. Adjustable range : ±15° (In any direction) Tow Truck Towing Towing Information: Service and Repair Tow Truck Towing TOW TRUCK TOWING Tow Truck Towing CAUTION: Never tow an automatic transaxle model with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels. - Never tow an automatic transaxle model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground as shown. CAUTION: Always release the parking brake when towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised with the rear wheels on the ground. Page 1889 Attachment General Procedure Page 140 Page 1465 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Coolant Type ............................................................ 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent, 50% Distilled or Demineralized Water. Page 2494 Page 3339 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 654 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Fuel Pressure Check FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because V42 models never have fuel return system. Method A CAUTION: The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other purposes. - Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge. - Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector). - To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check. - Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it. - Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. 3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover. Page 4499 REMOVAL CAUTION: Before removing the rear suspension assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensors from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the sensors becoming inoperative. 1. Remove the center exhaust tube with mufflers using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Disconnect the parking brake cable assemblies from the front cable. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Page 4184 AV-DVD-05 Page 3878 Page 5023 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Changing A/T Fluid Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid A/T FLUID Changing A/T Fluid 1. Run the engine to warm up the transaxle until the fluid is at full operating temperature "HOT". 2. Stop the engine. 3. Remove the engine undercover. 4. Drain the A/T fluid by removing the drain plug. Reinstall the drain plug to the specified tightness using a new drain washer. Drain plug : 39 N.m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft-lb) 5. Refill the transaxle with new specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe. Always refill the transaxle with the same volume amount that was drained out. Fluid grade and capacity : Refer to See: Maintenance. CAUTION: Do not overfill the transaxle. 6. Run the engine at idle speed for five minutes. 7. Check fluid level and condition. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Checking A/T Fluid. If the fluid is still contaminated, repeat step 2 through 5. Page 965 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 3751 2. Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim. 3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH. 4. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 5. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. MTC INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation Intake Sensor Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3227 DESCRIPTION Page 2136 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 818 2. If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side. 3. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode. 4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter. Tool number : KV991J0070 (J-45695) 5. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed position. Use Specified engine coolant or equivalent. Refer to See: . 6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification. Compressed air supply pressure : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2, 80 - 120 psi) CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. 7. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose. Page 1535 Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365) - Install the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst support bolts in the order as shown. Arrow Indicates : Engine front Three way catalyst support bolts : 22.0 N.m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb) - Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts. - Install the three way catalyst manifolds heat shield bolts. Three way catalyst manifold heat shield bolts : 8.3 N.m (0.85 kg-m, 73 in-lb) Page 4929 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1915 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 2231 4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure. Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline. - Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube and No.1 spool. - Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the No.1 spool on fuel tube. - Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00). - When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. - Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. - Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 -0.08in). Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 Nm (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13in-lb) - Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. 5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22lb) to confirm fuel tube does not come off. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. 7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 8. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. - During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 10. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. Method B CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains seal ability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Fuel Rail/Service and Repair. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Page 4360 > Window glass run rubber is replaced. > Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed. Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 4527 5. Install the new insert into the armrest. ^ Use the insert listed in the Parts Information. 6. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to the threads on the bolt. ^ See the Parts Information for Threadlocker details. 7. Reinstall the armrest on the seat. ^ Bolt torque: 28 Nm (2.85 kg-m, 20.6 lb-ft) Page 1148 Oil Pan: Service and Repair OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: You should not remove the oil pan until the exhaust system and cooling system have completely cooled off. - When removing the front and rear engine mounting through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up slightly for safety. CAUTION: When removing the upper oil pan from the engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS). Be careful not to damage sensor edges or signal plate teeth. 1. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Drain engine oil. Refer to . 3. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 4. Remove the oil dipstick. 5. Remove the engine undercover. 6. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. 7. Remove the A/C drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 8. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to See: Exhaust System/Service and Repair/Exploded View. 9. Remove coolant pipe bolts. 10. Discharge and recover the A/C refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 11. Remove the A/C compressor using power tools. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal And Installation For Compressor. 12. Remove oil cooler from the upper oil pan. Refer to See: Oil Cooler/Service and Repair. 13. Remove the oil pressure switch, and the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the upper oil pan. Page 3602 Rear Passenger Compartment TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Diagram Information and Instructions Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 2102 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1518 (1.97 in)] into water pump's upper and lower bolt holes until they reach the timing chain case. Then, alternately tighten each bolt for a half turn, and pull out the water pump. CAUTION: Pull straight out while preventing vane from contacting socket in installation area. - Remove water pump without causing sprocket to contact timing chain. 15. Remove M8 bolts and O-rings from water pump. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body and vane assembly. 2. Check for rough operation due to excessive end play. INSTALLATION 1. Install new O-rings to water pump. 2. Apply engine oil and engine coolant to the O-rings as shown. NOTE: Locate the O-ring with white paint mark to engine front side. Page 645 Camber, caster and kingpin inclination : Refer to See: Specifications. 2. If the camber, caster or kingpin inclination is not within specification, inspect the front suspension parts. Replace any damaged or worn out parts. TOE-IN WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. - Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub center as shown. These marks are measuring points. 4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side of the front tires as shown. 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn). CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. 6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. Total toe-in : Refer to See: Specifications. 7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer tie-rods. a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out. Standard length "L" : Refer to See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Steering Shaft/Steering Gear And Linkage. Page 4004 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb Page 4187 - to DVD player terminal 15. Power is also supplied from DVD player terminals 31 and 32 - to video monitor terminals 11 and 12. Ground is supplied to DVD player terminal 22 - through grounds M57, M61, and M79. Audio signals are supplied through DVD player terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 - to audio unit terminals 34, 35, 36 and 37. Video signals are supplied through DVD player terminals 23, 24, 28 and 29 - to front video monitor terminals 5, 6, 7 and 8 and rear video monitor (models with dual monitor system) terminals 5 and 8. On dual monitor DVD entertainment systems, video signals are also supplied through DVD player terminals 25 and 30 - to rear video monitor terminals 6 and 7. Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Capacity With Reservoir ..................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 2-3/4 gal(10.5L) Page 4192 Entertainment Systems: Service and Repair DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Removal and Installation DVD PLAYER Removal 1. Remove center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel. 2. Disconnect electrical connectors. 3. Remove DVD player screws, using power tool. 4. Pull out DVD player and disconnect DVD player connectors. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. VIDEO MONITOR (WITHOUT REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY) Removal 1. Remove video monitor screws. 2. Disconnect connector. 3. Remove video monitor housing. 4. Remove the video monitor hinge screws. 5. Remove the video monitor from video monitor housing. Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal. VIDEO MONITOR (WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY) Removal 1. Remove rear roof console assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the video monitor connector. 3. Remove the video monitor screws. Page 1853 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 3633 Ducts - Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 4390 6. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), remove the door lock assembly. 7. Remove the TORX bolt (T30), and remove the outside handle bracket. 8. While pulling outside handle, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle and door lock assembly. 9. Disconnect the door lock actuator connector. 10. Separate outside handle cable from the outside handle bracket. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SLIDING DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY Page 4372 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR GLASS Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the inside seal. 8. Remove the door glass bolts. 9. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear end to pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR Removal Page 4031 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Page 4569 RIGHT SIDE AND REAR CAUTION: Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from garnishes. - When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar garnish. Page 3675 Page 421 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3781 MTC HEATER CORE Component Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 900 Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Power Supply Routing Circuit POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Circuit Breaker (PTC) The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The temperature (and resistance) of the thermistor element varies with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the electrical resistance will rise sharply to reduce the circuit current. This reduced current flow will cause the element to cool lowering the resistance accordingly. Once resistance falls to a specified level normal circuit current flow is allowed to resume. Interior - Anti-Rattle Spring Falls Off 2nd Row Seats Seat Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Anti-Rattle Spring Falls Off 2nd Row Seats Classification: BT09-003 Reference: NTB09-034 Date: April 24, 2009 ANTI-RATTLE SPRING HAS FALLEN OFF THE LEFT AND / OR RIGHT 2ND ROW SEAT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM The inner and/or outer anti-rattle spring has fallen off from the left and/or right 2nd row seat. AND The seat continues to latch and otherwise operate normally. ACTION Install a new anti-rattle spring. NOTE: Do not replace the seat assembly for this incident if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE WARNING: Make sure to wear safety glasses when performing this Service Procedure. Page 388 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Cluster Lid C. 2. Press tabs and remove hazard switch (1). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 400 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 2672 - If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or more unsuccessful attempts, replace the entire drive shaft assembly. 4. Remove boot from shaft. 5. Remove circlip from shaft. 6. While rotating ball cage, clean the old grease off of the joint sub-assembly. Support Bearing 1. Remove dust shield from slide joint assembly using a suitable tool. 2. Remove snap ring using a suitable tool. 3. Press support bearing assembly off slide joint assembly using a suitable tool. 4. Separate support bearing from bracket using a suitable tool. Damper Remove damper bands, then remove damper from shaft. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Page 1580 Page 5125 NG - Repair or replace harness. Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection 1.CHECK FUSE Check if the following fuse in fuse block (J/B) is blown. OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Description and Operation. 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector and ground. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2 Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector and ground. Page 3716 3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, and then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers. Tool number : - (J-38873-A) 4. Install the clutch disc (1) on the drive shaft, together with the original shim(s) (2) using a suitable tool (A). Press the clutch disc down using Tool. Tool number : - (J-38873-A) 5. Install the center bolt using suitable tool (A). Center bolt : 12 N.m (1.2 kg-m, 9 ft-lb) - After tightening the center bolt to specification, check that the pulley rotates smoothly. 6. Install the compressor. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Refrigerant Lines. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Page 1893 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 3299 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 3305 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF. Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Classification: EL09-033A Reference: NTB09-095A Date: May 5, 2010 POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) 2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42) 2007-2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM A power window "Auto Up" will not work. ACTION Reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. 4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the top position. NOTES: > If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further diagnosis and repair information. > The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur: > Battery cable is disconnected. > Power window switch connector is disconnected. > Power window regulator is replaced. > Power window motor is replaced. > Window glass is removed. Page 752 Figure 2. NOTE Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION Tighten the bolt no more then necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 4759 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 1392 INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe) REMOVAL 1. Remove the timing chains (secondary). 2. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe by evenly prying at base of shoe with suitable tool as shown. INSTALLATION 1. Install new secondary timing chain tensioner shoe using Tool (A) as shown. - Tighten the bolt until the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe is fully seated on the secondary timing chain tensioner. CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolt. Tool number : (J-50246) 2. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2003 VEHICLE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION NOTE: Check CAN system type from the vehicle shape and equipment. Combination Meter Branch Line Circuit TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Combination Meter Branch Line Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of combination meter. 2. Check the resistance between the combination meter harness connector terminals. Page 3919 Page 1391 b. Install new seal rings on the IVT control valve covers. c. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT control valve covers. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. - Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes to install the IVT control valve covers. - Tighten the intake valve timing control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. IVT control valve cover bolts: 11.3 N-m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb) Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner) REMOVAL 1. Remove the timing chains (primary) and (secondary). 2. Remove the rocker covers. 3. Remove the camshaft brackets (No. 1). 4. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioners. ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 2549 7. Install snap ring using suitable tool. 8. Install O-rings in 2nd coast brake piston. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings. - Apply ATF to O-rings. 9. Coat the inner surfaces of oil pump assembly with ATF. 10. Press 2nd coast brake piston into oil pump assembly. 11. Install return spring. 12. Place Tool on return spring, and compress return spring with a press. Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) 13. Install snap ring using suitable tool. Removal and Installation Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel tank. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair. Page 3432 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP Disassembly and Assembly INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY If the following conditions are found, replace as necessary. Oil leakage from oil pump - Deformed or damaged pulley - Poor performance DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not disassemble pump body. Replace as an assembly. NOTE: Mount the oil pump in a soft jawed vise as necessary. 1. Remove nut, washer and pulley from drive shaft. 2. Remove the following from the power steering oil pump: Union bolt, washers, and joint. - Bolts and bracket. - Bolts and suction pipe. - Suction pipe O-ring. ASSEMBLY NOTE: Mount oil pump in soft jawed vise as required. 1. Check if drive shaft assembly turns smoothly. 2. Install bracket to power steering oil pump, and tighten the two bracket bolts to specification. 3. Install pulley to drive shaft assembly, then tighten lock nut to specification. 4. Install washers and joint to power steering oil pump, then tighten union bolt to specification. NOTE: Do not reuse washers. 5. Apply a coat of NISSAN PSF or equivalent to O-ring and install O-ring to suction pipe. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. 6. Install suction pipe to power steering oil pump and tighten bolts to the specification. Page 3330 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 4106 ^ Refer to Table A shown above for Speaker Adaptation applicability. b. Use Table A to determine the correct Speaker Adaptation instructions to be used. c. Have the customer perform Speaker Adaptation. NOTE: This will enhance the recognition rate of commands spoken by the customer. Phone "Re-Pairing" 1. An incident or incidents may occur after a phone has been updated, or settings have been changed. 2. A given incident or incidents may be resolved by pairing a phone a second time. 3. For "re-pairing" procedure, the steps below can be followed: a. Turn off the phone, and then remove its battery. b. Delete the phone from the current paired phone list on the vehicle Bluetooth(R) phone system. c. Reinstall the phone battery, and then turn on the phone. d. Follow the phone pairing instructions found in the device page of the www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth webpage. e. Test the phone. f. If the incident(s) still occurs, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. Customer Information Inform the customer of the website www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/ for future reference. Locations Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Page 3945 8. Remove the screws, release the tab, and remove the spiral cable. CAUTION: Do not disassemble spiral cable. - Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable. 9. Disconnect the spiral cable connectors. CAUTION: With the steering linkage disconnected, the spiral cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. 10. Remove the steering angle sensor from the spiral cable, if equipped. Refer to See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension/Sensors and Switches - Steering/Steering Angle Sensor/Service and Repair. 11. Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If damaged, replace the steering wheel. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.5 revolutions from the right end position and ending with the knob at the top. Page 5055 Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair Parking, License Plate And Tail Lamps PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Bulb Replacement FRONT PARKING LAMP Refer to See: Headlamp/Headlamp Bulb/Service and Repair. LICENSE PLATE LAMP Removal 1. Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove license plate lamp socket. 3. Remove license plate lamp. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. TAIL LAMP Refer to See: . Page 3520 - Check that the projecting part inside the upper seat and the flange part of bracket are attached as shown. - Check that the projection part outside the upper seat directs to vehicle front. - Position the hollow of the rubber seat with the groove part of rear lower link to install. - Install coil spring with the side of two paint markers directing to lower side. - After installing the rear lower link and coil spring, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. Page 167 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 4870 Always replace the seal after every disassembly. 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb) 4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 690 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CYLINDER HEAD On-Vehicle Service CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. Release fuel pressure and leave the fuel pump electrically disconnected. Refer to See: Fuel Pressure/Testing and Inspection. 4. Remove all six spark plugs. Refer to See: Spark Plug/Service and Repair. 5. Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. 6. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep the electric throttle control actuator butterfly-valve wide open to maximize air intake flow. 7. Crank the engine and record the highest gauge indication. 8. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder (steps 5 - 7). NOTE: Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. 9. If compression in one or more cylinders is low: a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through the spark plug holes. b. Retest compression (steps 5 - 8). - If adding oil helps raise compression pressure, then the piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston. - If the pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or is seating improperly. Inspect and repair the valve and/or valve seat. Refer to See: . If the valve and/or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace as necessary. - If compression stays low in two or more cylinders that are next to each other: - The cylinder head gasket may be leaking. - Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary. 10. After inspection is complete, install removed components. 11. Start engine and confirm that engine runs smoothly. 12. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis Introduction. System Description Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, oil pressure switch signal reception, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (High, Low) - Parking lamps - Tail and license plate lamps - Cornering lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger relay. 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor (magnet clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows: IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status Removal and Installation Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel tank. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair. Page 1721 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. Page 3229 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3965 Side Air Bag: Service and Repair SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a direct connect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced. - Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Remove headlining. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect front and rear side curtain air bag module connectors. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Description and Operation/Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors, 3. Remove the bolts in order starting at the front or rear, and remove the front and rear side curtain air bag modules. CAUTION: When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. - Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. - Do not disassemble air bag module. - Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). - Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Description and Operation/Direct-connect SRS Component Page 4432 Fuel Door: Electrical Diagrams FUEL FILLER LID OPENER Wiring Diagram - F/LID BL-F/LID-01 Page 1248 Page EM-6 Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4041 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Page 3045 Page 2375 Ignition Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 3924 ELR Function Stationary Check Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending further. ALR Function Stationary Check 1. Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard. 2. Retract the belt partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. 3. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any further. If necessary replace the retractor assembly. 4. Allow the entire length of the belt to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode. ELR Function Moving Check WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. 1. Fasten driver's seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2. Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop. During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check. SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK 1. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly. 2. Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration. If retractor does not operate within specifications, replace the retractor assembly. Page 1695 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater Page 2881 Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection BRAKE PEDAL Inspection and Adjustment INSPECTION 1. If equipped with adjustable pedals, move the brake pedal to the forward most position (closest to the floor). 2. Inspect the brake pedal height, play, and switch clearance from the dash lower panel as shown. CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedals, the brake pedal must be set in the forward most position (closest to the floor) for checking the brake pedal specifications. Tool number : - (J-46532) 3. Adjust the brake pedal as necessary. ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning 45° counterclockwise. 2. Loosen the lock nut on the input rod. Page 1405 - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 1969 indicate an error between DLC and TCM (line 1-a in the figure below). NOTE: Diag on CAN units are not indicated on the "ECU list" when the CAN line between Diag on CAN unit and the data link connector is open. - For a description of Diag on CAN, refer to See: Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/Diag On CAN. 2. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR: Check each item on "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR". Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the error circuit. a. Reception item of "ECM": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means ECM cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between ECM and TCM (line 2-a in the figure below). NOTE: If "UNKWN" is indicated on "TRANSMIT DIAG", then the control unit cannot transmit CAN communication signal to each unit. Draw a line between the control unit and the splice. b. Reception item of "AFS": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means AFS cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between AFS and TCM (line 2-b in the figure below). c. Reception item of "AV": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between AV and its receiving units. Do not draw any line. Locations Door Switch: Locations WARNING CHIME Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 5074 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 2057 Page 3485 Control Arm: Service and Repair Suspension Arm SUSPENSION ARM Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear suspension member assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Subframe/Rear Subframe/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the connecting rod upper joint from the suspension arm using power tool. 3. Remove the suspension arm nuts and bolts on the suspension member side using power tool. 4. Remove the suspension arm cotter pin and lock nut on the wheel hub and spindle assembly side using power tool. 5. Disconnect the suspension arm from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using Tool. Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A) CAUTION: Do not damage ball joint with Tool. While using Tool, temporarily tighten the lock nut so as not to damage the ball joint stud threads. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. After installing the suspension arm, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. Page 509 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 168 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 3937 NOTE: The wiring harness modification is to be performed only if the vehicle is equipped with the original passenger air bag which uses direct-connect harness connectors. If the passenger air bag is to be replaced in a vehicle that has already had the service replacement passenger air bag installed, the wiring harness modification is not required. 1. Locate the yellow and orange direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors. 2. Use wire cutters to cut back both previously used direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors from the vehicle wiring harness approximately 50 mm (1.9 in) from the connectors. 3. Remove approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) of the vehicle harness covering from the cut end. 4. Slide a piece of dual-wall heat shrink tubing (provided in the passenger air bag service kit) onto each wire of the previously used vehicle wiring harness. 5. Fold each wire back and insert into the end of the heat shrink tubing so that the end of the wire is approximately centered in the heat shrink tubing. 6. Use a heat gun to shrink the heat shrink tubing and seal the wire. 7. Use electrical tape to secure the modified circuits to the outside of the wiring harness. 8. Locate the front passenger air bag module service replacement harness connector (1) that is taped back to the main harness. Unwrap the tape to access the yellow service replacement connector and remove the dust cover from the connector. Page 161 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 4789 Page 2773 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams A/T INDICATOR Wiring Diagram - AT/IND DI-AT/IND-01 Page 3362 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 332 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations MTC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 1444 Valve Clearance: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT Valve Clearance CHECKING Perform inspection as follows after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve related parts, or if there is unusual engine conditions regarding valve clearance. NOTE: Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running. 1. Remove the intake manifold collectors. Refer to See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Collector. 2. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation LH (LH) and See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation RH (RH). 3. Remove the rocker covers. See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair. 4. Set No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. Align pointer (A) with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. - Check that the valve lifters on No.1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No.4 are tight. If not, turn the crankshaft one full revolution (360°) and align as shown. - RH cylinder head (1) - White Arrow Indicates Engine front 5. Check only the valves as shown. Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations SUNROOF Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3762 6. Remove the two in-cabin microfilters. 7. Remove the evaporator. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with new ones. Apply compressor oil to the O-rings before installing them. - When installing the in-cabin microfilters, face the microfilters according to the air flow direction arrow printed on the side of the filters. Removal And Installation For Rear Evaporator REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Rear Evaporator Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Locations Hazard Warning Switch: Locations TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1123 6. Remove the oil filter. Refer to See: Oil Filter/Service and Repair. 7. Remove the oil cooler from the upper oil pan. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Oil Cooler Check the oil cooler for cracks. Check the oil cooler for clogging by blowing through the coolant inlet. If necessary, replace the oil cooler. Relief Valve Inspect the relief valve for movement, cracks, and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, remove the relief valve by prying it out with a suitable tool. Install a new relief valve by tapping it into place with a suitable tool. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: When installing the oil cooler, align the stopper slot with the stopper on the upper oil pan. - Install the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel for torque specification. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check level and add engine oil and engine coolant. Refer to See: Engine Oil/Service and Repair and See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Inspection. 2. Start the engine and check that there are no leaks of engine oil or engine coolant. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check engine oil level and engine coolant level. Page 5107 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 3528 ASSEMBLY 1. When installing coil spring on strut, it must be positioned as shown. 2. Install upper spring seat with alignment mark facing the outer side of vehicle, in line with strut-to-knuckle attachment points. Page 1380 1. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(LH) 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket RH (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Timing chain (secondary) 10. Camshaft sprocket LH (EXH) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Tension guide CAUTION: - After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will strike the pistons. - When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. - Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets, camshaft brackets, and crankshaft pulley. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the rocker covers or intake manifold collector to remove or install the timing chain(s). Removal 1. Set No. 1 cylinder to TDC. - Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing indicator. 2. Remove front timing chain case. 3. Check timing chain markings to confirm No. 1 cylinder is at TDC of its compression stroke. - If not, remove Ring Gear Stopper Tool and turn crankshaft clockwise 360° (one revolution). Re-install Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Page 3676 Page 2817 - Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair BACK DOOR LOCK Back Door Latch REMOVAL 1. Remove the back door lower finisher. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair 2. Remove the weather seal. 3. On manual doors, disconnect the back door latch release cable. Page 2674 8. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown. CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Remove all grease from surfaces. 9. Make sure boot installation length "L" is the length indicated below. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool into the large end of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation. Boot installation length "L" : 189.30 mm (7.45 in) CAUTION: Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value. - Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot. 10. Secure big and small ends of boot with new boot bands as shown. CAUTION: Discard old boot bands; replace with new ones. 11. Install new dust shield to slide joint housing. 12. After installing housing and shaft, rotate boot to check whether or not the actual position is correct. If boot position is not correct, remove old boot bands then reposition the boot and secure with new boot bands. Wheel Side 1. Insert the amount of grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) into joint sub-assembly serration hole until grease begins to ooze from ball groove and serration hole. After inserting grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off old grease that has oozed out. System Description Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, oil pressure switch signal reception, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (High, Low) - Parking lamps - Tail and license plate lamps - Cornering lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger relay. 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor (magnet clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows: IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status Component Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Component HEATER and COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Component Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Removal Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Removal LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal 1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Cover. 2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from the base. Page 1786 Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm assembly (5). Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Page 589 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 1151 25. If re-installing the original oil pan, remove the old sealant from the mating surfaces using a scraper. - Also remove the old sealant from mating surface of the cylinder block. - Remove the old sealant from the bolt holes and threads. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off the old sealant. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean oil strainer of any foreign material. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes after completing installation before refilling the engine with oil. 1. Install oil strainer. 2. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent, to the front cover gasket and the rear oil seal retainer gasket as shown. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants. 3. Install a new front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket. Page 3353 Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process. 6. Begin the alignment procedure. ^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment. ^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications. If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips: ^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body. IMPORTANT: After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position. When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips: Page 4159 Rear Vision Camera: Locations Rear View Monitor REAR VIEW MONITOR Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3130 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3669 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 5078 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 1570 Body Control Module: Locations ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 2222 EGR Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Page 2526 Control Module: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 1971 f. Reception item of "M&A;": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means M&A; cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between M&A; and TCM (line 2-f in the figure below). g. Reception item of "ADP": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means ADP cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between ADP and TCM (line 2-g in the figure below). h. Reception item of "ABS": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between ABS and its receiving units. Do not draw any line. Page 1279 - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. b. Before installing timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets, confirm mating marks are visible. If necessary, use paint or equivalent to re-mark the camshaft sprockets at each mating mark. c. Install timing chains (secondary) (8) and camshaft sprockets [INT (1) and EXH (9)]. - Left bank mating marks (6) - Align the timing chain mating marks (secondary) (2) (yellow color link) with the ones on camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH)(4), (5), (7) and (10)(punched), and install them. NOTE: - Mating marks for camshaft sprocket (INT) are on the back side of camshaft sprocket (secondary). - There are two types of mating marks, circle (7), (10) and oval (4), (5) types. They should be used for the right and left banks, respectively. Right bank : Use circle type (7) and (10). Left bank : Use oval type (4) and (5). - Align dowel pin (3) and pin hole on camshafts with the groove (11) and dowel pin on sprockets, and install them. - On the intake side, align pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft front end with dowel pin (3) on the back side of camshaft sprocket, and install them. - On the exhaust side, align dowel pin on camshaft front end with pin groove (11) on camshaft sprocket, and install them. - In case that positions of each mating mark and each dowel pin do not fit on mating parts, make fine adjustment to the position by slightly turning camshaft(s). - Bolts for camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is enough to prevent the dislocation of dowel pins. d. Confirm the mating marks are aligned, then finger tighten camshaft sprocket bolts. Final tightening will be done with all timing chains installed. e. Remove stopper pins out from timing chain tensioners (secondary). 3. Install timing chain (primary) as follows: Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic Transaxle Fluid Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 7 7/8 qt (7.4L) Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) Cruise Control: Description and Operation Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) System Description AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) System Description INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART BASIC ASCD SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions. Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH). ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed. Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control. NOTE: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. SET OPERATION Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.) When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.) ACCELERATOR OPERATION If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is depressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. CANCEL OPERATION When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled. CANCEL switch is depressed - More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are depressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared) - Brake pedal is depressed - Shift lever is changed to N, P, R position - Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed - VDC/TCS system is operated When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform the driver by blinking indicator lamp. Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may blink slowly. When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by depressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Malfunction for some self-diagnosis regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly. If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle speed memory will be erased. COAST OPERATION Page 4769 OK or NG OK>> GO TO 5. NG>> GO TO 4. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 - 10 A fuse - Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK>> GO TO 6. NG>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component Inspection. OK or NG OK>> GO TO 11. NG>> Replace ASCD brake switch. 7.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK>> GO TO 9. NG>> GO TO 8. 8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 - 10 A fuse - Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery Page 1582 Page 2053 Page 1798 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Spark Plug Page 1955 control unit which carries out CAN communication). - Error may be detected if reprogramming is not completed normally. NOTE: CAN communication system is normal if "U1000" or "U1001" is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS of CONSULT-III under the above conditions. Erase the memory of the self-diagnosis of each unit. Self-Diagnosis TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Self-Diagnosis Symptom When Error Occurs In CAN Communication System TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communication System In CAN communication system, multiple units mutually transmit and receive signals. Each unit cannot transmit and receive signals if any error occurs on CAN communication line. Under this condition, multiple control units related to the root cause malfunction or go into fail-safe mode. ERROR EXAMPLE NOTE: Each vehicle differs in symptom of each unit under fail-safe mode and CAN communication line wiring. - Refer to See: CAN/Abbreviation List for the unit abbreviation. Example: TCM branch line open circuit Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) COMPONENT PARTS AND HARNESS CONNECTOR LOCATION Page 5060 Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb Page 1913 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 13 Page 786 CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse O-rings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or around the connection. Removal And Installation For Low-Pressure Flexible Hose REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover. 2. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 3. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to See: Component. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Component. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. ATC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover. Page 4905 Courtesy Lamp: Description and Operation INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Schematic Page 4770 - Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK>> GO TO 10. NG>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P1805. OK or NG OK>> GO TO 11. NG>> Replace stop lamp switch. 11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis For Intermittent Incident/Description See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis For Intermittent Incident/Diagnosis Procedure. - INSPECTION END Component Inspection ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Inspection ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection, and perform step 3 again. STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 4054 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three minutes. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to See: Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 3. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor (1) nuts. 4. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector (2). CAUTION: Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. - Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. - Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. - Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Page 2579 REPAIR FLOW CHART Calculated Load Value Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Calculated Load Value SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Calculated Load Value Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Locations Power Sliding Door Module: Locations AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2490 Page 4855 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 3232 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 3837 Refrigerant: Service Precautions Precaution For Leak Detection Dye PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Leak Detection Dye - The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks. - Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety glasses to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of the fluorescent dye. - The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electronic refrigerant leak detector. The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). - For your safety and the customer's satisfaction, read and follow all manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions prior to performing work. - A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). - Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a future service. - Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled, clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period of time cannot be removed. - Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.). - Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system. - Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use HFC-134a (R134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection dye in HFC-134a (R134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result. - The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor failure occurs. Page 3935 Air Bag: Service and Repair Front Passenger Air Bag Module FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors. Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module. Follow the WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION procedure for necessary wiring harness alterations. REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be replaced and the wiring harness modified. - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three minutes. - Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2. Remove the glove box. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. 3. Remove 2 nuts (through glove box opening) retaining front passenger air bag module to instrument panel crossmember. 4. Disconnect the front passenger air bag module electrical connectors. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Description and Operation/Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors. 5. Remove the instrument panel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 6. Remove front passenger air bag module nuts and remove from the instrument panel assembly. CAUTION: - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. Always place front passenger air bag module with caution label side facing upward. - Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. - Do not disassemble air bag module. - Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. - Do not expose the front passenger air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). Exploded View Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Exploded View IGNITION COIL Exploded View Service and Repair Control Assembly: Service and Repair CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation FRONT AIR CONTROL Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the front air control. 2. Remove cluster lid C, disconnect the front air control electrical connector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Cluster Lid C. 3. Remove the screws securing the front air control (1) to cluster lid C (2). 4. Remove the front air control. Installation Installation is the reverse order of removal. REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the rear air control (front). 2. Remove the front roof console assembly from the headlining, located over the rear view mirror. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the screws securing the rear air control (front) (1) to the front roof console assembly (2). 4. Remove the rear air control (front). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) Removal 1. Remove the rear air control (rear) (1) from the headlining, located over the sliding door, RH. Page 769 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 1876 Page 3391 If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), try the above procedure again from the beginning. Never push vehicle backward. 6. Measure distance "B" (front side). Total toe-in : Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheel Alignment. 7. Adjust toe-in by turning the adjusting bolts. NOTE: Toe changes about 1.5 mm (0.059 in) [one side] with each graduation of the adjusting bolt. 8. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to See: Suspension/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. Page 2268 Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm assembly (5). Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Page 4011 - On RH side, disconnect the seat belt tension sensor. 5. Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner connector. CAUTION: For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into the notch, lift the lock and remove the connector. - Install the connector with the lock raised, and push the lock into the connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE Removal 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to "Front Seat Belt". 2. Remove the screws and seat cushion inner finisher. 3. Remove the anchor bolt and buckle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Checking Brake Fluid Level Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Brake Fluid Level BRAKE FLUID Checking Brake Fluid Level - Check fluid level in the sub tank. It should be between "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the sub tank. - Visually check around the reservoir tank and sub tank for leaks. - If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks. - Release parking brake lever and see if brake warning lamp goes off. If not, check brake system for leaks. Page 1839 Page 4070 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 1374 a. Loosen the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. b. Insert the appropriate size tool into the notch (1) at the top of the front timing chain case as shown. c. Pry off the case by moving the suitable tool (2) as shown. - Cut liquid gasket for removal using Tool. CAUTION: - Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool. - After removal, handle carefully so it does not bend, or warp under a load. 30. Remove O-rings from rear timing chain case. CAUTION: Use new O-rings for installation. 31. Remove the front oil seal from the front timing chain case using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the front cover. 32. Remove all old Silicone RTV Sealant from all the bolt holes and bolts. CAUTION: Do not damage the threads or mating surfaces. Page 1534 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion - Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of the exhaust manifold mating surfaces. Limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Arrow Indicates : Engine front - Install the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown. CAUTION: Before installing a heated oxygen sensor or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean the exhaust manifold threads using Tool, and apply anti-seize lubricant. - Do not over-tighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor or heated oxygen sensors. Doing so may cause damage. Page 1166 If removed, tighten the intake manifold collector (upper) bolts in the order as shown. Intake manifold collector (upper) bolts ..................................................................................................................................... 19.6 N.m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) Install the intake manifold collector (lower) bolts in the order as shown. Intake manifold collector (lower) bolts ..................................................................................................................................... 19.6 N.m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) Intake Manifold Stud bolts : 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb) - Install intake manifold nuts and bolts in the order in two steps as shown. Page 3246 Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Power Supply Routing Circuit POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Circuit Breaker (PTC) The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The temperature (and resistance) of the thermistor element varies with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the electrical resistance will rise sharply to reduce the circuit current. This reduced current flow will cause the element to cool lowering the resistance accordingly. Once resistance falls to a specified level normal circuit current flow is allowed to resume. Page 2088 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 1945 LAN-CAN-02 Page 3452 Steering Gear: Removal and Replacement POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: - The rotation of the driver air bag spiral cable is limited. If the steering gear must be removed, set the front wheels in the straight-ahead direction. Do not rotate the steering column while the steering gear is removed. - Remove the steering wheel and spiral cable before removing the steering lower joint to avoid damaging the SRS spiral cable. 1. Remove the two front wheels and tires using power tool. 2. Remove cotter pins and nuts, then disconnect the outer tie-rods using Tool. Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A) 3. Disconnect the outer stabilizer bar ends from connecting rods using power tool. Refer to See: Suspension/Stabilizer Bar/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. Page 4688 1. Move the 2nd row seat fully forward and lift the seat up. See Figure 1. NOTE: ^ These photos are for the LH side. Repeat steps 1-4 for the RH side if needed. 2. Check to see if the inner and outer anti-rattle spring has fallen off the seat. See Figure 2. ^ Replace the springs with the ones listed in the Parts Information. Page 2248 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. Page 3408 Always replace the seal after every disassembly. 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb) 4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 473 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5021 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 3132 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 1153 7. Install the four upper oil pan to transaxle bolts. Refer to See: Service and Repair. 8. Apply a continuous bead of sealant to the lower oil pan. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants. - Be sure the sealant is 4.5 - 5.5 mm (0.177 - 0.217 in) wide. - Installation must be done within 5 minutes after applying sealant. 9. Install the lower oil pan. Tighten the lower oil pan bolts in order as shown. CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil. 10. Install rear plate cover. Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4578 1. Remove sliding door finisher. Refer to See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove exterior door handle. 3. Disconnect sliding door lock assembly electrical connectors. 4. Remove sliding door lock assembly. Remove screws from front and rear latches. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SLIDING DOOR CABLE ASSEMBLY AND MOTOR Page 2487 Page 2461 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 5080 Page 1230 Page EM-13 Component Locations EGR Temperature Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Fuse: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement TCS/ABS Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque specifications when connecting the brake tubes. - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). Page 2205 5. If necessary, remove the EGR temperature sensor. 6. Disconnect the EGR volume control valve electrical connector. 7. Remove the EGR tube [to intake manifold collector (lower) bolts at the intake manifold collector (lower). 8. Remove the EGR tube (to intake manifold collector (lower) bolts at the EGR volume control valve and remove the tube. 9. Loosen the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to EGR volume control valve. 10. If necessary remove the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) as follows: a. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. b. Disconnect the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to EGR volume control valve fitting. c. Disconnect the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1). d. Remove the RH heat shield. e. Remove the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to exhaust manifold fitting. 11. Disconnect the coolant lines at the EGR volume control valve. 12. Remove the EGR volume control valve bolts and the valve. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Tighten the RH heat shield bolts to specification. ATC Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations ATC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Service and Repair Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation FRONT AIR CONTROL Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the front air control. 2. Remove cluster lid C, disconnect the front air control electrical connector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Cluster Lid C. 3. Remove the screws securing the front air control (1) to cluster lid C (2). 4. Remove the front air control. Installation Installation is the reverse order of removal. REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT) Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the rear air control (front). 2. Remove the front roof console assembly from the headlining, located over the rear view mirror. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the screws securing the rear air control (front) (1) to the front roof console assembly (2). 4. Remove the rear air control (front). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR) Removal Page 1170 13. If necessary, remove the electric throttle control actuator bolts in the reverse order as shown and remove the electric throttle control actuator. CAUTION: Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle control actuator. - Do not disassemble. 14. If necessary, remove the intake manifold collector (upper) bolts in the reverse order as shown, using power tool and remove the intake manifold collector (upper). CAUTION: Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle control actuator, if installed. 15. If necessary, remove power valve bolts in the reverse order as shown and remove the power valve. 16. If necessary remove the following components: - Vacuum tank - VIAS control solenoid valve - EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion Using straightedge and feeler gauge, inspect the surface distortion of intake manifold collector (lower). Page 3559 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) CAUTION: Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the tire and wheel will result. - If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly. REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 4. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 6. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. NOTE: Page 1906 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 293 Page 1864 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 3822 Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Removal And Installation HEATER and COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation FRONT HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Removal 1. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 2. Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect the front heater hoses from the front heater core. 5. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe from the front expansion valve. 6. Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat track. 7. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 8. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and the fuse block (J/B) electrical connectors. Refer to See: Locations/Harness Locations. 9. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body. 10. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the vehicle. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the front heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member. 11. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, and apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. NOTE: Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. - Recharge the A/C system. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. REAR HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Removal 1. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 2. Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the rear RH interior trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. 5. Disconnect the rear A/C pipes from the rear expansion valve. 6. Disconnect the following electrical connectors: Rear blower motor - Rear blower motor resistor Removal and Installation Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel tank. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair. Page 1375 33. Use a scraper to remove all of the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the front timing chain case and opposite mating surfaces. CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces. INSTALLATION 1. Install dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up to a point close to taper in order to shorten protrusion length. 2. Install the new front oil seal on the front timing chain case. Apply new engine oil to the oil seal edges. NOTE: Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. a. Install the new front oil seal so that it becomes flush with the face with front timing chain case using suitable drift. CAUTION: Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil seal. NOTE: Make sure the garter spring is in position and seal lip is not inverted. Page 4182 AV-DVD-03 MODELS WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY (SINGLE MONITOR) Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil Capacity With oil filter change ............................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 4-1/4 qt (4.0L) Without oil filter change ....................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 3-7/8 qt (3.7L) Page 1547 Page 3753 3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH. 4. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 5. Twist and pull the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 938 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 2403 DESCRIPTION VIN Registration Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and ID/Model Variation. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display. Page 498 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 2823 - Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Diagrams Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ) Terminal Arrangement Page 2010 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of TCM. 2. Check the resistance between the TCM harness connector terminals. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair the TCM branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the TCM. Refer to See: Transmission Control Systems/Description and Operation/A/T Control System/Circuit Diagram. OK or NG OK - Present error: Replace the TCM. Refer to See: Transmission Control Systems/Locations. - Past error: Error was detected in the TCM branch line. NG - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. Page 2194 Page 2841 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor inoperative. - Pull out the sensor, be careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness. - Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the wheel sensor bolt to the specified torque. - Before installing the wheel sensor, make sure there are no foreign materials (such as iron fragments) adhered to the pick-up part of the wheel sensor, to the inside of the wheel sensor mounting hole or on the rotor mounting surface. FRONT WHEEL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove the front wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Partially remove the front wheel fender protector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor. 4. Remove the harness wire from mounts and disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR WHEEL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor from the rear wheel hub and bearing assemblies. 2. Remove the harness wire from mounts and harness wire clips from the rear suspension member. 3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub. Page 1487 MTC HEATER CORE Component Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 4433 Fuel Door: Service and Repair FUEL FILLER LID OPENER REMOVAL 1. Remove LH rear lower finisher. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Open fuel filler lid. 3. Disconnect fuel filler lid opener actuator electrical connector. 4. Remove lock ring and fuel filler lid opener actuator. Turn lock ring 1/4 turn counter-clockwise to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3126 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Service and Repair Rear Bumper: Service and Repair REAR BUMPER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove rear combination lamps RH/LH. Refer to See: Lighting and Horns/Tail Lamp/Tail Light Bulb/Service and Repair See: Lighting and Horns/Tail Lamp/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect sonar sensor connectors, if equipped. 3. Remove C205 clips from rear bumper fascia. 4. Remove side retainers RH/LH. Rotate clip 1/4 turn to release retainer. Page 542 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 4426 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 1604 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Marker Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Page 177 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose Sliding Door Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose Classification: BT09-006 Reference: NTB09-014 Date: March 4, 2009 SLIDING DOOR WELT HAS LOOSENED FROM THE DOOR PANEL APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 - 2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM The door welt (rubber trim) is coming loose from the sliding door panel (clips have detached). ACTION Check to see if the clips are missing from the door welt: ^ If the clips are missing, replace the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape. ^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 3936 - Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. - For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Description and Operation/Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors. INSTALLATION Original Passenger Air Bag Module Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Description and Operation/Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors. CAUTION: Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Service Replacement Passenger Air Bag Module 1. Install the front passenger air bag module to the instrument panel pad assembly. 2. Install the instrument panel assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 3. Connect the front passenger air bag module harness connector to yellow 4-pin service replacement air bag connector and fasten connector to mounting bracket. CAUTION: Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors. Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module. CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be replaced and the wiring harness modified. - Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three minutes. - Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Page 3711 7. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. 8. Remove the three magnet coil screws (B) and remove the magnet coil (5). - Shim (1) - Snap ring (2) - Clutch disc (3) - Pulley (4) - Center bolt (A) INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clutch Disc If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley. Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If the contact surface of the pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace the clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before installation. Coil Check the magnet coil for a loose connection or cracked insulation. INSTALLATION 1. Install the magnet coil. CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. 2. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. Page 3662 Blower Motor: Locations MTC Front Passenger Compartment TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 4028 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Service and Repair Front Bumper: Service and Repair FRONT BUMPER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove splash guards RH/LH. 2. Partially remove front fender protectors RH/LH at front bumper fascia. Refer to See: Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. Page 967 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Service and Repair Solar Sensor: Service and Repair OPTICAL SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front demister grille. Refer to See: Lighting and Horns/Ambient Light Sensor/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector (2). 3. Twist the optical sensor (1) counter clockwise to remove it from the defroster grille. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Service and Repair Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair SPIRAL CABLE Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 3. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 4. Remove the steering wheel. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the column cover upper and lower. 6. Remove wiper/washer switch connector, then pinch the tabs at wiper/washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. 7. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from base. Page 1622 Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedure Timing Chain Tensioner: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedure Classification: EM10-001 Reference: NTB10-046 Date: March 19, 2010 ALTIMA, MAXIMA, AND QUEST; REVISED VQ35 ENGINE TIMING CHAIN PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Altima (L31) - VQ35DE engine ONLY 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2009 Quest (V42) SERVICE INFORMATION Removal and installation procedures for the VQ35 engine front timing chain case and timing chains (primary and secondary) have been updated to no longer require removal of the rocker covers and intake collector. In addition, new removal and installation procedures have been added for the timing chain tensioners (primary and secondary) and secondary timing chain tensioner shoe. The updated procedures are available via hyperlink in this bulletin (see below). Nissan Service Manuals for 2004-2006 Altima, 2004-2008 Maxima, and 2004-2009 Quest vehicles will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible. Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown below for any VQ35 engine front timing chain case, timing chain, or timing chain tensioner-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle. Locations Ambient Light Sensor: Locations AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 501 Removal And Installation For Compressor Clutch Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Removal And Installation For Compressor Clutch REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch REMOVAL 1. Remove the compressor. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal And Installation For Compressor. 2. Remove the center bolt by holding the clutch disc steady using a suitable tool (A). 3. Remove the clutch disc. 4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers. 5. Remove the pulley assembly using Tool. - Use a pulley puller with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the compressor shaft and the center of the puller on the small adapter as shown. Tool number : KV99233130 (J-29884) CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under (not into) the pulley groove. 6. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers. Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Regulator: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Page 7 Collision Avoidance Module: Service and Repair REAR SONAR SYSTEM Sonar Control Unit REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair to gain access to sonar control unit. 2. Disconnect electrical connector then remove sonar control unit. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3309 NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory. DATA MONITOR All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Page 4714 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Power Door Lock System POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ATC Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations ATC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 607 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Locations Door Switch: Locations WARNING CHIME Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3361 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 1857 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3663 Rear Passenger Compartment TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Page 3684 ATC BLOWER MOTOR Removal and Installation FRONT BLOWER MOTOR Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove the center ventilator duct. Refer to See: Air Duct/Service and Repair/Automatic/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the front blower motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR BLOWER MOTOR Removal 1. Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the three screws and remove the blower motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. MTC BLOWER MOTOR Removal and Installation FRONT BLOWER MOTOR Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove the center ventilator duct. Refer to See: Air Duct/Service and Repair/Manual/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the front blower motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR BLOWER MOTOR Page 2063 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 2369 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Removal And Installation LH IGNITION COIL Removal and Installation LH REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine cover. 2. Disconnect ignition coil connector. 3. Remove the ignition coil. CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 373 Page 1222 Page EM-5 Page 2847 Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 2732 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 3062 Page 1908 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 508 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Page 5112 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 3231 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 2214 OK >>GO TO 16. NG >>Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 11.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 46. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 12. NG >>Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 12.CHECK 15 A FUSE 1. Disconnect 15 A fuse from IPDM E/R. 2. Check 15 A fuse. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 16. NG >>Replace 15 A fuse. 13.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Supply And Ground Circuit. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 14. NG >>Repair or replace ground connections. 14.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. Page 5129 OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Repair or replace harness. 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between door mirror RH connector D113 terminal 5 and ground. 5 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER Check continuity between each door mirror RH connector D113 terminals 5 and 6. 6 - 5 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - Repair or replace harness. NG - Replace door mirror RH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Door Mirror/Door Mirror Assembly. Rear Window Defogger Signal Inspection REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Rear Window Defogger Signal Inspection 1.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION LINE AV communication line check is executed. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Integrated Display System/CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display). Is rear window defogger displayed on the display? Page 1943 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 117 Locations Variable Induction Control Actuator: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2713 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 4850 DESCRIPTION Page 1748 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 5127 Check continuity between each door mirror terminals 5 and 6. 6 - 5 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - Repair or replace harness. NG - Replace malfunctioning door mirror LH or RH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Door Mirror/Door Mirror Assembly. Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Inspection REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Inspection 1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect door mirror LH. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground. OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Repair or replace harness. 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT Component Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Component VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Component Variable Blower Control (Front) Variable Blower Control (Rear) Page 3681 Removal And Installation VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Removal and Installation VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel RH and glove box. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel. 3. Disconnect the variable blower control (front) electrical connector. 4. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (front). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the two variable blower control (rear) screws. 3. Remove the variable blower control (rear). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2239 Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. Page 3063 Service and Repair Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair OIL SEAL Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal REMOVAL 1. Rotate crankshaft, and set piston whose oil seal is to removed to top dead center. This prevents valve from dropping inside cylinder. CAUTION: When rotating crankshaft, be careful to avoid scarring the front timing chain case with the timing chain. 2. Remove camshaft and valve lifter relating to valve oil seal to be removed. Refer to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer and valve spring using Tool. CAUTION: When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes. 4. Remove valve oil seal using Tool. Tool number : KV10107902 (J-38959) INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to new valve oil seal joint surface and seal lip. In-Vehicle Sensor Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Sensor IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel. 2. Remove the two screws and remove the in-vehicle sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2141 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Fuse: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Page 920 When the TRIP button is pressed, the followin9 modes will display on the screen. Warning message (if any) -- TRIP 1 -- TRIP 2 -- FUEL ECONOMY -- MAINTENANCE -- Audio or OFF -- TRIP 1 Maintenance items Press the TRIP button to display maintenance information or set maintenance intervals for the following: - Engine Oil - Tire Rotation - Tire Pressure (if so equipped) For setting the Tire Pressure display, refer to "Tire pressure information" later in this article. Changing the maintenance interval Select the "Engine Oil" or "Tire Rotation" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button to display the screen to change the maintenance interval. Select the "Maintenance Schedule" key using the joystick and move the joystick to right or left to set the maintenance interval. Resetting the maintenance interval Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6 Page 1084 Drive Belt: Adjustments DRIVE BELTS Tension Adjustment CAUTION: When belt is replaced with a new one, adjust it to value for "New belt" to accommodate for insufficient adaptability with pulley grooves. - When deflection or tension of belt being used exceeds "Used belt limit" adjust it to value for "After adjustment" of "Used belt". - When checking belt deflection or tension immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specification value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys. - When installing belt, make sure that it is correctly engaged with pulley groove. - Keep oil and water away from belt. - Do not twist or bend belt excessively. GENERATOR AND AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT 1. Remove engine undercover. 2. Loosen idler pulley lock nut (A) and adjust the belt by turning adjusting bolt (B). For specified belt deflection and tension, refer to See: Testing and Inspection. 3. Tighten lock nut (A). Lock nut (A) : 34.8 N.m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb) 4. Tighten adjusting bolt (B). Adjusting bolt (B) : 5.4 N.m (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb) POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT 1. Remove engine undercover. 2. Loosen adjusting bolt (C). 3. Loosen power steering oil pump bolt (D). NOTE: Bolt head (D) is at the engine rear side. 4. Adjust the belt by turning the adjusting bolt (E). Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 849 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered "Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. Page 640 Page 2895 ASSEMBLY 1. Apply rubber grease or brake fluid to the piston seals and install them into cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston seals. 2. Apply rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot cylinder-side lip into the cylinder body groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston boot. 3. Apply brake fluid to the piston, insert into the cylinder body by hand and firmly attach the piston boot piston-side lip into the piston groove. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. 4. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member. 5. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) or equivalent, to the pad back plate and inner shim sides. Install inner shims and outer shim covers to inner and outer pads. Page 4013 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE Removal 1. Remove the seat back recliner handle. 2. Remove the screws and seat cushion finisher. 3. Remove the seat belt buckle anchor bolt and seat belt buckle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 864 4. Install Tools. 5. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 6. Check oil pressure with engine running under no-load. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Engine Oil Pressure/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications. CAUTION: If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and blockages. 7. After the inspections, install the oil pressure switch as follows: a. Remove the old sealant adhering to oil pressure switch and engine. b. Apply thread sealant and tighten the oil pressure switch to specification. - Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants. Oil pressure switch : 14.8 N.m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb) Page 4125 Cellular Phone: Electrical Diagrams TELEPHONE Wiring Diagram - H/PHON AV-H/PHON-01 Service and Repair Glove Compartment: Service and Repair INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY Glove Box REMOVAL CAUTION: To prevent damage, place shop cloths onto surrounding parts. 1. Place the door weatherstrip by the glove box aside. 2. Remove glove box screws using power tool. 3. Carefully remove the clips by prying loose. 4. Disconnect glove box lamp harness. CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not let the glove box hang from glove box lamp harness. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 174 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 4945 Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation Removal 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Cluster Lid C. 2. Press tabs and remove hazard switch (1). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4429 Page 2343 Page 4083 Antenna: Description and Operation AUDIO ANTENNA System Description With the ignition switch in ACC or ON, power is supplied through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to audio unit terminal 10. Ground is supplied through the case of the antenna amp. When the radio switch is turned ON, antenna signal is supplied through audio unit terminal 5 - to the antenna amp. terminal 1. Then the antenna amp. is activated. The amplified radio signals are supplied to the audio unit through the antenna amp. Page 4299 Body Control Module: Locations ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 4456 ^ Bolt A (shown in Figure 1 above) will need to be removed. NOTE: You may not need to completely remove the lower finisher. Unclipping the top and pulling it back may give you enough access. 2. Check bolt "B" (see Figure 1). ^ If bolt B is loose or missing, replace it with a new one. ^ New bolt is listed in the parts information. ^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of the new bolt and torque bolt to 5.7 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 51 in-lb) NOTE: If bolt B is missing, make sure to find the missing bolt and remove it from the vehicle. The missing bolt, if left loose in the passenger compartment, could cause a rattle. 4. Reassemble all parts in reverse order. ^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of bolt A and torque bolt to 15.2 N·m (1.6 kg-m, 11 ft-lb). 5. Make sure the power back door motor works correctly with no abnormal noise. ^ Cycle the power back door (open and close) 5 times. Page 5178 Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Removal And Installation (With Rear Power Vent Windows) SIDE WINDOW GLASS Removal and Installation (with Rear Power Vent Windows) REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the antenna. 3. Disconnect the rear side window motor harness. 4. Remove the rear side window motor bolts. 5. Remove the side window front bolts and glass. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. INSTALLATION 1. Install the glass from outside to insure that it is even with the top and bottom of the opening. Tighten side window front bolts to the specified torque. 2. Install rear side window motor bolts. 3. Connect the rear side window motor harness. 4. Connect the antenna. 5. Install rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. Page 5152 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. Page 1447 1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the valve lifter that was measured as being outside the standard specifications. 3. Measure the center thickness of the removed lifter with a micrometer as shown. 4. Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement. - Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 in) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: Maintenance. CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, (U) and (N), at each of proper positions. (Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.) 5. Install the selected replacement valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. Refer to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 7. Rotate the crankshaft a few turns by hand. 8. Confirm that the valve clearances are within specification. 9. After the engine has been run to full operating temperature, confirm that the valve clearances are within specification. Page 4636 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Page 1609 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 4136 2. Release microphone tabs (A) and remove microphone (1). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4755 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is Noisy Trunk / Liftgate Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is Noisy Classification: EL09-022 Reference: NTB09-087 Date: September 10, 2009 2004 - 2009 QUEST; POWER BACK DOOR WILL NOT OPEN/CLOSE AND MAKES NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) with power back door. IF YOU CONFIRM: While operating the power back door (lift gate), ^ The power motor will not open or close the door, and/or ^ There is a grinding and popping noise inside the rear trim panel. ACTION: Check for a loose or missing bolt on the back door power lift assembly. Replace if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Access the power back door motor assembly. ^ Remove left side finishers as needed. ^ Refer to sections BL and EI in the Service Manual as needed. Page 3722 Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Removal And Installation REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Condenser REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Procedures. 2. Remove the radiator. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator. 3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. 5. Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor. 6. Carefully release retaining clips located on top driver side of condenser and rotate the condenser out of its mounts as shown. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Locations. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 1094 Engine Oil Pressure: Capacity Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE OIL PUMP OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Classification: EL09-014 Reference: NTB09-036 Date: April 27, 2009 IPDM SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM SERVICE INFORMATION The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly. The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses. ^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays. ^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed. ^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable". CAUTION: NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM. Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle. Such incidents may include: ^ Headlights inoperative. ^ Radiator fan inoperative ^ Fog lamps inoperative ^ Wiper inoperative Page 73 Page 5229 8. Install cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 9. Install wiper arms. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System. 10. Recheck washer nozzle spray for correct spray pattern. Locations Collision Avoidance Module: Locations REAR SONAR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 591 SPECIAL TOOLS VDC/TCS/ABS Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations VDC/TCS/ABS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 922 Language/unit The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when selecting the "Language/Unit" key and pressing the ENTER button. Language: English or French Unit: US - mile, °F, MPG Metric - km, °C, L/1OO km You can select the language and unit using the joystick or pressing the ENTER button. The settings are automatically saved when you exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button. COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if So equipped) Note: For Navigation system control buttons, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner1s Manual. If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start. Reference symbols: ENTER button - This is a button on the control panel. By pressing this button you can select the item or perform the action. "Display" key - This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function. HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND ENTER BUTTON Use the joystick to choose an item on the display screen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right to highlight an item. Then press the ENTER button to Page 4277 Towing Information: Service and Repair Vehicle Recovery TOW TRUCK TOWING Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) Front Use the towing hook only, not other parts of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged. - Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only the towing hook. - The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle. - Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. Rear Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. - Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems. - Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle. - Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 1247 Page EM-5 Page 4519 1. Adjust the seat so you have access to the armrest bolt cover. 2. Remove the armrest bolt cover. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. 3. Remove bolt and armrest. 4. Push the insert out of the armrest as shown in Figure 3 and 4 using a suitable tool. Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Front Wiper And Washer System Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Front Wiper And Washer System FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Washer Nozzle INSPECTION CAUTION: Do not use needle pin to adjust washer nozzle. - If not satisfied with washer fluid spray coverage, confirm that the washer nozzle is installed correctly. - If the washer nozzle is installed correctly, and the washer fluid spray coverage is not satisfactory adjust washer nozzles. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT". ADJUSTMENT 1. Remove the front wiper arms. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System. 2. Measure the distance from rear edge of cowl to lowest point of washer fluid spray coverage (distance A). Determine recommended washer nozzle shim (refer to chart). NOTE: If distance A is in the middle range then no adjustment is required. Page 2791 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral position. 4. Remove range lever and install Tool. Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404) 5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base line on PNP switch body. 7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments. 10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705. Service and Repair Oil Cooler: Service and Repair OIL COOLER Removal and Installation WARNING: Be careful not to get burned, engine coolant and engine oil may be hot. CAUTION: - When removing oil cooler, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage. - Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. REMOVAL 1. Drain the engine oil. Refer to . 2. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. 4. Remove the splash shield. 5. Disconnect the coolant hoses from the oil cooler. CAUTION: Do not spill coolant on the drive belt. Locations Door Switch: Locations WARNING CHIME Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2763 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 1336 Page EM-6 Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3 minutes. Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing. Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it. Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and delete the memory by CONSULT-III. If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to Page 3272 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1958 Caution HOW TO USE THIS SECTION Caution - This section describes information peculiar to a vehicle, sheets for trouble diagnosis, and inspection procedures. - For trouble diagnosis procedure, refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis Work Flow/Trouble Diagnosis Procedure. Abbreviation List HOW TO USE THIS SECTION Abbreviation List Abbreviations in CAN communication signal chart, and the diagnosis sheet are as per the following list. Page 2446 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Automatic Drive Positioner Pedal Positioning Motor: Locations Automatic Drive Positioner AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3015 - Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 347 2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown. Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214) 3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free from defects and foreign materials. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the front of the vehicle. - Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. Page 957 Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 173 d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2). f. Proceed with step 6. Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) NOTE: Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating during the following procedures. 6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows: a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature. c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3. NOTE: ^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle does not need the procedure. ^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed. Page 3374 SPECIAL TOOLS Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Page 2762 DESCRIPTION Page 1956 Example: Data link connector branch line open circuit NOTE: When data link connector branch line is open, transmission and reception of CAN communication signals are not affected. Therefore, no symptoms occur. However, be sure to repair malfunctioning circuit. Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap SPARK PLUG Diagram Information and Instructions Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 2502 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Service and Repair Trim Panel: Service and Repair BODY SIDE TRIM Removal and Installation LEFT SIDE CAUTION: Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers. - When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar finisher. Page 1562 Page 5201 - Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident. CAUTION: Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. - Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. - Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. - The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Page 3920 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair For Side And Rollover Collision COLLISION DIAGNOSIS For Side and Rollover Collision Check the SRS components using the following table. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION 1. Replace the following components: Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated) - Diagnosis sensor unit - (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated) 2. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table. Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation). 3. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION 1. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table. If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced. 2. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION) Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Standard .............................................................................................................................................. ................. 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 185 psi)/300 rpm Minimum ........................................................ ........................................................................................................ 981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm Differential limit between cylinders .............................................................................................................................. 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm Page 4007 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 4922 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1578 Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 2545 2. Remove thrust washer from oil pump assembly. 3. Remove snap ring using suitable tool. 4. Remove 2nd coast brake flange, 2nd coast brake discs and 2nd coast brake plates. 5. Place Tool on return spring, and compress return spring with a press. Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) 6. Remove snap ring using suitable tool. Page 2992 Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection VACUUM LINES Inspection VISUAL INSPECTION Check for improper assembly, damage and deteriorate. CHECK VALVE INSPECTION Airtightness Inspection Use a suitable tool to check. Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) COMPONENT PARTS AND HARNESS CONNECTOR LOCATION Page 1976 2. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST): Check the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST) of units indicating "U1000" or "U1001" on SELF-DIAG RESULTS. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible error circuit. NOTE: For the details of each indication on CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR, refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis/CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor. a. Reception item of "ECM": "VDC/TCS/ABS", "3" is indicated in the "PAST". This means ECM could not receive the signal from ABS in the past. Draw a line between ECM and ABS (line 2-a in the figure below). b. Reception item of "M&A;": "VDC/TCS/ABS", "3" is indicated in the "PAST". This means M&A; could not receive the signal from ABS in the past. Draw a line between M&A; and ABS (line 2-b in the figure below). c. Reception item of "TCM": "VDC/TCS/ABS", "3" is indicated in the "PAST". This means TCM could not receive the signal from ABS in the past. Draw a line between TCM and ABS (line 2-c in the figure below). Page 148 Page 3234 Service and Repair Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair HYDRAULIC LINE Removal and Installation REMOVAL Refer to the illustration for hydraulic tube and hose routing. Remove any components necessary to access the lines. CAUTION: Be careful not to kink or bend the tubes. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Procedures/On-Vehicle Service and See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Procedures See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal and Installation for tightening torques. NOTE: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. - Ensure that hose is properly installed on tube to specification. CAUTION: Do not apply power steering fluid to surface between tube and hose. To install the eye joint on the power steering pump, align the projection of the eye joint into the notch of the power steering pump. Make sure the eye joint is properly installed on the power steering pump, then tighten the eye bolt to specification. - Connect the harness connector into the power steering pressure switch securely. Page 4813 - Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is heard. - After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with the electric fuel pump applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping. 2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections. Page 2064 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 2495 Attachment General Procedure Page 3793 Heater Core Case: Service and Repair Removal And Installation HEATER and COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation FRONT HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Removal 1. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Procedures. 2. Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect the front heater hoses from the front heater core. 5. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe from the front expansion valve. 6. Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat track. 7. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 8. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and the fuse block (J/B) electrical connectors. Refer to See: Locations/Harness Locations. 9. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body. 10. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the vehicle. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the front heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member. 11. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. NOTE: Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. - Recharge the A/C system. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Procedures. REAR HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Removal 1. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Procedures. 2. Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the rear RH interior trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. 5. Disconnect the rear A/C pipes from the rear expansion valve. 6. Disconnect the following electrical connectors: Rear blower motor - Rear blower motor resistor Page 2934 4. Add new brake fluid and bleed the air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5. Adjust the parking brake. Refer to See: Parking Brake System/Testing and Inspection. 6. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Burnishing Procedure. Disassembly and Assembly REAR DISC BRAKE Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque member and cylinder. 2. Remove the sliding pin and the sliding pin boot from the torque member. 3. Remove the retaining ring from the cylinder body using a screwdriver or suitable tool, as shown. 4. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. WARNING: Do not place your finger in front of piston. 5. Remove piston seals from cylinder body using a screwdriver or suitable tool, as shown. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. CALIPER INSPECTION Precaution For Working With HFC-134a (R-134a) Refrigerant: Service Precautions Precaution For Working With HFC-134a (R-134a) PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) WARNING: CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants are mixed compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Contaminated Refrigerant. To determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. Use only specified oil for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If oil other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur. The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) oil rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following handling precautions must be observed: - When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. - When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the entry of moisture into system. - Only use the specified oil from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of oil. Without proper sealing, oil will become moisture saturated and should not be used. - Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment] or J2209 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment]. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and oil manufacturers. - Do not allow refrigerant oil to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result. Page 1265 9. Disconnect engine coolant reservoir hose from the radiator and remove engine coolant reservoir. 10. Remove cooling fan assembly. 11. Disconnect lower radiator hose from engine. 12. Disconnect the power steering fluid reservoir tank hose from the power steering pump and fluid cooler and remove the power steering fluid reservoir tank. 13. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. 14. Remove the fender protector side cover RH. 15. Remove the drive belt. 16. Remove the power steering pump. 17. Remove the lower oil pan. Loosen the lower oil pan bolts using power tool in order as shown. a. Cut the sealant using Tool and remove the lower oil pan. Tool number : (J-37228) CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the mating surface. - Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. b. Slide the Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the lower oil pan. 18. Remove upper oil pan bolts in reverse order as shown. 19. Remove the generator. 20. Remove the A/C compressor bolts and position the A/C compressor aside. 21. Remove the generator bracket. 22. Support the engine with suitable jack and remove the RH engine, mount and bracket. 23. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Remove access plate and install Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Page 1316 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered "Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Page 2861 2. Inspect the right side (inboard side) of the brake pedal pivot pin (see Figure 2). ^ See Figure 3 below for photos of OK and NG, conditions. Procedures Battery: Procedures How to Handle Battery BATTERY How to Handle Battery CAUTION: If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt booster battery. - After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good contact. - Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity. METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging a battery. The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept clean and dry. - The terminal connections should be clean and tight. - At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level. This also applies to batteries designated as "low maintenance" and "maintenance-free". - When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of time, disconnect the negative battery terminal. - Check the charge condition of the battery. Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep a close check on charge condition to prevent over-discharge. CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL WARNING: Do not allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, do not touch or rub your Page 3672 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 1303 5. Install the internal chain guide. - If removed, reinstall slack guide. CAUTION: Do not overtighten slack guide bolts. It is normal for a gap to exist under the bolt seats when bolts are tightened to specification. - Remove stopper pin from timing chain tensioner (primary). 6. Make sure again that the matching marks on the sprockets and the timing chain have not slipped out of alignment. 7. Tighten camshaft sprocket bolts to specification with all timing chains installed and Ring Gear Stopper Tool holding the crankshaft. Tool number : (J-50288) 8. Install the front timing chain case. Inspection After Installation - Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system. - After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items: Page 1962 - Indication of the combination meter is important to detect the root cause because it is the most obvious to the customer, and it performs CAN communication with many units. INSPECTION OF VEHICLE CONDITION Check whether or not "U1000" or "U1001" is indicated on "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" by CONSULT-III. NOTE: Root cause cannot be detected using the procedure in this section if "U1000" or "U1001" is not indicated. Check whether the symptom is reproduced or not. NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF or disconnect the battery cable while reproducing the error. The error may temporarily correct itself, making it difficult to determine the root cause. - The procedures for present errors differ from the procedures for past errors. Refer to "DETECT THE ROOT CAUSE". CHECK OF CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE CAN SYSTEM TYPE SPECIFICATION CHART) Determine CAN system type based on vehicle equipment. Then choose the correct diagnosis sheet. NOTE: There are two styles for CAN system type specification charts. Depending on the number of available system types, either style A or style B may be used. CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style A) NOTE: CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information shown in the chart. Page 2559 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 3801 Page 2142 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 3466 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair STEERING WHEEL Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 3. Remove the steering wheel center nut. 4. Remove the steering wheel using Tools. CAUTION: Do not tap or bump the steering wheel to remove. Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be rotated out of position. - Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If damaged, replace the steering wheel. - Disconnect the horn connector. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.5 revolutions from the right end position and ending with the knob at the top. - If equipped with VDC, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning for steering angle sensor adjustment. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. CAUTION: The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct position. - With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. Page 2748 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove bolt, and turbine revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt. Page 142 Component Tests and General Diagnostics Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics COMBINATION SWITCH Combination Switch Inspection 1.SYSTEM CHECK 1. Referring to table below, check to which system the malfunctioning switch belongs. - GO TO 2. 2.SYSTEM CHECK With CONSULT-III 1. Connect CONSULT-III, and select "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR". 3. Select "START" and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Without CONSULT-III Operate combination switch and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT WIPER INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, operate normally. Check results Other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.-Replace lighting switch or wiper switch. Other switches in malfunctioning system do not operate normally. - GO TO 3. 3.HARNESS INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors. 3. Check for continuity between BCM harness connector of the suspect system and the corresponding combination switch connector terminals. 4. Check for continuity between each terminal of BCM harness connector in suspect malfunctioning system and ground. Page 1497 7. Remove the radiator upper clips by pulling the tabs outside to release the lock, as shown. CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not pull tabs excessively. 8. Disconnect fan electrical connectors. 9. Remove the radiator fan assembly. CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch A/C condenser and radiator core when removing. 10. If necessary, remove the radiator fan assembly from the radiator. Refer to See: Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair. 11. If necessary, remove the rubber mounting from the radiator. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. Apply pressure using suitable tool and Tool. Tool number : EG17650301 (J-33984-A) WARNING: To prevent the risk of the hose coming undone while under pressure, securely fasten it down with a hose clamp. CAUTION: Attach a hose to the A/T fluid cooler as well. 2. Place radiator in water filled tank and check for leakage. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following: Fill the radiator with coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. Installation of Radiator Upper Clip 1. Install the mounting rubber on mounting pin of radiator core. Page 216 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification system sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Seat Cushion/Disassembly and Assembly to remove the seat, and See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Seat Cushion to replace the seat cushion assembly. Page 1862 Page 2640 Disclaimer Page 2816 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque specifications when connecting the brake tubes. - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). Locations Auxiliary Water Pump Relay: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Crankshaft Sprocket Page 787 2. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 3. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to See: Component. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Component. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. MTC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Procedures. 2. Remove the engine under cover. 3. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to See: Locations. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Locations. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. ATC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe REMOVAL 1. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. 2. Remove the windshield washer fluid bottle filler neck. 3. Reposition the coolant reservoir tank aside. 4. Reposition the power steering fluid reservoir aside. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 6. Remove the high-pressure pipe. Refer to See: Component. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Component. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. MTC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe REMOVAL 1. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. 2. Remove the windshield washer fluid bottle filler neck. Page 335 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair MTC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Procedures. 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Hose/Line HVAC/Locations. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. Page 2260 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3266 HARNESS CONNECTOR (LEVER LOCKING TYPE) Lever locking type harness connectors are used on certain control units and control modules such as ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), etc. - Lever locking type harness connectors are also used on super multiple junction (SMJ) connectors. - Always confirm the lever is fully locked in place by moving the lever as far as it will go to ensure full connection. CAUTION: Always confirm the lever is fully released (loosened) before attempting to disconnect or connect these connectors to avoid damage to the connector housing or terminals. Page 495 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 467 4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. 9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. - Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap SPARK PLUG Page 144 Page 1594 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4986 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Page 1558 Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp. 7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair. Page 5030 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Standard .............................................................................................................................................. ................. 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 185 psi)/300 rpm Minimum ........................................................ ........................................................................................................ 981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm Differential limit between cylinders .............................................................................................................................. 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 2210 PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE 1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. 2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. Component Locations Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1769 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Fuel Pressure Check FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because V42 models never have fuel return system. Method A CAUTION: The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other purposes. - Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge. - Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector). - To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check. - Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it. - Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. 3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover. Page 320 2. Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim. 3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH. 4. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 5. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. MTC INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation Intake Sensor Diagrams Windshield Washer Hose: Diagrams FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Washer Tube Layout Page 1243 Page EM-1 Page 1684 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1729 Page 1377 6. Install front timing chain case. a. Install lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top surface of oil pan (upper). CAUTION: Be careful that oil pan gasket is in place. b. While pressing front timing chain case from its front and top as shown, hammer dowel pin until the outer end becomes flush with surface using suitable tool. - Install dowel pin on the rear timing chain case into dowel pin hole in front timing chain case. 7. Loosely install the front timing chain case bolts. Bolt position Bolt diameter 1, 2 : 8 mm (0.31 in) 3 - 22 : 6 mm (0.24 in) 8. Tighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. - Retighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. Bolt position Tightening specification 1, 2 : 28.5 N-m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb) 3 - 22 : 12.8 N-m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb) Locations Auxiliary Water Pump Relay: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 171 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 5106 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 1917 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 540 Page 175 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. VDC/TCS/ABS Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Locations VDC/TCS/ABS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2080 34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the "Duplication Test" icon. 35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase. 36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18). 37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased. ^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs. ^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed. Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below. 38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF. 39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch (M/T) pedal; Page 3158 Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse And Fusible Link Box FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX Terminal Arrangement Page 2507 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 1884 Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3089 Alternator: Service and Repair CHARGING SYSTEM Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Refer to See: Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Remove the radiator. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the front wheel and tire (RH). Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 4. Remove fender protector (RH). Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the drive belt. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Testing and Inspection See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Adjustments. 6. Remove the idler pulley. 7. Remove the generator adjustable top mount, using power tools. 8. Remove the generator lower bolt and nut, using power tools. 9. Disconnect the generator harness connectors. 10. Remove the generator. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Install the generator and check tension of drive belt. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Adjustments. CAUTION: Be sure to tighten B terminal nut carefully. B terminal nut torque : 11 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb) Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb Page 4886 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 2232 - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 4978 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 3153 Fuse: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Fuse - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse. - Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. - Do not partially install fuse, always insert it into fuse holder properly. - Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Page 3901 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair MTC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Procedures. 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Locations. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. Page 3046 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console lower cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts. CAUTION: Do not use power tools to remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. - Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts to specification. CAUTION: Do not use power tools to install the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. - Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Page 3230 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 863 Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection ENGINE OIL Inspection OIL LEVEL Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow five minutes before checking. - Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as indicated on the dipstick. - If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as necessary. OIL APPEARANCE Check engine oil for white milky or excessive contamination. - If engine oil becomes milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair or replace damaged parts. OIL LEAKAGE Check for oil leakage around the following areas: Upper and lower oil pan - Oil pan drain plug - Oil pressure switch - Oil filter - Oil cooler - Water pump cover - Timing chain tensioner cover - Intake valve timing (IVT) control cover and intake valve timing (IVT) control solenoid valve - Front cover - Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head - Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover - Mating surface between the front timing chain case and rear timing chain case - Crankshaft oil seal (front and rear) OIL PRESSURE CHECK WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. - Put the selector lever in the Park "P" position. 1. Check the oil level. 2. Disconnect the oil pressure switch harness connector. 3. Remove the oil pressure switch. CAUTION: Do not drop or shock oil pressure switch. Page 1696 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater Page 455 Page 3106 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 1398 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2673 Shaft Replace shaft if there is any bending, cracking, or other damage. Joint Sub-assembly Make sure there is no rough rotation or unusual axial looseness. - Make sure there is no foreign material inside joint sub-assembly. - Check joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks or fractures. CAUTION: If there are any irregular conditions of joint sub-assembly components, replace the entire joint subassembly. Sliding Joint Housing and Spider Assembly If roller surface of spider assembly has scratches or wear, replace housing and spider assembly. NOTE: Housing and spider assembly are components which are used as a set. Support Bearing Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. Damper Check damper for cracks or wear. Install damper with new damper bands. ASSEMBLY Transaxle Side 1. Cover serrated part of shaft with tape. Install new boot and boot band onto shaft. Be careful not to damage boot. CAUTION: Discard old boot and boot band; replace with new ones. 2. Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft. 3. Install spider assembly securely, making sure the matching marks which were made during disassembly are properly aligned. 4. Install new snap ring using a suitable tool. 5. Pack drive shaft with specified amount of grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent). Grease amount : 134 - 144 g (4.73 - 5.08 oz) 6. Install new stopper ring to slide joint assembly. 7. After installation, pull shaft to check engagement between slide joint assembly and stopper ring. Page 4079 Page 2886 WARNING: Do not damage the brake tube. CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only) must be in the forward most position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). - Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). - Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water. REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 2. Remove the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch from the brake pedal assembly by turning 45° degrees. 3. If equipped with the adjustable pedal, disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. 4. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from the brake booster clevis. 5. Remove nuts and the brake pedal assembly. Support the brake booster and master cylinder at the bulkhead so as not to damage the brake tubes. CAUTION: Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the forward most position (closest to the floor). This is to Page 4633 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Front Wiper And Washer System Windshield Washer Motor: Locations Front Wiper And Washer System FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3207 Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Page 968 Wheels: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Road Wheel Page 1805 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CYLINDER HEAD On-Vehicle Service CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. Release fuel pressure and leave the fuel pump electrically disconnected. Refer to See: Fuel Pressure/Testing and Inspection. 4. Remove all six spark plugs. Refer to See: Spark Plug/Service and Repair. 5. Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. 6. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep the electric throttle control actuator butterfly-valve wide open to maximize air intake flow. 7. Crank the engine and record the highest gauge indication. 8. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder (steps 5 - 7). NOTE: Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. 9. If compression in one or more cylinders is low: a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through the spark plug holes. b. Retest compression (steps 5 - 8). - If adding oil helps raise compression pressure, then the piston rings may be worn or damaged. If so, replace piston rings after checking piston. - If the pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or is seating improperly. Inspect and repair the valve and/or valve seat. Refer to See: Maintenance. If the valve and/or valve seat is damaged excessively, replace as necessary. - If compression stays low in two or more cylinders that are next to each other: - The cylinder head gasket may be leaking. - Both cylinders may have valve component damage. Inspect and repair as necessary. 10. After inspection is complete, install removed components. 11. Start engine and confirm that engine runs smoothly. 12. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis Introduction. Page 2936 4. Install the piston boot with a new retaining ring. CAUTION: Make sure the boot is firmly in the cylinder body groove. - Do not reuse the retaining ring. 5. Apply rubber grease and attach the sliding pin and sliding pin boot to the torque member. 6. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease, or equivalent, refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance to the rear of the pad and to both sides of the shim, and attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad, and the outer shim and outer shim cover to the outer pad. 7. Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member. CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than the torque member, as shown. 8. After assembling shims and shim covers to pad, install it to the torque member. 9. Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolts to specification. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View. DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Visual Inspection Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, secure disc rotor to the wheel hub. (2 or more positions) 2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair OIL SEAL Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal REMOVAL 1. Remove oil pan (upper). Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the transaxle. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly/Removal. 3. Remove drive plate. 4. Remove rear oil seal retainer using Tool. Tool Number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage mating surface. - If rear oil retainer is removed, replace it with a new one INSTALLATION 1. Remove old liquid gasket material from mating surface of cylinder block and oil pan using a suitable scraper. 2. Apply liquid gasket to the new rear oil seal retainer using suitable tool. Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants. - Assembly should be completed within 5 minutes after coating. 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed correctly during re-assembly. - Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drivetrain components. Page 1992 ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Branch Line Circuit TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Branch Line Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 2. Check the resistance between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector terminals. - Models with TCS Page 2880 Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Brake Pedal Page 862 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ............. API or ILSAC Certified Energy Conserving Viscosity ............................................................ ................................................................................................................................................. SAE 5W-30 ATC Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations ATC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 1883 Page 1302 a. Install the crankshaft sprocket. - Make sure the mating marks on the crankshaft sprocket face front of engine. 4. Install the timing chain (primary). - Water pump (G). - Install timing chain (primary) so the mating mark (punched) (B) on camshaft sprocket (C) is aligned with the copper link (A) on the timing chain, while the mating mark (notched) (E) on the crankshaft sprocket (D) is aligned with the yellow one (F) on the timing chain, as shown. - When it is difficult to align mating marks of the timing chain (primary) with each sprocket, gradually turn the camshaft to align it with the mating marks. - During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating mark alignments of the secondary timing chains. Locations Collision Avoidance Sensor: Locations REAR SONAR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3076 Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Electronic Component Damage Prevention Classification: EL09-011 Reference: NTB09-030 Date: April 6, 2009 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE CAN RESULT FROM IMPROPER BATTERY CONNECTION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ The vehicle 12 volt battery is an important part of the vehicle electrical system and is required to stay connected when the engine is running. ^ To prevent damage to vehicle electronic components follow the instructions / cautions below. IMPORTANT: Damage to electronic components (ECM, TCM, BCM, etc.) due to improper battery connection will not be covered under warranty. CAUTION: ^ Make sure the ignition is OFF during battery service and replacement. ^ Do not disconnect or connect any battery cables while the ignition switch is turned ON. ^ When disconnecting a battery, always disconnect the negative cable first. ^ When connecting a battery, always connect the positive cable first. ^ Do not leave a battery cable loose. Tighten battery cables immediately after attachment. ^ If a battery cable is loose, do not operate any electrical loads. (This includes turning the ignition ON, starting the engine, operating accessories such as the A/C system, power seats, interior lights, exterior lights etc.). ^ When "jump starting" or "boosting" a battery - be careful. Don't accidentally reverse the polarity of the cables. Disclaimer Revolution Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Revolution Sensor Replacement ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. Remove intake air duct. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt. Locations Exterior View Display Monitor: Locations REAR VIEW MONITOR Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3527 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Set the shock absorber (strut) in a vise, then loosen (without removing) the piston rod lock nut as shown. CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time. 2. Compress the spring using commercial service tool until the shock absorber (strut) mounting insulator can be turned by hand. WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are firmly hooked on the spring. The spring compressors must be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the spring. 3. Remove the piston rod lock nut. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Shock Absorber Assembly Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. - Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions. - Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and replace if necessary. Thrust Bearing Check thrust bearing parts for abnormal noise or excessive rattle in axial direction and replace if necessary. Coil Spring Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. - Check the free spring height. Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Page 3750 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Intake Sensor ATC INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation Intake Sensor REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. Page 4420 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 1626 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Locations Power Door Lock Switch: Locations POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 912 Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse And Fusible Link Box FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX Terminal Arrangement Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Check Valve Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Specifications Check Valve SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Check Valve Page 440 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1690 3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees. 4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees. ^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily. 6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the sensor will not unscrew any further. 7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed. Page 1337 Page EM-7 Page 2805 Page 2247 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2451 Page 1455 3. Install the water pump. CAUTION: Do not allow cylinder block to interfere with the O-rings when installing the water pump. Check that timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged. - Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly. 4. Remove dust and foreign material completely from back side of chain tensioner and from installation area of rear timing chain case. 5. Turn the crankshaft pulley approximately 20° clockwise so that the timing chain on the timing chain tensioner side is loose. NOTE: When installing the timing chain tensioner, engine oil should be applied to the oil hole and tensioner. 6. Install the timing chain tensioner. 7. Remove the stopper pin. 8. Install chain tensioner and water pump cover. a. Before installing, remove all traces of sealant from mating surface of water pump cover and chain tensioner cover using a scraper. Also remove traces of sealant from the mating surface of the front cover. Page 3695 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Removal And Installation VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Removal and Installation VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT) Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel RH and glove box. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel. 3. Disconnect the variable blower control (front) electrical connector. 4. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (front). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR) Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the variable blower control (rear) electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (rear). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3792 Page 695 Valve Clearance: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT Valve Clearance CHECKING Perform inspection as follows after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve related parts, or if there is unusual engine conditions regarding valve clearance. NOTE: Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running. 1. Remove the intake manifold collectors. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Collector. 2. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation LH (LH) and See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation RH (RH). 3. Remove the rocker covers. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair. 4. Set No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. Align pointer (A) with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley. - Check that the valve lifters on No.1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No.4 are tight. If not, turn the crankshaft one full revolution (360°) and align as shown. - RH cylinder head (1) - White Arrow Indicates Engine front 5. Check only the valves as shown. Page 3064 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 3280 Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Removal and Installation Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel tank. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair. Page 1023 Camshaft Journal Clearance Outer Diameter of Camshaft Journal Measure outer diameter of camshaft journal as shown. Inner Diameter of Camshaft Bracket 1. Tighten camshaft bracket bolts to specified torque. 2. Using inside micrometer, measure inner diameter (A) of camshaft bearing. Calculation of Camshaft Journal to Bracket Clearance (Journal clearance) = (inner diameter of camshaft bracket) - (outer diameter of camshaft journal) - When out of the specified range, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head. NOTICE: Inner diameter of camshaft bracket is manufactured together with cylinder head. Replace the whole cylinder head assembly. Camshaft End Play 1. Install the camshaft in the cylinder head. Refer to "Removal and Installation". Page 2079 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 3670 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Removal and Installation Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR LOCK Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door window regulator assembly. Refer to See: Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front door window rear glass run. 3. Remove the grommet, and remove door key cylinder assembly (driver side) or outside handle escutcheon (passenger side) bolts (TORX T30) from grommet hole. 4. While pulling the outside handle (1), remove door key cylinder assembly or escutcheon (2). 5. Separate the key cylinder rod from the door key cylinder assembly (if equipped). 6. While pulling outside handle (2), slide toward rear of vehicle to remove (1). 7. Remove the front and rear gaskets. Page 568 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral position. 4. Remove range lever and install Tool. Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404) 5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base line on PNP switch body. 7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments. 10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705. Page 4472 ^ Bolt A (shown in Figure 1 above) will need to be removed. NOTE: You may not need to completely remove the lower finisher. Unclipping the top and pulling it back may give you enough access. 2. Check bolt "B" (see Figure 1). ^ If bolt B is loose or missing, replace it with a new one. ^ New bolt is listed in the parts information. ^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of the new bolt and torque bolt to 5.7 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 51 in-lb) NOTE: If bolt B is missing, make sure to find the missing bolt and remove it from the vehicle. The missing bolt, if left loose in the passenger compartment, could cause a rattle. 4. Reassemble all parts in reverse order. ^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of bolt A and torque bolt to 15.2 N·m (1.6 kg-m, 11 ft-lb). 5. Make sure the power back door motor works correctly with no abnormal noise. ^ Cycle the power back door (open and close) 5 times. Description and Operation Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 1292 6. Install front timing chain case. a. Install lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top surface of oil pan (upper). CAUTION: Be careful that oil pan gasket is in place. b. While pressing front timing chain case from its front and top as shown, hammer dowel pin until the outer end becomes flush with surface using suitable tool. - Install dowel pin on the rear timing chain case into dowel pin hole in front timing chain case. 7. Loosely install the front timing chain case bolts. Bolt position Bolt diameter 1, 2 : 8 mm (0.31 in) 3 - 22 : 6 mm (0.24 in) 8. Tighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. - Retighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. Bolt position Tightening specification 1, 2 : 28.5 N-m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb) 3 - 22 : 12.8 N-m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb) General Specification Steering Shaft: Specifications General Specification SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specification Page 1999 NOTE: CAN data of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is not used by usual service work, thus it is omitted. CAN System (Type 1) TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CAN System (Type 1) DIAGNOSIS SHEET Page 3560 Always replace the seal after every disassembly. 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb) 4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 3180 Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Page 57 Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal Assembly Brake Pedal Assy: Recalls Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal Assembly VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2008-2010 Nissan/Armada 2008-2010 Nissan/Quest 2008-2009 Nissan/Titan 2008-2010 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc. MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V072000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Pedals and Linkages Potential Number of Units Affected: 179383 SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2008-2010 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56, and model year 2008-2009 Nissan Quest vehicles. The brake pedal pivot pin end was not spin-formed to specification during the manufacturing process of the brake pedal assembly. The pivot pin could slide and cause the brake pedal to partially disengage from the brake pedal bracket. CONSEQUENCE: The driver will experience unusual and noticeable looseness in the pedal and a reduction in braking force increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect to see if the pivot pin had been formed properly and will replace the brake pedal assembly if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261. NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Page 1899 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 3558 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 4428 Page 1381 Tool number : (J-50288) - If the original timing chain markings are not legible, use paint or equivalent to mark the timing chains to the sprockets. 4. If removing the timing chains (secondary), loosen camshaft sprocket bolts. 5. Compress the timing chain tensioner (primary). a. Pull lever down and release plunger stopper tab. Plunger stopper tab can be pushed up to release (coaxial structure with lever). b. Insert stopper pin into timing chain tensioner (primary) body hole to hold lever, and keep the stopper tab released. c. Depress the plunger into the tensioner body by pressing the slack guide. d. Keep the slack guide pressed and lock the plunger in by pushing the stopper pin through the lever and into the chain tensioner body hole. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. 6. Remove the internal chain guide. - Slack guide does not need to be removed. 7. Remove timing chain (primary). CAUTION: Page 4534 3. Using needle nose pliers, install the anti-rattle spring as shown in Figure 3. 4. Check to make sure both ends of the anti-rattle spring are correctly installed and fully seated as shown in Figure 4. 5. Check to make sure the seat is operating properly and the anti-rattle spring stays in place. Page 3133 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 3081 eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. - Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool. - Add distilled water up to the MAX level. Sulfation A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended for a long time and the specific gravity will become less than 1.100. This may result in sulfation on the cell plates. To determine if a battery has been sulfated, note its voltage and current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of charging sulfated batteries. A sulfated battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, followed by a battery capacity test. SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK 1. Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level. 2. Use the following chart to correct your hydrometer reading according to electrolyte temperature. Hydrometer Temperature Correction Page 5126 OK or NG OK - GO TO 4. NG - Replace fuse block (J/B). 4.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) and door mirror LH or RH. 3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) connector M3 terminal 5N and door mirror connector D13 (LH) or D113 (RH) terminal 6. 5N - 6 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - GO TO 5. NG - Repair or replace harness. 5.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between each door mirror connector D13 (LH) or D113 (RH) terminal 5 and ground. 5 - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - GO TO 6. NG - Repair or replace harness. 6.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER Page 1288 Tool number : (J-50288) CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when setting the Tool. b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt so that there is a 10 mm (0.39 in) gap between bolt and crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Keep loosened crankshaft pulley bolt in place to protect the crankshaft pulley from dropping. c. Position a suitable tool at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to remove crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not use a puller claw on the outside edge of the crankshaft pulley. 24. Disconnect the oil pressure switch harness connector. 25. Disconnect valve timing control harness connector. 26. Remove the Bank 1 (RH) (A) and Bank 2 (LH) (B) IVT control valve covers. - Loosen the IVT control valve cover bolts in the reverse order as shown. CAUTION: The shaft in the IVT control valve cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the IVT control valve cover by pulling straight out until the IVT control valve cover disengages from the camshaft sprocket. - A: Bank 1 (Conventional RH bank) - B: Bank 2 (Conventional LH bank) - C: Dowel pin hole 27. Remove the A/C idler pulley and bracket and the drive belt auto-tensioner. 28. If necessary, remove the idler pulley and water pump cover. Page 4923 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Page 5029 Page 2147 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater Revolution Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Revolution Sensor Replacement ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. Remove intake air duct. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt. Page 3059 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Service and Repair Fuel Rail: Service and Repair FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE Removal and Installation CAUTION: Apply new engine oil when installing the parts as specified to do so. - Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown. REMOVAL 1. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to See: Fuel Pressure/Testing and Inspection. 2. Remove the intake manifold collector (upper and lower). Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Collector. 3. Disconnect the fuel quick connector on the engine side. Using Tool perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector. Tool number : - (J-45488) Page 4814 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm assembly (5). Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Locations Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2115 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Specifications Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Injector Page 4315 INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2370 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Removal And Installation RH IGNITION COIL Removal and Installation RH REMOVAL 1. Remove the intake manifold collector. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Collector. 2. Disconnect ignition coil connector. 3. Remove the ignition coil. CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3205 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF. Page 3579 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 4500 Brake Control/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the brake caliper assemblies from the rear wheel hub and spindle assemblies without disconnecting the brake lines, using power tool. Position the brake caliper assemblies aside using suitable wire. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear. - Leave the brake line connected to the brake caliper. - Do not to depress the brake pedal, or the piston will pop out. - Do not pull or twist the brake hose. 4. Remove the shock absorber upper end nuts using power tool. 5. Disconnect the LH and RH ABS sensor harness connectors, and disconnect the ABS sensor harness from the rear suspension member. 6. Remove the LH and RH member stay bolts using power tool. 7. Use a support jack or suitable tool, to support the rear suspension member. 8. Remove the rear suspension member nuts using power tool. Then lower the rear suspension member assembly using the support jack. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Service and Repair Radiator: Service and Repair RADIATOR Removal and Installation WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and turning the cap all the way. REMOVAL 1. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. 2. Partially drain the A/T fluid. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Procedures/Changing A/T Fluid. 3. Remove fresh air duct. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses. 5. Disconnect the A/T fluid cooler hoses. NOTE: Plug hoses to avoid leakage of A/T fluid. 6. Disconnect the engine coolant reservoir tank hose. Page 2720 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection A/T INDICATOR A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. Select "METER/M&A;" on CONSULT-III. 2. Using "DATA MONITOR", confirm each indication while operating the shift lever. NOTE: If more than one input is ON, A/T indicator will enter fail-safe function and the display will turn off. OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - GO TO 2. 2.CHECK TCM Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures. OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC. Page 3612 2. Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the mode door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Component AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR Component Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Specifications Electronic Throttle Actuator: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Throttle Control Motor Page 145 Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Page 2065 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Page 4324 8. Remove the TORX bolts (T30) and the door lock assembly. Door lock assembly bolts : 5.3 Nm (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb) 9. Remove the TORX bolt (T30) from the outside handle bracket. 10. While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide it toward the rear of the vehicle to remove it and the door lock assembly. 11. Disconnect the door lock actuator electrical connector. 12. Separate the outside handle cable connection from the outside handle bracket. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click is felt. Page 2449 Page 2912 very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Rear Brake Burnishing Procedure. Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2561 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4171 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 955 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Page 3627 Defroster Nozzle DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation DEFROSTER NOZZLE NOTE: Page 2929 5. Install wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Service and Repair/Front Brake Burnishing Procedure. Disassembly and Assembly FRONT DISC BRAKE Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly NOTE: Do not remove torque member, pads, shims, shim covers or pad retainers, when disassembling or assembling cylinder body. DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove caliper assembly. Refer to See: . 2. Remove cylinder body from torque member, then sliding pin boots from torque member. 3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. WARNING: Do not get your fingers caught in the piston. 4. Remove the piston seal from the cylinder body using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Cylinder Body CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. - Check for corrosion, wear, or damage to the cylinder inner wall, and replace the caliper if there are any non-standard conditions. - Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface with a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston Locations Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2711 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. In-Vehicle Sensor Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Sensor IN-VEHICLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel. 2. Remove the two screws and remove the in-vehicle sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 4645 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 4080 Page 656 - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Electrical Units Location Cellular Phone: Locations Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 4115 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 621 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Page 2972 CAUTION: Make sure snap ring is fully inserted in the snap ring groove. - Do not reuse snap ring. 5. Place the side flange of cylinder body with chamfering around the pin insertion hole facing up, and firmly set master cylinder assembly in a vise. CAUTION: When setting the master cylinder assembly with the vise, be sure not to over-tighten. - When securing with a vise, use copper plates or cloth to protect the flange. 6. Using a pin punch [commercial service tool: diameter approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)], attach the reservoir tank mounting pin so that the attachment side and the opposite side are identical. CAUTION: Do not reuse reservoir tank grommets and pin. 7. If necessary, install brake fluid level switch. Page 1972 i. Reception item of "IPDM-E": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between IPDM-E and its receiving units. Do not draw any line. 3. Based on information received from "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR", place a check mark on the known good CAN communication line between ECM and IPDM-E. a. Through the previous procedure, the circuit between ADP splice and TCM has the most amount of lines (shade 3-a in the figure below). b. Place a check mark on the known good lines to establish the error circuit. Reception item of "IPDM-E": On "ECM", "OK" is indicated. IPDM-E communicates normally with ECM. Put a check mark on the normal circuit between ECM and IPDM-E (check mark 3-b in the figure below). Page 1446 9. Turn the crankshaft 240° and align as above. 10. Set No.5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 11. Check only those valves as shown. 12. If all valve clearances are within specification, installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. If the valve clearances are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances. VALVE ADJUSTING CAUTION: Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. NOTE: Perform adjustment by selecting the correct head thickness of the valve lifter (adjusting shims are not used). - The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use specifications for hot engine condition to confirm valve clearances. Page 1272 - C: Dowel pin hole IVT control valve cover bolts : 11.3 N-m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb) 12. Apply liquid gasket and install the water pump cover, if removed. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. 13. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps. - Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. - Apply a paint mark for the second step of angle tightening. Step 1 : 44 N-m (4.5 kg-m, 32 ft-lb) Step 2 : 84° - 90° degrees clockwise 14. Remove the Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Tool number : (J-50288) CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when removing the Tool. 15. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns smoothly. 16. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation - Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system. - After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items: TIMING CHAIN Page 4862 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection A/T INDICATOR A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. Select "METER/M&A;" on CONSULT-III. 2. Using "DATA MONITOR", confirm each indication while operating the shift lever. NOTE: If more than one input is ON, A/T indicator will enter fail-safe function and the display will turn off. OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - GO TO 2. 2.CHECK TCM Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures. OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC. Page 1223 Page EM-6 Page 1623 Engine Control Module: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 227 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 1291 CAUTION: Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil seal. NOTE: Make sure the garter spring is in position and seal lip is not inverted. 3. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case. CAUTION: Use new O-rings for installation. 4. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to front timing chain case as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. - Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant. - 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia. 5. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to top surface of oil pan (upper) as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Page 3096 DESCRIPTION Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3570 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Locations Remote Switch: Locations REAR VIEW MONITOR Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3354 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Component Locations Entertainment Systems: Component Locations DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Navigation System Navigation Module: Locations Navigation System NAVIGATION SYSTEM Component Parts Location Page 1526 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion - Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of the exhaust manifold mating surfaces. Limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Arrow Indicates : Engine front - Install the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown. CAUTION: Before installing a heated oxygen sensor or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean the exhaust manifold threads using Tool, and apply anti-seize lubricant. - Do not over-tighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor or heated oxygen sensors. Doing so may cause damage. Page 2447 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 629 > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Page 401 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. Page 3616 Intake Door Motor (Driver) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Intake Door Motor (Passenger) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 3505 Stabilizer Bar: Service and Repair Stabilizer Bar STABILIZER BAR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the stabilizer bar ends from the connecting rods using power tool. 2. Remove the stabilizer bar clamps using power tool, and remove the stabilizer bar bushings. 3. Remove the stabilizer bar. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. Install the stabilizer bar bushing and clamp so they are positioned inside of the crimp ring on the stabilizer bar. Page 1896 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 2564 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Front Seat Belt Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front Seat Belt SEAT BELTS Front Seat Belt COMPONENTS REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR Removal CAUTION: Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three minutes. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2. Remove the center pillar upper/lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 3. Separate the seat belt guide from the center pillar. 4. Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolts and assembly. Page 664 The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to See: See: . 1. Disconnect the tube clamp at the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube at the mass air flow sensor. 2. Separate the mass air flow sensor from the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. 3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and remove the air cleaner case (upper). 4. Remove the air cleaner filter. 5. Install a new air cleaner filter. 6. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Page 3165 Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation HARNESS CONNECTOR Description HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) - The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. - The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to the description of the slide-locking type connector. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. - The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. - The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. - Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Page 4335 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SLIDING DOOR Removal 1. Remove sliding door garnish. 2. Remove sliding door finisher assembly. 3. Remove sliding door handle screw covers and screws. 4. Remove sliding door handle assembly. Disconnect door lock cable and door handle cable. Refer to See: Locks/Door Locks/Service and Repair. 5. Remove lower seal. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2910 WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed air. CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, never depress the brake pedal because the piston will pop out. - It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of the cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so that brake hose is not under tension. - Do not damage piston boot. - If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one. - Always replace shims and shim covers as a set when replacing brake pads. - Keep the rotor clean of brake fluid. - Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Rear Brake Burnishing Procedure. Removal And Installation REAR DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Brake Pad WARNING: Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize a hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: Page 1963 CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style B) NOTE: CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information shown in the chart. Removal and Installation Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel tank. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair. Page 2810 Page 4979 Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement. Page 3700 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair MTC IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. The rear heater and cooling unit assembly only draws in air from the passenger compartment to recirculate into the passenger compartment, so the rear heater and cooling unit assembly is not equipped with in-cabin microfilters. REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the three screws and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. 4. Install the in-cabin microfilters, replacing the two in-cabin microfilters with new filters, into the front heater and cooling unit assembly. CAUTION: When installing the two new in-cabin microfilters make sure that the filters are facing in the direction indicated by the direction arrow for the air flow. The direction arrow is printed on the side of the in-cabin microfilters. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Install the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Page 5077 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 2506 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 4839 2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown. Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214) 3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free from defects and foreign materials. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the front of the vehicle. - Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. Revolution Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Revolution Sensor Replacement ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. Remove intake air duct. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt. Page 1754 Page 2325 4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. 9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. - Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. Page 137 Page 2907 Brake Pad: Removal and Replacement Exploded View FRONT DISC BRAKE Component WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed air. CAUTION: While the brake pad and cylinder body are separated, the piston may suddenly jump out, so do not depress the brake pedal. - It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of the cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so that brake hose is not under tension. - Do not damage piston boot. - If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one. - Always replace shims and shim covers as a set when replacing brake pads. - Keep the rotor clean of brake fluid. - Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Brake Burnishing Procedure. Removal And Installation Page 905 Fuse: Locations Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B) Terminal Arrangement Page 3604 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations MTC Front Passenger Compartment TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 164 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 3189 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove coolant reservoir fasteners. 3. Move coolant reservoir aside. 4. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 5. Remove IPDM E/R harness cover. 6. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 7. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 5089 Page 2443 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 4265 Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Automatic Drive Positioner AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3595 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Tightening torque of wheel nut ................................................................................................................................................... 112 N.m (11 kg-m, 83 ft-lb) Page 138 Page 3864 1. Remove the rear air control (rear) (1) from the headlining, located over the sliding door, RH. 2. Disconnect the rear air control (rear) electrical connector and remove the rear air control (rear). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4190 Entertainment Systems: Component Tests and General Diagnostics DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Power Supply Circuit Inspection 1.CHECK FUSES Check that the following fuses are not blown. OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Description and Operation. 2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK 1. Disconnect DVD player connector. 2. Check voltage between the DVD player and ground. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - - Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. Repair harness or connector. 3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between DVD player harness connector P105 terminal 22 and ground. Continuity should exist. Page 1903 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 1557 5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1 above for example. WARNING: Do NOT install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube. ^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb) 6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end. ^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within 5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2). WARNING: Page 3481 Turning torque "B" : 0.49 - 3.43 N.m (5.0 - 35.0 kg-cm, 4.3 - 30.4 in-lb) Vertical End Play Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary. NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Vertical end play "C" : 0 mm (0 in) INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten the transverse link mounting bolts and nuts to specified torque, refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension. During installation, the final tightening must be done with the vehicle at curb weight and the tires on the ground. CAUTION: Discard the old pinch nut and use a new pinch nut for installation of the lower ball joint pinch bolt. After installation, check the wheel alignment. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. - Install the wheel and tire. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. Page 4737 1. Check to see if the 2 clips have come unattached from the sliding door welt. ^ If the clips are missing replace the door welt and proceed to step 2. ^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt by inserting the clips into the 2 holes located on the door welt, then proceed to step 2. 2. Prepare the surface by applying 3M(TM) Automotive Adhesion Promoter or equivalent on the door welt and sliding door panel. 3. Apply 3M(TM) Acrylic Plus Tape or equivalent to the area as shown in Figure 2. ^ Tape size 5 mm x 20 mm x 1 mm (0.19 in x 0.78 in x 0.039 in) 4. Firmly press the door welt onto the sliding door panel. ^ Make sure the clips are securely inserted into the 2 holes located on the sliding door panel. 5. Check to make sure this issue has been resolved. Page 2042 Calculated Load Value Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Calculated Load Value SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Calculated Load Value Page 131 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Removal and Installation of BCM REMOVAL NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove the parking brake pedal assembly. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the BCM (1) by removing the screw (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors (2). Arrow Indicates : Front INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Description See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Composition. - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure. Page 2995 Vacuum Brake Booster: Removal and Replacement Brake Booster BRAKE BOOSTER Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing the brake booster. - Replace clevis pin if it is damaged. - Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined during installation, the dash panel may damage the threads. Attach the check valve in the correct orientation. 1. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the brake master cylinder. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 3. Remove vacuum hose from the brake booster. Refer to See: Vacuum Lines. 4. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 5. Remove the brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle. 6. Remove the nuts on the brake booster and brake pedal assembly. 7. Remove brake booster assembly from the engine compartment side. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Output Rod Length Inspection ATC Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations ATC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 4899 LT-INT/L-02 Page 713 Drive Belt: Adjustments DRIVE BELTS Tension Adjustment CAUTION: When belt is replaced with a new one, adjust it to value for "New belt" to accommodate for insufficient adaptability with pulley grooves. - When deflection or tension of belt being used exceeds "Used belt limit" adjust it to value for "After adjustment" of "Used belt". - When checking belt deflection or tension immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specification value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys. - When installing belt, make sure that it is correctly engaged with pulley groove. - Keep oil and water away from belt. - Do not twist or bend belt excessively. GENERATOR AND AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT 1. Remove engine undercover. 2. Loosen idler pulley lock nut (A) and adjust the belt by turning adjusting bolt (B). For specified belt deflection and tension, refer to See: Testing and Inspection. 3. Tighten lock nut (A). Lock nut (A) : 34.8 N.m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb) 4. Tighten adjusting bolt (B). Adjusting bolt (B) : 5.4 N.m (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb) POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT 1. Remove engine undercover. 2. Loosen adjusting bolt (C). 3. Loosen power steering oil pump bolt (D). NOTE: Bolt head (D) is at the engine rear side. 4. Adjust the belt by turning the adjusting bolt (E). Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Application and ID Paint: Application and ID BODY REPAIR Body Exterior Paint Color Specifications Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Brake Booster Page 2897 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Disc Brake Removal And Installation REAR DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 3. Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool, and remove cylinder body. 4. Remove caliper and disc rotor. If the disc rotor cannot be removed, remove as follows: Make sure parking brake lever is completely disengaged. - Hold down the disc rotor with the wheel nut and remove the adjuster hole plug. - Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver through the plug opening and rotate the adjuster in the direction shown to loosen and retract the brake shoes. - Prior to removing disc rotor, make alignment mark using a marker between the hub and disc rotor. - Remove wheel nut and rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install the disc rotor. Align the marks made during removal on the hub and disc rotor. 2. Install the cylinder body, and tighten the torque member bolts to specification. Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View. CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off oil and grease on washer seats on axle assembly and mounting surface of cylinder body. 3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View. CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer for the union bolts. - Securely attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body. Page 307 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair MTC AMBIENT SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor connector. NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening, in front of the condenser. 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2331 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3996 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral cable (2). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. ATC Expansion Valve: Service and Repair ATC Removal And Installation For Front Expansion Valve REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Front Expansion Valve REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 2. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the cooler grommet. 4. Remove the expansion valve. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks Removal And Installation For Rear Expansion Valve REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Rear Expansion Valve REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 2. Remove the rear RH interior side trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the A/C refrigerant pipes from the expansion valve. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the A/C refrigerant pipe ends with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air and contaminants. 4. Remove the expansion valve. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 2090 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 3510 REMOVAL CAUTION: Before removing the rear suspension assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensors from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the sensors becoming inoperative. 1. Remove the center exhaust tube with mufflers using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Disconnect the parking brake cable assemblies from the front cable. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Front Door Window Motor: Customer Interest Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Classification: EL09-033A Reference: NTB09-095A Date: May 5, 2010 POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) 2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42) 2007-2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM A power window "Auto Up" will not work. ACTION Reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. 4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the top position. NOTES: > If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further diagnosis and repair information. > The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur: > Battery cable is disconnected. > Power window switch connector is disconnected. > Power window regulator is replaced. > Power window motor is replaced. > Window glass is removed. Diagram Information and Instructions Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 3199 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1379 - C: Dowel pin hole IVT control valve cover bolts : 11.3 N-m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb) 12. Apply liquid gasket and install the water pump cover, if removed. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. 13. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps. - Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. - Apply a paint mark for the second step of angle tightening. Step 1 : 44 N-m (4.5 kg-m, 32 ft-lb) Step 2 : 84° - 90° degrees clockwise 14. Remove the Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Tool number : (J-50288) CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when removing the Tool. 15. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns smoothly. 16. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation - Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system. - After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items: TIMING CHAIN Page 697 9. Turn the crankshaft 240° and align as above. 10. Set No.5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 11. Check only those valves as shown. 12. If all valve clearances are within specification, installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. If the valve clearances are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances. VALVE ADJUSTING CAUTION: Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. NOTE: Perform adjustment by selecting the correct head thickness of the valve lifter (adjusting shims are not used). - The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use specifications for hot engine condition to confirm valve clearances. Page 2192 3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows. When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing stick it should close. Do not drop any material into the tank. OK or NG OK >>INSPECTION END NG >>Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. Page 3376 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition Page 2874 3. Inspection results (see Figures above): ^ OK - No further action required. ^ NG - Replace the brake pedal assembly. ^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email with the following information: Email subject line: PC039 Brake Pedal Inspection Service Manager Name: Contact phone number: Dealer Code: Dealer Name: VIN: IMPORTANT: Include in the email a digital photograph of the pin in the vehicle for our evaluation. PARTS INFORMATION ^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email as directed above. Page 627 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 857 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered "Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. Page 2062 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 947 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) CAUTION: Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the tire and wheel will result. - If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly. REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 4. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 6. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to See: See: . NOTE: Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL TOP Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove RH/LH wiper arms. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System. 2. Remove cowl top cover. a. Release fastener covers and clips. b. Remove cowl top seal by releasing ends from tabs on cowl top cover, then releasing plastic clips. c. Remove cowl top weatherstrip. d. Remove windshield washer nozzles and hoses from cowl top cover. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Hose/Diagrams 3. Remove cowl top extension. a. Remove heater pump from cowl top extension. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Heater Core/Service and Repair/Heater Pump. b. Disconnect clip attaching coolant control valve hose to cowl top extension. A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections A/C Coupler O-ring: Customer Interest A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections Classification: HA09-003 Reference: NTB09-099 Date: September 25, 2009 A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system IF YOU CONFIRM A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location, NOTE: Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant leaks. ACTIONS NOTE: The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint. 1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination. NOTE: Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak incident, if it should occur. 2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal. CAUTION: ^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves, ^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open. ^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation. ^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks. PARTS INFORMATION Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs performed. Page 468 - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling. - Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Page 4423 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1987 NOTE: CAN diagnostic support monitor of the display control unit is indicated on the vehicle display. Refer to the following. Models with color display: Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Integrated Display System/CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display). - Models with navigation system: Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Navigation System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/CAN Communication Line Check. Interview Sheet TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Interview Sheet Page 2049 Page 4875 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Removal and Installation OPTICAL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove defrost grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel . 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from defroster grille. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3175 - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections A/C Coupler O-ring: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections Classification: HA09-003 Reference: NTB09-099 Date: September 25, 2009 A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system IF YOU CONFIRM A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location, NOTE: Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant leaks. ACTIONS NOTE: The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint. 1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination. NOTE: Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak incident, if it should occur. 2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal. CAUTION: ^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves, ^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open. ^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation. ^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks. PARTS INFORMATION Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts. CLAIMS INFORMATION Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs performed. Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 5061 ^ When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a power-type module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. A power-type module/converter uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle taillight, stoplight, and turn signal circuits only as a signal source. (See the illustration above.) The module/converter must draw no more than 5 milliamps from the vehicle turn signal circuits and no more than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail light circuits. CAUTION: Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements listed above may negatively affect the performance and function of the vehicle's electrical system. See a professional trailer dealer or trailer rental agency for installation of the proper equipment. Customers who inquire about towing should be reminded of the following: ^ Always check for correct operation of the turn signals, stoplights, and taillights every time a trailer is hitched up for towing. ^ The towing capacity for 350Z (Coupe Only), Altima, Maxima, and Sentra is 1,000 lbs. For more information, refer customers to the Owner's Manual as well as the Nissan Towing Guide, available online at NissanUSA.com. Component Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Component VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Component Variable Blower Control (Front) Variable Blower Control (Rear) Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the fresh air duct. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the mass air flow sensor. 3. Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator. 4. Disconnect the PCV hose. 5. Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper) with the mass air flow sensor attached. 6. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case (upper), as necessary. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. Do not shock it. - Do not disassemble it. - Do not touch the sensor. 7. Remove the air cleaner case (lower). 8. Remove resonator in the fender, lifting left fender protector, as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER NOTE: Page 4349 > Window glass run rubber is replaced. > Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed. Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Page 1888 Locations Collision Avoidance Sensor: Locations REAR SONAR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4127 Cellular Phone: Description and Operation TELEPHONE System Description BLUETOOTH(R) HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM Refer to Bluetooth telephone system operating instructions. NOTE: Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before using the Bluetooth telephone system. Bluetooth telephone system allows users who have a Bluetooth cellular telephone to make a wireless connection between their cellular telephone and the Bluetooth control unit. Hands-free cellular telephone calls can be sent and received. Personal memos can be created using the Voice Recognition system. Some Bluetooth cellular telephones may not be recognized by the Bluetooth control unit. When a cellular telephone or the Bluetooth control unit is replaced, the telephone must be paired with the Bluetooth control unit. Different cellular telephones may have different pairing procedures. Refer to the cellular telephone operating manual. Bluetooth Telephone System Diagram Bluetooth Control Unit When the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the Bluetooth control unit will power up. During power up, the Bluetooth control unit is initialized and performs various self checks. Initialization may take up to 10 seconds. During this time the Bluetooth ON indicator will flash until initialization is complete. Voice Recognition will then become active and the Bluetooth ON indicator will remain on. Bluetooth telephone functions can be turned off using the voice recognition system. BCM The BCM supplies power for the Bluetooth ON indicator. Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches When buttons on the steering wheel audio control switch are pushed, the resistance in steering wheel audio control switch circuit changes depending on which button is pushed. The Bluetooth control module uses this signal to perform various functions while navigating through the voice recognition system. The following functions can be performed using the steering wheel audio control switch: Initiate Self Diagnosis of the Bluetooth telephone system - Start a voice recognition session - Answer and end telephone calls - Adjust the volume of calls - Record memos AV Switch Call volume can be adjusted using the AV switch. Microphone The microphone is located in the roof console assembly. The microphone sends a signal to the Bluetooth control unit. Combination Meter The combination meter supplies speed signals to the Bluetooth control unit. Vehicle speed signals are used to determine which voice command A/T Models Timing Chain: Service and Repair A/T Models "The content of this article/image reflects the changes identified in TSB NTB 10-046" ON-VEHICLE REPAIR FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE 1. Front timing chain case 2. Seal ring 3. Collared O-ring 4. IVT control valve cover RH 5. Chain tensioner cover 6. Collared O-ring 7. Seal ring 8. IVT control valve cover LH 9. RH engine mounting bracket 10. Water pump cover 11. Water hose clamp 12. Crankshaft pulley 13. Front oil seal 14. Idler pulley 15. Idler pulley bracket A. Refer to Installation B. To A/C compressor Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove engine under cover. 2. Drain the engine oil. 3. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 4. Drain the power steering fluid. 5. Remove engine room cover. 6. Remove front air duct. 7. Remove battery tray. 8. Remove upper radiator hose. Page 2570 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection A/T INDICATOR A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. Select "METER/M&A;" on CONSULT-III. 2. Using "DATA MONITOR", confirm each indication while operating the shift lever. NOTE: If more than one input is ON, A/T indicator will enter fail-safe function and the display will turn off. OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - GO TO 2. 2.CHECK TCM Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures. OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC. Page 3009 Repair Flow Chart Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1434 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation LH and See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation RH. CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil. 2. Remove the spark plugs using a suitable tool. If replacing the spark plugs use the correct spark plug for maximum performance. Refer to See: Maintenance. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Classification: MT02-001B Reference: NTB03-015B Date: December 21, 21009 2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above. IMPORTANT NOTE: Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs. Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil is not used. Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift quality, for customer pay use as well. Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program. Disclaimer Page 1882 Page 3985 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Top Tether Strap Child Restraint TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT Removal and Installation NOTE: The top tether strap child restraint is not serviceable. Page 1960 Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart Page 3137 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 3632 Air Duct: Service and Repair Manual Component Views DUCTS AND GRILLES Component Ducts - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 1228 Page EM-11 Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6 Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) COMPONENT PARTS AND HARNESS CONNECTOR LOCATION Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Heated Glass Element: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Work Flow 1. Check the symptom and customer's requests. 2. Understand the outline of system. Refer to See: Description and Operation/System Description. 3. According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures. 4. Does rear window defogger operate normally? YES: GO TO 5, NO: GO TO 3. 5. Inspection End. Page 2029 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 3804 Rear A/C Page 101 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 322 3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH. 4. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 5. Twist and pull the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1591 Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure Classification: EC09-028 Reference: NTB09-136 Date: December 1, 2009 2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later SERVICE INFORMATION The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following conditions. ^ When installing a new ECM ^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect. When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for any repairs being performed. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections: NOTE: If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2. a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. b. Select the detected VI from the list. c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. d. Select Model and Year. e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected. f. Select Repair. Page 4119 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 2862 3. Inspection results (see Figures above): ^ OK - No further action required. ^ NG - Replace the brake pedal assembly. ^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email with the following information: Email subject line: PC039 Brake Pedal Inspection Service Manager Name: Contact phone number: Dealer Code: Dealer Name: VIN: IMPORTANT: Include in the email a digital photograph of the pin in the vehicle for our evaluation. PARTS INFORMATION ^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email as directed above. Locations Power Sliding Door Module: Locations AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Page 1045 Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 2616 COMPONENT INSPECTION 1. Make sure that ATF cooler valve is fully opened at room temperature. Page 2163 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral position. 4. Remove range lever and install Tool. Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404) 5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base line on PNP switch body. 7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments. 10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705. Page 3586 Wheel Bearing: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing (Rear) Page 1282 TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER 1. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(LH) 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket RH (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Timing chain (secondary) 10. Camshaft sprocket LH (EXH) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Tension guide Removal and Installation (Primary Timing Chain Tensioner) REMOVAL 1. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. 2. Remove the fender protector side cover RH. 3. Support the engine with suitable jack and remove the RH engine insulator, mount and bracket. Exploded View Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Exploded View PARKING BRAKE SHOE Component Page 4913 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. 6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item. 4. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Page 4897 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 3764 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the rear A/C pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. Page 2686 Axle Shaft Assembly: Tools and Equipment Special Service Tools PREPARATION Special Service Tool The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Page 5113 Heated Glass Element: Electrical Diagrams REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Wiring Diagram - DEF GW-DEF-01 Page 2710 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Component Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1548 Page 4488 INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4632 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 2402 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 1941 Page 1064 - Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the valve lifter and camshaft. - Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement lifter size. 6. Turn crankshaft 240°. 7. Set No.3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 8. Check only those valves as shown. Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Page 1912 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Service and Repair Rear Subframe: Service and Repair REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER Removal and Installation Rear Suspension Assembly Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 2971 avoid damaging parts with the assembly tools. - Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it. 1. Apply fluid to cylinder inner wall body and contact surface of the piston assembly. Then insert secondary piston assembly and primary piston assembly into cylinder body. CAUTION: Pay attention to the orientation of the piston cups. Also, insert pistons squarely to prevent scratching the cylinder inner wall. - Always replace the inner kit as an assembly. 2. Align the slit in the center of the secondary piston with the axial direction of the piston stopper. Visually check the secondary piston slit from the piston stopper hole and install the piston stopper. 3. Insert the plates and the guide into the cylinder body as shown. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the primary piston rod. - Pay attention to the orientation of the guide. 4. Press in the primary piston and install a new snap ring. Page 456 EGR Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 2034 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater Page 1250 Page EM-8 Page 3127 DESCRIPTION Page 139 Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the fresh air duct. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the mass air flow sensor. 3. Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator. 4. Disconnect the PCV hose. 5. Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper) with the mass air flow sensor attached. 6. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case (upper), as necessary. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. Do not shock it. - Do not disassemble it. - Do not touch the sensor. 7. Remove the air cleaner case (lower). 8. Remove resonator in the fender, lifting left fender protector, as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER NOTE: Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral cable (2). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Tow Truck Towing Towing Information: Service and Repair Tow Truck Towing TOW TRUCK TOWING Tow Truck Towing CAUTION: Never tow an automatic transaxle model with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels. - Never tow an automatic transaxle model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground as shown. CAUTION: Always release the parking brake when towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised with the rear wheels on the ground. Page 5114 GW-DEF-02 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406 Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info. Classification: WT04-004C Reference: NTB04-054C Date: April 6, 2011 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION. No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. General Information and Recommendations SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions supplied with your alignment equipment. ^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions. ^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment. General Information and Recommendations 1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed. ^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles. ^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure proper "centering" of the steering wheel. 2. Use the right alignment machine. ^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing alignment checks. ^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment equipment. ^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level. 3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. ^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings. ^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should be checked immediately. ^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended service/calibration schedule. NOTE: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order: ^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings. Component Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 600 SPECIAL TOOLS Page 1233 Page EM-16 Page 3182 NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory. DATA MONITOR All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Page 4228 Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Automatic Drive Positioner AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) COMPONENT PARTS AND HARNESS CONNECTOR LOCATION Page 2066 11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7). ^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing. ^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS. ^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on. 12. Select Start 13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds. 14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON. Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is Noisy Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is Noisy Classification: EL09-022 Reference: NTB09-087 Date: September 10, 2009 2004 - 2009 QUEST; POWER BACK DOOR WILL NOT OPEN/CLOSE AND MAKES NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) with power back door. IF YOU CONFIRM: While operating the power back door (lift gate), ^ The power motor will not open or close the door, and/or ^ There is a grinding and popping noise inside the rear trim panel. ACTION: Check for a loose or missing bolt on the back door power lift assembly. Replace if needed. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Access the power back door motor assembly. ^ Remove left side finishers as needed. ^ Refer to sections BL and EI in the Service Manual as needed. Page 4812 2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown. Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214) 3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free from defects and foreign materials. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the front of the vehicle. - Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. Page 1832 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3477 Control Arm: Testing and Inspection Front Lower Link FRONT LOWER LINK Inspection Check front lower link for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary. Component Locations Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3188 Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3 minutes. Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing. Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it. Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and delete the memory by CONSULT-III. If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to Page 2708 DESCRIPTION Page 1218 Page EM-1 Page 165 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Page 670 - Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is heard. - After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with the electric fuel pump applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping. 2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections. Page 4037 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 3097 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 1861 Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose Sliding Door Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose Classification: BT09-006 Reference: NTB09-014 Date: March 4, 2009 SLIDING DOOR WELT HAS LOOSENED FROM THE DOOR PANEL APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 - 2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM The door welt (rubber trim) is coming loose from the sliding door panel (clips have detached). ACTION Check to see if the clips are missing from the door welt: ^ If the clips are missing, replace the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape. ^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 597 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Page 3605 Rear Passenger Compartment TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info. Classification: EL10-021A Reference: NTB10-061A Date: June 29, 2010 XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps IF YOU CONFIRM A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an internal issue), ACTION Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon headlamps. NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident. ^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available to solve the incident, if one should occur. CLAIMS INFORMATION ^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the repair performed. ^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA. PARTS INFORMATION Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral cable (2). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 1550 Page 3347 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Page 1332 Page EM-2 Page 3821 Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Disc Brake Page 5134 Heated Glass Element: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Terminal And Reference Value For BCM REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Terminal and Reference Value for BCM Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters/Terminal And Reference Value For BCM. Terminal And Reference Value For IPDM E/R REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Testing and Inspection/Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters. Page 1770 4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure. Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline. - Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube and No.1 spool. - Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the No.1 spool on fuel tube. - Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00). - When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. - Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. - Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 -0.08in). Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 Nm (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13in-lb) - Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. 5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22lb) to confirm fuel tube does not come off. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. 7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 8. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. - During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 10. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. Method B CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains seal ability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Rail/Service and Repair. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. Page 5121 Heated Glass Element: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart - Make sure other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally. Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart (Part 1) Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart (Part 2) Page 3629 Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove the RH, center, and LH ventilator duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Floor Connector Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation FLOOR CONNECTOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the three clips and remove the floor connector duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Floor Distribution Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation FLOOR DISTRIBUTION DUCT Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Floor Junction Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct. 3. Remove the floor junction duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Floor Junction Duct Extension DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT EXTENSION Description and Operation Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 1044 Tighten the bearing cap bolts in two steps in the order as shown: AVAILABLE MAIN BEARING Undersize Page 2718 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 807 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Changing Brake Fluid BRAKE FLUID Changing Brake Fluid CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: . - Always keep fluid level higher than "MIN" line on sub tank. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. 1. Connect a vinyl tube and container to the air bleeder. 2. Depressing the brake pedal, drain the brake fluid gradually from the air bleeder of each wheel. 3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the ABS actuator and control unit connector or negative battery terminal. 4. Clean the inside of the sub tank, and refill the sub tank with new brake fluid. 5. Bleed the brake system refilling the system with new fluid. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Page 129 Body Control Module: Locations ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake. NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. 4. Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (TCS/ABS), See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (VDC/TCS/ABS). CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 5. Remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 6. Remove steering outer tie-rod cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen nut using power tool. Refer to See: Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement, Page 2156 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral position. 4. Remove range lever and install Tool. Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404) 5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base line on PNP switch body. 7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments. 10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705. Page 1559 Page 3179 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Auto Active Test IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: - Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Cornering lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (High, Low) - A/C compressor (magnet clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System) or See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) when the auto active test cannot be performed. INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the following nine steps are repeated three times. (A): Oil pressure warning lamp is blinking when the auto active test is operating. Page 3364 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 683 Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Spark Plug Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 2715 Page 258 Power Sliding Door Switch: Locations Automatic Sliding Door System AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3808 9. Carefully cut the low pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown. CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe. A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut. 10. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold collector to allow removal of the cut A/C pipes. 11. Disconnect the high pressure pipe connection (1), low pressure pipe connection (2), and the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. 12. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe connector bolt (1) from the front expansion valve as shown. - Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2) - Electric throttle control actuator (3) - Arrow Indicates Front 13. Use a suitable tool to pry the pipe support clip (1) from the threaded stud on the dash panel as shown. - Arrow Indicates Front 14. Remove the top section of the high/low pressure pipe (1) as shown. Page 932 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Special Service Tools LIFTING POINT Special Service Tool The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. CAUTION: Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition. - Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine, transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a transmission jack or equivalent. - Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear axle, suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a transmission jack or equivalent. - Be careful not to smash or do anything that would affect piping parts. Page 5013 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Removal and Installation OPTICAL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove defrost grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel . 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from defroster grille. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 2900 4. Install the piston boot with a new retaining ring. CAUTION: Make sure the boot is firmly in the cylinder body groove. - Do not reuse the retaining ring. 5. Apply rubber grease and attach the sliding pin and sliding pin boot to the torque member. 6. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease, or equivalent, refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance to the rear of the pad and to both sides of the shim, and attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad, and the outer shim and outer shim cover to the outer pad. 7. Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member. CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than the torque member, as shown. 8. After assembling shims and shim covers to pad, install it to the torque member. 9. Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolts to specification. Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View. DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Visual Inspection Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, secure disc rotor to the wheel hub. (2 or more positions) 2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. Page 598 Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. ^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane during this time (7 seconds). Page 4165 Entertainment Systems: Connector Locations DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4908 - to room/map lamps terminal 2 - to personal lamps 2nd and 3rd row terminal 2 (without rear roof console) or personal lamps 2nd and 3rd row terminal 3 (with rear roof console). With power and ground supplied, the lamps illuminate. SWITCH OPERATION When front door switch LH is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied to ignition keyhole illumination terminal - through BCM terminal 1. And power is supplied through BCM terminal 56 - to ignition keyhole illumination terminal +. When any door switch is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied to front step lamp LH and RH terminal 1, and - to foot lamp LH and RH terminal - through BCM terminal 62. And power is supplied through BCM terminal 56 - to front step lamp LH and RH terminal 2 - to foot lamp LH and RH terminal +. When room/map lamps switch is ON, ground is supplied to room/map lamps terminal 3 - through grounds M57, M61 and M79. And power is supplied through BCM terminal 56 - to room/map lamps terminal 1. When vanity lamp (if equipped), LH or RH is ON, ground is supplied to vanity lamp LH and RH terminal - through grounds M57, M61 and M79. And power is supplied through BCM terminal 56 - to vanity lamp LH and RH terminal +. When personal lamps 2nd row LH or RH is ON, ground is supplied to personal lamps 2nd row LH or RH terminal 3 (without rear roof console assembly) or personal lamps 2nd row terminal 2 (with rear roof console assembly) - through grounds M57, M61 and M79. And power is supplied through BCM terminal 56 - to personal lamps 2nd row LH or RH terminal 1 (without rear roof console assembly) or personal lamps 2nd row terminal 1 (with rear roof console assembly). When personal lamps 3rd row LH or RH is ON, ground is supplied to personal lamps 3rd row LH or RH terminal 3 (without rear roof console assembly) or personal lamps 3rd row terminal 2 (with rear roof console assembly) - through grounds M57, M61 and M79. And power is supplied through BCM terminal 56 - to personal lamps 3rd row LH or RH terminal 1(without rear roof console assembly) or personal lamps 3rd row terminal 1 (with rear roof console assembly). When cargo lamp is ON, ground is supplied to cargo lamp terminal 1 - through grounds M57, M61 and M79. And power is supplied through BCM terminal 56 - to cargo lamp terminal 2. ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION When lamps on demand switch is in DOOR position and when all conditions below are met, BCM performs timer control (maximum 30 seconds) for interior room/map lamp ON/OFF. Power is supplied at all times through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to key switch terminal 1. Key is removed from ignition key cylinder (key switch OFF), power will not be supplied to BCM terminal 37. Ground is supplied to BCM terminal 22 - through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent windows) or 12 (without rear power vent windows). At the time that front door LH is opened, BCM detects that front door LH is unlocked. It determines that interior room/map lamp timer operation conditions are met and turns the interior room/map lamp ON for 30 seconds. Page 3285 Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R Locations Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 3451 2. Tighten adjusting screw in 40° - 60° increments until rack sliding force is within specification. Refer to See: Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And Linkage. NOTE: Steering gear must be replaced if adjusting screw rotation torque is less than 5.0 N.m (0.9 kg-m, 44 in-lb). 3. Verify rack sliding force. Refer to See: On-Vehicle Service. 4. If rack sliding force is out of specification adjust rack sliding force again. 5. If rack sliding force cannot be adjusted within specification replace steering gear. INCREASE Increase rack sliding force as follows: 1. Tighten adjusting screw until it is flush with housing surface. CAUTION: Do not remove adjusting screw. - Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw is removed or loosened more than two rotations. 2. Loosen adjusting screw in 40° - 60° increments until rack sliding force is within specification. Refer to See: Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And Linkage. NOTE: Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw rotation torque is less than 5.0 N.m (0.9 kg-m, 44 in-lb). 3. Verify rack sliding force. Refer to See: On-Vehicle Service. 4. If rack sliding force is out of specification adjust rack sliding force again. 5. If rack sliding force cannot be adjusted within specification replace steering gear. Page 250 Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Automatic Drive Positioner AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2070 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 159 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Page 381 Page 2030 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 1711 EGR Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3226 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Classification: EM07-001D Reference: NTB07-042D Date: May 25, 2010 MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY 2004-2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1942 Page 493 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Revolution Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Revolution Sensor Replacement ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. Remove intake air duct. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt. Page 1887 Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose Sliding Door Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose Classification: BT09-006 Reference: NTB09-014 Date: March 4, 2009 SLIDING DOOR WELT HAS LOOSENED FROM THE DOOR PANEL APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 - 2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM The door welt (rubber trim) is coming loose from the sliding door panel (clips have detached). ACTION Check to see if the clips are missing from the door welt: ^ If the clips are missing, replace the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape. ^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 3543 Board-On Lift LIFTING POINT Board-on Lift CAUTION: Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting. The board-on lift attachment at the front end of the vehicle should be set on the front of the sill under the front door opening. Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift. Page 785 Rear A/C Locations Auxiliary Water Pump Relay: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Component Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Locations Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations - Install primary timing chain so the mating mark (punched) on camshaft sprocket is aligned with the yellow link on the timing chain, while the mating mark (notched) on the crankshaft sprocket is aligned with the gold link on the timing chain, as shown. - When it is difficult to align mating marks of the primary timing chain with each sprocket, gradually turn the camshaft using a wrench on the hexagonal portion to align it with the mating marks. TCS/ABS Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque specifications when connecting the brake tubes. - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Ignition Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4124 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 1231 Page EM-14 Page 2477 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove bolt, and turbine revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt. Page 3112 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Component Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1224 Page EM-7 A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Page 5197 ^ A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify impact marks that may be less than 1 mm in diameter. NOTE: A lead, or crack from an impact point can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge. Compound crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass This type of crack is always caused by impact to the glass. The point of impact is located where the crack "branches out". Cracks that are only in the middle of the glass This type of crack does not begin or end at the edge of the glass. ^ These cracks are always caused by an impact to the glass and are not covered under warranty. 2) How to determine if glass damage is due to a scratch in the glass surface. Cracks from a scratch in the glass surface Glass is produced by fusing together various raw materials such as silica, soda ash, and limestone, and has a hardness of 5 to 6 on the Mohs scale (for reference, a diamond has a hardness of 10 on the same scale). Since earth and sand can contain substances harder than that of glass, glass can be easily scratched by: ^ Fine sand particles ^ Hard metal ^ Rubbing action of contaminated wiper rubbers, or sand partials caught between the wiper and the glass, especially when operating the wipers in a dry Service and Repair License Plate Bulb: Service and Repair PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Bulb Replacement FRONT PARKING LAMP Refer to See: Headlamp/Headlamp Bulb/Service and Repair. LICENSE PLATE LAMP Removal 1. Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove license plate lamp socket. 3. Remove license plate lamp. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. TAIL LAMP Refer to See: Tail Lamp/Tail Light Bulb/Service and Repair. Automatic Air Duct: Service and Repair Automatic Component Views DUCTS AND GRILLES Component Ducts - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 969 Wheels: Testing and Inspection ROAD WHEEL Inspection 1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. 2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. a. Remove tire from aluminum wheel and mount on a tire balance machine. b. Set dial indicator as shown. Wheel runout (Dial indicator value) : Refer to See: Specifications. 3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. Refer to See: Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle. 4. Check front suspension for looseness. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Procedures/Front Suspension Assembly. Page 2067 15. Select OK VIN registration is complete Page 3603 Page 3843 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair OIL Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor - Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) Oil Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the engine and set the following test conditions: Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm - A/C switch: On - Blower fan speed: Maximum position - Temperature control: Optional [set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F).] - Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes. Adjust the oil quantity according to the following table. Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system. Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement Page 5238 Wiper Motor: Locations Rear Wiper And Washer System REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 3055 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 5230 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Rear Wiper And Washer System Rear Washer Nozzle REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Rear Washer Nozzle REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove back door upper finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove rear washer tube from rear washer nozzle. 3. Release retaining clips and remove rear washer nozzle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear Wiper And Washer Switch REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Rear Wiper and Washer Switch Refer to See: Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Switch/Service and Repair. Page 2462 Control Module: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 2312 Fuel Pump Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1281 5. Install the internal chain guide. - If removed, reinstall slack guide. CAUTION: Do not overtighten slack guide bolts. It is normal for a gap to exist under the bolt seats when bolts are tightened to specification. - Remove stopper pin from timing chain tensioner (primary). 6. Make sure again that the matching marks on the sprockets and the timing chain have not slipped out of alignment. 7. Tighten camshaft sprocket bolts to specification with all timing chains installed and Ring Gear Stopper Tool holding the crankshaft. Tool number : (J-50288) 8. Install the front timing chain case. Inspection After Installation - Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system. - After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items: Page 2419 ATC Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair ATC IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. The rear heater and cooling unit assembly only draws in air from the passenger compartment to recirculate into the passenger compartment, so the rear heater and cooling unit assembly is not equipped with in-cabin microfilters. REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to See: See: . It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the three screws and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. 4. Install the in-cabin microfilters, replacing the two in-cabin microfilters with new filters, into the front heater and cooling unit assembly. CAUTION: When installing the two new in-cabin microfilters make sure that the filters are facing in the direction indicated by the direction arrow for the air flow. The direction arrow is printed on the side of the in-cabin microfilters. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Install the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. Page 2679 Joint Sub-Assembly Make sure there is no rough rotation or unusual axial looseness. - Make sure there is no foreign material inside joint sub-assembly. - Check joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks or fractures. CAUTION: If there are any irregular conditions of joint sub-assembly components, replace the entire joint subassembly. Slide Joint Housing Make sure there are no compression scars, cracks or fractures or unusual wear of ball rolling surface. - Make sure there is no damage to shaft screws. - Make sure there is no deformation of boot installation parts. Ball Cage Make sure there are no compression scars, cracks, fractures of sliding surface. Steel Ball Make sure there are no compression scars, cracks, fractures or unusual wear. Inner Race Check ball sliding surface for compression scars, cracks or fractures. - Make sure there is no damage to serrated part. CAUTION: If there are any irregular conditions in the component, replace with a new set of joint sub-assembly, ball cage, steel ball and inner race. Damper Check damper for cracks or wear. Install damper with new damper bands. ASSEMBLY Transaxle Side 1. Install new boot and new small boot band on shaft. CAUTION: Cover drive shaft serration with tape to prevent damage to boot during installation. 2. Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft. 3. Install spider assembly securely, making sure the matching marks which were made during disassembly are properly aligned. 4. Install new snap ring using a suitable tool. Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Page 1376 3. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case. CAUTION: Use new O-rings for installation. 4. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to front timing chain case as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. - Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant. - 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia. 5. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to top surface of oil pan (upper) as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Page 4072 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 3715 7. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. 8. Remove the three magnet coil screws (B) and remove the magnet coil (5). - Shim (1) - Snap ring (2) - Clutch disc (3) - Pulley (4) - Center bolt (A) INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clutch Disc If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley. Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If the contact surface of the pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace the clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before installation. Coil Check the magnet coil for a loose connection or cracked insulation. INSTALLATION 1. Install the magnet coil. CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. 2. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. Page 1142 Figure 2. NOTE Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION Tighten the bolt no more then necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Classification: EL10-028 Reference: NTB10-106 Date: September 10, 2010 NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System SERVICE INFORMATION All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic. VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic: ^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not operate. ^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM, I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information as needed. TCS/ABS Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor inoperative. - Pull out the sensor, be careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness. - Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the wheel sensor bolt to the specified torque. - Before installing the wheel sensor, make sure there are no foreign materials (such as iron fragments) adhered to the pick-up part of the wheel sensor, to the inside of the wheel sensor mounting hole or on the rotor mounting surface. FRONT WHEEL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove the front wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Partially remove the front wheel fender protector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor. 4. Remove the harness wire from mounts and disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR WHEEL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor from the rear wheel hub and bearing assemblies. 2. Remove the harness wire from mounts and harness wire clips from the rear suspension member. 3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub. Page 4840 - Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is heard. - After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with the electric fuel pump applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping. 2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections. Page 4565 5. Remove sunroof welt (if equipped). 6. Remove defrost grille assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service and Repair/Automatic/Removal And Installation. 7. Remove front pillar finishers. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 8. Remove front kicking plates and door welts. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 9. Remove center pillar assist grips. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 10. Remove assist grips from headlining. 11. Remove rear kicking plates and door welts. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 12. Remove center pillar seat belt anchors. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 13. Remove center pillar lower finishers. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. - Disconnect harness from door open/close switch. 14. Remove center pillar lower then center pillar upper finishers. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 15. Remove tailgate kicking plate. Refer to See: Carpet/Service and Repair. 16. Remove rear lower finisher assemblies RH/LH. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 17. Remove roof finisher. refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 18. Remove seat belt D rings from rear center pillar finishers and rear upper finishers. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 19. Remove front pillar upper finishers. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 20. Release clips from the rear, then remove rear roof console assembly (if equipped). - Disconnect harness from rear roof console assembly. 21. Remove lower rear console bracket. 22. Remove rear audio control assembly (if equipped). - Disconnect harness from audio control. 23. Remove rear air control assembly (if equipped). - Disconnect harnesses from rear air control assembly. 24. Disconnect rear washer hose from headlining. 25. Remove headlining. 26. Remove the front roof console bracket. 27. Remove rear roof console front and upper brackets. 28. Remove assist grip brackets from roof. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 797 e. From the engine compartment, tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown to specification. - Arrow Indicates Front CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when tightening the fittings. 4. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold collector. 5. Check that there is sufficient clearance between the lower high/low pressure pipe and the front stabilizer bar. Adjust the lower high/low pressure pipe as necessary. 6. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and check the A/C system for leaks. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 7. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Interior - Seat Arm Rest Is Loose Arm Rest: Customer Interest Interior - Seat Arm Rest Is Loose Classification: BT09-050 Reference: NTB09-089 Date: September 11, 2009 2004 - 2009 QUEST; SEAT ARMREST LOOSE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM The armrest on a captain chair (front seats or 2nd row seats) is loose. ACTION 1. Remove the armrest. 2. Replace bolt insert. 3. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to bolt threads and torque to 28 Nm (2.85 kg-m, 20.6 lb-ft). IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 3634 Grilles A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location TCS/ABS Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque specifications when connecting the brake tubes. - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). Page 4169 DESCRIPTION Page 2608 CONTROL CABLE Drive Plate Flex Plate: Specifications Drive Plate SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Drive Plate Page 2500 13. Select Confirm 14. Select Diagnosis 15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete. Page 4141 Collision Avoidance Module: Service and Repair REAR SONAR SYSTEM Sonar Control Unit REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair to gain access to sonar control unit. 2. Disconnect electrical connector then remove sonar control unit. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information Classification: EM09-001A Reference: NTB09-040A Date: May 14, 2010 NEW BLUE NISSAN LONG LIFE ANTIFREEZE/COOLANT This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. SERVICE INFORMATION In calendar year 2009, Nissan began filling some vehicles at the factory with a NEW Nissan Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (LLC) that is blue in color. NOTE: LLC = Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant The transition to this new Blue LLC continued though MY 2010. Beginning with MY 2011, all Nissan vehicles are filled at the factory with the Blue LLC. ^ MY 2009 and 2010: Some vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC. ^ MY 2011: All vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC. Blue LLC is designed to have a service life of 7 years/105,000 miles for the factory fill, and 5 years/75,000 miles for subsequent replacement fills. Nissan Blue Super LLC is available through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order link via dealer portal www.NNAnet.com or order direct www.NissanChemicals.com. ^ Blue LLC one gallon pre-diluted: P/N 999MP - LP25500P > The one gallon containers are pre-diluted with 50% antifreeze and 50% distilled water. > Do not add additional water when using pre-diluted Blue LLC. Page 5081 Page 3368 ^ Apply the brakes as shown. ^ Start the engine to allow brake boost. ^ Turn the engine OFF, ^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates". ^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate. Put the bridge plate in the down position. ^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle. Page 3056 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Removal and Installation Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Removal and Installation FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation REMOVAL WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel tank. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair. Page 1324 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered "Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. Checking Fluid Level Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Level POWER STEERING FLUID Checking Fluid Level Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of 50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F). CAUTION: Do not overfill. - Do not reuse any used power steering fluid. - Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. Page 783 Page 4186 Entertainment Systems: Description and Operation DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Schematic DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM System Description Refer to Owner's Manual for DVD entertainment system operating instructions. Power is supplied at all times through 15A fuse [No. 22, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to DVD player terminal 16. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] Page 1871 Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Classification: BT07-032A Reference: NTB07-070A Date: September 25, 2009 SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009 Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly: ^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged ^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power ^ When the sunroof motor was changed ACTION Perform the following initialization procedure: 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. 3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position. 4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally. NOTE: If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information. Page 1934 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 3484 Control Arm: Service and Repair Front Lower Link FRONT LOWER LINK Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Pax Run Flat Tires And Wheels See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, to relieve the coil spring tension and support the front lower link. 3. Disconnect the shock absorber lower end bolt using power tool. 4. Remove the front lower link adjusting bolt using power tool. 5. Disconnect the front lower link nut and bolt from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using power tool, then remove front lower link. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. - After installing the front lower link, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. Page 151 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Axle Nut Page 3517 1. Set the shock absorber (strut) in a vise, then loosen (without removing) the piston rod lock nut as shown. CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time. 2. Compress the spring using commercial service tool until the shock absorber (strut) mounting insulator can be turned by hand. WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are firmly hooked on the spring. The spring compressors must be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the spring. 3. Remove the piston rod lock nut. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Shock Absorber Assembly Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. - Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions. - Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and replace if necessary. Thrust Bearing Check thrust bearing parts for abnormal noise or excessive rattle in axial direction and replace if necessary. Coil Spring Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. - Check the free spring height. ASSEMBLY Page 1255 Page EM-13 Page 1607 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 4893 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 2615 Transmission Cooler: Removal and Replacement ATF Cooler ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ATF Cooler REMOVAL 1. Drain ATF. 2. Drain engine coolant. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove hose clamps and hoses from ATF cooler. 4. Remove bolt from ATF cooler and remove ATF cooler. INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal. Do not reuse sealing parts. ATF Cooler Valve ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ATF Cooler Valve Page 1940 Page 3455 Steering Gear: Overhaul POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE Disassembly and Assembly DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: Use soft jaws when holding steering gear housing. Handle gear housing carefully, as it is made of aluminum. Do not grip cylinder in a vise. - Do not disassemble steering gear housing. Replace as an assembly. 1. Remove the outer tie-rods. 2. Remove the boot clamps and boot bands 3. Remove the inner tie-rods and dust boots. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Thoroughly clean all parts in cleaning solvent or Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. Blow dry the parts with compressed air. Page 3609 Component Intake Door Motor (Driver) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Intake Door Motor (Passenger) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 2272 Fuel Injector: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1349 Page EM-19 Page 3995 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 1751 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Diagrams Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Diagrams REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Rear Washer Tube Layout Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Standard .............................................................................................................................................. ................. 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 185 psi)/300 rpm Minimum ........................................................ ........................................................................................................ 981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm Differential limit between cylinders .............................................................................................................................. 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm Page 2538 5. Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures using the "HOT" range on the A/T fluid level gauge. CAUTION: Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while driving. 6. Check the fluid for the following conditions: If the fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to the See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Changing A/T Fluid. Flush the AT fluid cooling system after repairing the transaxle. - If the fluid contains frictional material (from the clutches or bands), remove the radiator and flush the cooler lines using a cleaning solvent and compressed air after completing repairs to the transaxle. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Procedures/A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning. Page 3478 Control Arm: Testing and Inspection Rear Lower Link And Coil Spring REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING Inspection Check for deformation, cracks, or other damage and replace if necessary. Page 3208 CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R) CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Display Item List Page 1560 Page 2445 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Camshaft Sprocket Page 1259 Page EM-17 Page 4772 Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Check combination meter circuit. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Locations See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Description and Operation/Combination Meter/System Description. 4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis For Intermittent Incident/Description See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis For Intermittent Incident/Diagnosis Procedure. >> INSPECTION END Page 710 2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and forth) movement (see Example 2): ^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped) No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible. Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rotor. NOTE: The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected. 1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel. 2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front. ^ Pulley should be locked. ^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator. 3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Page 2664 Axle Shaft Assembly: Vehicle Damage Warnings Precaution For Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" And "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information. WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the Supplemental Restraint. - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precaution PRECAUTIONS Precaution CAUTION: When installing each rubber part, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on the ground. *Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. - After installing the removed suspension parts, check the front wheel alignment. - Do not jack up the vehicle by the transverse link . Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing drive shaft. Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible. - Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts. - Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the service location. - Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover must be placed over parts. - Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts. - Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with kerosene which shall be removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths. Page 5130 OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Replace display control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair/Integrated Display System. 2.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CAN communication line check is executed. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Integrated Display System/CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display). OK or NG OK - Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG - In addition, it is necessary to check CAN communication line. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Integrated Display System/CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display). Rear Window Defogger Circuit Inspection REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Rear Window Defogger Circuit Inspection 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rear window defogger. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check voltage between rear window defogger connector D504 terminal + and ground. OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - GO TO 3. 2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between rear window defogger connector D515 terminal - and ground. Page 4743 1. Check to see if the 2 clips have come unattached from the sliding door welt. ^ If the clips are missing replace the door welt and proceed to step 2. ^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt by inserting the clips into the 2 holes located on the door welt, then proceed to step 2. 2. Prepare the surface by applying 3M(TM) Automotive Adhesion Promoter or equivalent on the door welt and sliding door panel. 3. Apply 3M(TM) Acrylic Plus Tape or equivalent to the area as shown in Figure 2. ^ Tape size 5 mm x 20 mm x 1 mm (0.19 in x 0.78 in x 0.039 in) 4. Firmly press the door welt onto the sliding door panel. ^ Make sure the clips are securely inserted into the 2 holes located on the sliding door panel. 5. Check to make sure this issue has been resolved. ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 1878 Page 2676 8. Install new large and small boot bands securely using Tool. Tool number : KV40107300 ( - ) NOTE: Do not reuse boot bands. CAUTION: Secure boot band so that dimension "M" meets specification as shown. Dimension "M" : 1.0 - 4.0 mm (0.039 - 0.157 in) 9. After installing housing and shaft, rotate boot to check whether or not the actual position is correct. If boot position is not correct, remove old boot bands then reposition the boot and secure with new boot bands. Damper 1. Use new damper bands for installation. 2. Install damper from stationary-joint side while holding it securely. Page 1294 - C: Dowel pin hole IVT control valve cover bolts : 11.3 N-m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb) 12. Apply liquid gasket and install the water pump cover, if removed. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. 13. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps. - Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. - Apply a paint mark for the second step of angle tightening. Step 1 : 44 N-m (4.5 kg-m, 32 ft-lb) Step 2 : 84° - 90° degrees clockwise 14. Remove the Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Tool number : (J-50288) CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when removing the Tool. 15. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it turns smoothly. 16. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation - Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system. - After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items: TIMING CHAIN Removal Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Removal LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal 1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Cover. 2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from the base. Page 1973 4. Through the above procedure, the error is detected in the TCM branch line (shaded in the figure below). NOTE: For abbreviations, refer to See: CAN/Abbreviation List. 5. Perform the inspection for the detected error circuit. For the inspection procedure, refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis/Malfunction Area Chart. ATC Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair ATC AMBIENT SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor connector. NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening, in front of the condenser. 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal And Installation (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Removal And Installation (Without Rear Power Vent Windows) SIDE WINDOW GLASS Removal and Installation (without Rear Power Vent Windows) REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear side window latch bolts. 3. Disconnect the antenna. 4. Remove the side window front bolts and glass. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. INSTALLATION 1. Install the glass from outside to insure that it is even with the top and bottom of the opening. Tighten side window front bolts to the specified torque. 2. Install rear side window latch bolts. 3. Connect the antenna. 4. Install rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. Locations Headlamp Relay: Locations IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 3678 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Locations Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Page 4857 Page 1413 The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. 1. Disconnect the tube clamp at the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube at the mass air flow sensor. 2. Separate the mass air flow sensor from the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. 3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and remove the air cleaner case (upper). 4. Remove the air cleaner filter. 5. Install a new air cleaner filter. 6. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Page 1598 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 4779 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Testing and Inspection Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Fusible Link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident. - Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. - Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. ATC Evaporator Core: Service and Repair ATC Removal And Installation For Front Evaporator REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Front Evaporator Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the blower motor side cover. 3. Remove the front blower motor. 4. Remove the heater core and evaporator case bottom cover. 5. Remove the blower motor case. Page 3782 Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 3333 SPECIAL TOOLS Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Entertainment Systems: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Trouble Diagnosis Page 5163 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. Page 5110 Page 4788 Page 4216 Navigation Module: Locations Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 1388 5. Install the internal chain guide. - If removed, reinstall slack guide. CAUTION: Do not overtighten slack guide bolts. It is normal for a gap to exist under the bolt seats when bolts are tightened to specification. - Remove stopper pin from timing chain tensioner (primary). 6. Make sure again that the matching marks on the sprockets and the timing chain have not slipped out of alignment. 7. Tighten camshaft sprocket bolts to specification with all timing chains installed and Ring Gear Stopper Tool holding the crankshaft. Tool number : (J-50288) 8. Install the front timing chain case. Inspection After Installation - Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system. - After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items: Page 2299 2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown. Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214) 3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free from defects and foreign materials. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the front of the vehicle. - Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. Service and Repair Sound Proofing / Insulation: Service and Repair BODY REPAIR Foam Repair During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations around the vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators. URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS Use commercially available spray foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on vehicle. Read instructions on product for fill procedures. FILL PROCEDURES 1. Fill procedures after installation of service part. Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side. - Clean area in which foam was removed. - Install service part. - Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill in enough to close gap with the service part. 2. Fill procedures before installation of service part. Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side. - Clean area in which foam was removed. - Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side. NOTE: Fill in enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange area. Install service part. NOTE: Refer to label for information on working times. Service and Repair Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair FRONT FOG LAMP Bulb Replacement The front fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. REMOVAL CAUTION: Turn fog lamp switch OFF before disconnecting and connecting the connector. - Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result. - Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect the bulb life and/or fog lamp performance. Keep grease and other oily substances away from bulb. - Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc., may affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. 1. Position the front fender protector aside. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1160 OIL PUMP OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Page 499 Diagrams Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ) Terminal Arrangement Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3 minutes. Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing. Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it. Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and delete the memory by CONSULT-III. If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to Page 4782 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 3577 ^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps. 5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure. Generally this is 40psi. If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure: a. Break down the tire/rim assembly. b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. c. Remount the tire. 6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area. ^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel. NOTE: Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated. If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform 1. Break down the tire/rim assembly. 2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2. 3. Remount the tire. Page 2812 Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1592 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Power Door Lock System Power Sliding Door Switch: Locations Power Door Lock System POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Testing and Inspection Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Testing and Inspection REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING Inspection Check for deformation, cracks, or other damage and replace if necessary. Service and Repair Valve Cover: Service and Repair ROCKER COVER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine cover using power tool. 2. If removing rocker cover (RH), disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and remove the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube and air cleaner lid. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair. 3. If removing rocker cover (RH), remove the front cowl panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 4. If removing rocker cover (RH), remove the windshield wiper arms and motor assembly. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System. 5. If removing rocker cover (RH), remove the intake manifold collector. Refer to See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Collector . Page 1813 1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the valve lifter that was measured as being outside the standard specifications. 3. Measure the center thickness of the removed lifter with a micrometer as shown. 4. Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement. - Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 in) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: Maintenance. CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, (U) and (N), at each of proper positions. (Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.) 5. Install the selected replacement valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 7. Rotate the crankshaft a few turns by hand. 8. Confirm that the valve clearances are within specification. 9. After the engine has been run to full operating temperature, confirm that the valve clearances are within specification. Revolution Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Revolution Sensor Replacement ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. Remove intake air duct. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt. Page 5239 Wiper Motor: Locations Front Wiper And Washer System FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4085 3. To locate a break, move probe along element. Tester indication will change abruptly when probe passes the broken point. Element Repair Refer to See: Windows and Glass/Heated Glass Element/Service and Repair. Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 1104 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets (no picture shown). NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in Page 3714 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Refrigerant Lines REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch REMOVAL 1. Remove the compressor. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Refrigerant Lines. 2. Remove the center bolt by holding the clutch disc steady using a suitable tool (A). 3. Remove the clutch disc. 4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers. 5. Remove the pulley assembly using Tool. - Use a pulley puller with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the compressor shaft and the center of the puller on the small adapter as shown. Tool number : KV99233130 (J-29884) CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under (not into) the pulley groove. 6. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers. Page 726 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair MTC IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. The rear heater and cooling unit assembly only draws in air from the passenger compartment to recirculate into the passenger compartment, so the rear heater and cooling unit assembly is not equipped with in-cabin microfilters. REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to See: See: . It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the three screws and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. 4. Install the in-cabin microfilters, replacing the two in-cabin microfilters with new filters, into the front heater and cooling unit assembly. CAUTION: When installing the two new in-cabin microfilters make sure that the filters are facing in the direction indicated by the direction arrow for the air flow. The direction arrow is printed on the side of the in-cabin microfilters. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Install the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. Page 1589 Page 1237 Page EM-20 Page 118 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove coolant reservoir fasteners. 3. Move coolant reservoir aside. 4. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 5. Remove IPDM E/R harness cover. 6. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 7. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Page 997 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Special Service Tools LIFTING POINT Special Service Tool The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. CAUTION: Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition. - Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine, transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a transmission jack or equivalent. - Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear axle, suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a transmission jack or equivalent. - Be careful not to smash or do anything that would affect piping parts. Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info. Trailer Adapter Kit: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info. Classification: EL03-043H Reference: NTB04-049H Date: April 13, 2011 TRAILER LIGHT WIRING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard previous versions of this is bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES SERVICE INFORMATION NOTE: This bulletin provides information to be shared with all affected customers. ^ This TSB contains the appropriate hookup points for connecting a trailer light wiring harness to the towing vehicle's electrical system. ^ The wiring diagrams contained in this bulletin are for Nissan vehicles that have trailer towing capability (see the owners manual) but do not have a Genuine Nissan accessory towing kit (with wiring) available. Page 5190 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the door glass bolts. 8. Raise the door glass up into the door frame/channel and hold in place with a suitable tool (A). 9. Disconnect the harness connector for the regulator assembly. 10. Remove the regulator nuts, and remove the regulator assembly. Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. Wire wear - Regulator deformation The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". Door glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Disassembly 1. Remove the regulator motor bolts. 2. Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly. Assembly Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator nuts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the regulator motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the door glass. - Removal and installation of the door glass run. Page 1229 Page EM-12 Page 2893 5. Install wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Brake Burnishing Procedure. Disassembly and Assembly FRONT DISC BRAKE Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly NOTE: Do not remove torque member, pads, shims, shim covers or pad retainers, when disassembling or assembling cylinder body. DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove caliper assembly. Refer to See: . 2. Remove cylinder body from torque member, then sliding pin boots from torque member. 3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. WARNING: Do not get your fingers caught in the piston. 4. Remove the piston seal from the cylinder body using a suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Cylinder Body CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. - Check for corrosion, wear, or damage to the cylinder inner wall, and replace the caliper if there are any non-standard conditions. - Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface with a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston Page 437 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 1343 Page EM-13 Page 434 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 3908 Rear A/C Page 3103 Page 4126 AV-H/PHON-02 Page 1273 1. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(LH) 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket RH (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Timing chain (secondary) 10. Camshaft sprocket LH (EXH) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Tension guide CAUTION: - After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will strike the pistons. - When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. - Apply new engine oil to bolt threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets, camshaft brackets, and crankshaft pulley. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the rocker covers or intake manifold collector to remove or install the timing chain(s). Removal 1. Set No. 1 cylinder to TDC. - Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing indicator. 2. Remove front timing chain case. 3. Check timing chain markings to confirm No. 1 cylinder is at TDC of its compression stroke. - If not, remove Ring Gear Stopper Tool and turn crankshaft clockwise 360° (one revolution). Re-install Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Page 3389 Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Suspension REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY Rear Wheel Alignment Before checking rear wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION Check tires for wear and for improper inflation. - Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Wheels/Testing and Inspection. - Check rear wheel bearings for looseness. - Check rear suspension for looseness. - Check that rear shock absorber works properly. - Check wheelarch height (unladen*). Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheelarch Height. GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed. This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle. - The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is centered. - The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle. - The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level. 2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. - Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule. THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed. Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheel Alignment. 1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators. - The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators may not be correct. - This may result in an ERROR. 2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method. - Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways. - See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information. CAMBER Measure camber of both right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust in accordance with the following procedures. Camber : Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheel Alignment. - If camber is not within specification, adjust by turning the adjusting bolts in the same direction. Page 1283 4. Remove the Bank 1 (RH) IVT control valve cover. - Loosen the IVT control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. CAUTION: The shaft in the IVT control valve cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the IVT control valve cover by pulling straight out until the IVT control valve cover disengages from the camshaft sprocket. 5. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner as follows: a. Pull the lever (C) down to release the plunger stopper tab (B). b. Insert the stopper pin A into the tensioner body hole to hold the lever (C) and keep the plunger stopper tab (B) released. c. Compress the plunger (D) into the tensioner body (1) by pressing the slack guide (2). d. Keep the slack guide (2) pressed and lock the plunger (D) in by pushing the stopper pin A through the lever (C) and into the chain tensioner body hole. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. e. Remove timing chain tensioner bolts and then remove the timing chain tensioner. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop timing chain tensioner bolts inside timing chain case. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing primary timing chain tensioner, push in plunger and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the back and the mounting surfaces of primary timing chain tensioner. - After installation, pull out stopper pin. - When installing the IVT control valve covers perform the following steps. 1. Install IVT control valve covers as follows: a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides). Page 3350 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 2668 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Removal and Installation (Left Side) FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Removal and Installation (Left Side) REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (TCS/ABS) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (VDC/TCS/ABS). 3. Remove cotter pin. Then remove lock nut from drive shaft. 4. Remove brake hose lock plate. Then remove brake hose from strut. 5. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt using power tool, then separate lower ball joint from steering knuckle. Refer to See: Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle. 6. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly, using a puller or suitable tool. CAUTION: When removing drive shaft, do not apply an excessive angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint. 7. Remove drive shaft from transaxle using Tool and drive shaft puller or suitable tool. Set Tool and a drive shaft puller or suitable tool between drive shaft (slide joint side) and transaxle as shown and remove drive shaft. Tool number : KV40107500 ( - ) Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 1266 Tool number : (J-50288) CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when setting the Tool. b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt so that there is a 10 mm (0.39 in) gap between bolt and crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Keep loosened crankshaft pulley bolt in place to protect the crankshaft pulley from dropping. c. Position a suitable tool at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to remove crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not use a puller claw on the outside edge of the crankshaft pulley. 24. Disconnect the oil pressure switch harness connector. 25. Disconnect valve timing control harness connector. 26. Remove the Bank 1 (RH) (A) and Bank 2 (LH) (B) IVT control valve covers. - Loosen the IVT control valve cover bolts in the reverse order as shown. CAUTION: The shaft in the IVT control valve cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the IVT control valve cover by pulling straight out until the IVT control valve cover disengages from the camshaft sprocket. - A: Bank 1 (Conventional RH bank) - B: Bank 2 (Conventional LH bank) - C: Dowel pin hole 27. Remove the A/C idler pulley and bracket and the drive belt auto-tensioner. 28. If necessary, remove the idler pulley and water pump cover. Page 996 Board-On Lift LIFTING POINT Board-on Lift CAUTION: Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting. The board-on lift attachment at the front end of the vehicle should be set on the front of the sill under the front door opening. Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift. Page 1469 8. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, use the vacuum specifications below, based on the altitude above sea level. 9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks. 10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero. CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into the cooling system. 11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening. 12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level, and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary. FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. Fill the radiator from the filler neck above the radiator upper hose and reservoir tank with clean water and reinstall radiator filler cap. 2. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load. 4. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 5. Drain the water from the system. Refer to See: . 6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator. Page 1300 1. Internal chain guide 2. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 3. Mating mark (copper link) 4. Mating mark (punched) 5. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) 6. Mating mark (yellow link) 7. Timing chain (secondary) 8. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 9. Tension guide 10. Water pump 11. Crankshaft sprocket 12. Mating mark (notched) 13. Timing chain (primary) 14. Slack guide 15. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 16. Mating mark (back side) 17. Crankshaft key NOTE: The figure above shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that on the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed. 1. Make sure that dowel pin hole, dowel pin of camshaft and crankshaft key are located as shown. (No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC) NOTE: - Though camshaft does not stop at the position as shown, for the placement of cam nose, it is generally accepted camshaft is placed for the same direction of the figure. Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side) : At cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side) : At cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Crankshaft key : At cylinder head side of right bank. 2. Install the timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows: CAUTION: Mating marks between timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all mating mark positions repeatedly during the installation process. a. Push plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. Page 2332 Page 465 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4751 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 694 Page 4027 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 1587 Page 4076 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Technician Safety Information Information Bus: Technician Safety Information PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems information. WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the "SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM". - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Page 2896 6. Attach the pad retainer to the torque member. CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than the torque member, as shown. 7. After assembling the shims and the shim covers to the pad, install it to the torque member. 8. Install cylinder body and tighten sliding pin to the specification. Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front/Exploded View. Page 1833 Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Page 4781 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 2967 2. Place the side flange of cylinder body with chamfering around the pin insertion hole facing up, and firmly set master cylinder assembly in a vise. CAUTION: When setting the master cylinder assembly with the vise, be sure not to over-tighten. - When securing with a vise, use copper plates or cloth to protect the flange. 3. Remove pin on the reservoir tank, using a suitable tool [commercial service tool: diameter approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)]. 4. Remove master cylinder assembly from the vise. 5. Remove reservoir tank and grommets from cylinder body. 6. Remove brake fluid level switch from reservoir tank, if necessary. 7. Push in the piston and remove the piston stopper from the cylinder body using a suitable tool. 8. Carefully pull the primary piston assembly straight out to prevent cylinder inner wall from being damaged using a suitable tool. Page 1364 Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner Page 1898 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 1249 Page EM-7 Page 1467 5. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. - If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Install the radiator drain plug. If the cooling system was drained completely, install the reservoir tank and the cylinder block drain plugs and tighten to specification. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in place of the cylinder block LH drain plug, do not remove the engine block heater. The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water. - Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plugs. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Locations Starter Relay: Locations IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1284 b. Install new seal rings on the IVT control valve covers. c. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT control valve covers. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. - Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes to install the IVT control valve covers. - Tighten the intake valve timing control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. IVT control valve cover bolts: 11.3 N-m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb) Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner) REMOVAL 1. Remove the timing chains (primary) and (secondary). 2. Remove the rocker covers. 3. Remove the camshaft brackets (No. 1). 4. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioners. Page 1389 TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER 1. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(LH) 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket RH (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Timing chain (secondary) 10. Camshaft sprocket LH (EXH) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Tension guide Removal and Installation (Primary Timing Chain Tensioner) REMOVAL 1. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. 2. Remove the fender protector side cover RH. 3. Support the engine with suitable jack and remove the RH engine insulator, mount and bracket. Page 2110 4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. 9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. - Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Page 1275 After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will strike the pistons. 8. Remove crankshaft sprocket, if necessary. 9. Remove timing chain (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows: a. Attach stopper pin (B) to the right (A) and left (C) timing chain tensioners (secondary) (1). NOTE: - Use stopper pins included with Tool J-50246. b. Remove camshaft sprocket (INT and EXH) bolts. c. Remove the timing chains (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets (INT) and (EXH). - Turn camshaft slightly to secure slack of timing chain on timing chain tensioner (secondary) side. - Insert metal or resin plate [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] into guide between timing chain (secondary) and timing chain tensioner (secondary) plunger. Remove camshaft sprocket and timing chain (secondary) with timing chain removed from guide groove. CAUTION: Timing chain tensioner plunger can move while stopper pin is inserted in timing chain tensioner. Plunger can come out of tensioner when timing chain is removed. Use caution during removal. NOTE: Camshaft sprocket (INT) is a one piece integrated design with sprockets for timing chain (primary) and for timing chain (secondary). Page 1533 WARNING: - Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have completely cooled down. - When removing the front and rear engine mounting through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up slightly for safety. For engine slingers, refer to See: Engine/Service and Repair. 1. Disconnect battery. Refer to See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Remove cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) connector. 4. Remove the front wheel and tires using power tool. 5. Remove the engine undercover. 6. Remove the inner wheel well splash shields. 7. If removing only air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) do so at this time through the wheel well opening, using Tool. Tool number : KV991J0050 (J-44626) 8. If removing the exhaust manifold (LH bank), remove the radiator and cooling fan assembly. Refer to See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair. 9. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Exploded View. 10. If removing the exhaust manifold (RH), remove the front suspension member. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension Member. 11. Remove the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst manifolds support bolts in the order as shown. Arrow Indicates : Engine front 12. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1), heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2), air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2). a. Remove harness connector of each sensor, and disconnect the harness from the bracket and middle clamp. b. Remove both heated oxygen sensors and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors using Tool. Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensors or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors. - Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor. 13. Remove exhaust manifold and three way catalyst manifold heat shields using power tool. 14. Remove the three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 1) and three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 2) by loosening the bolts first and then removing the nuts and through bolts using power tool. 15. Remove the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifolds. Loosen the exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown using power tool. Arrow Indicates : Engine front Page 795 NOTE: Reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3) for additional clearance to remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe as necessary. d. Pry off the pipe support clip (1) secured to the dash panel threaded stud, using a suitable tool. e. Carefully remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe (1). CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections. - Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones. - Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil. NOTE: The service replacement high/low pressure pipe is a two piece pipe assembly. 1. Install and position the new lower high/low pressure pipe without tightening the connections. NOTE: To ease installation, first remove the A/C support clip from the lower section high/low pressure pipe and secure it to the dash panel threaded stud. 2. Install the new upper high/low pressure pipe through the engine compartment. a. Install the high/low pressure pipe to the front expansion valve and only hand tighten the connector bolt (1) as shown. - Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2) - Electric throttle control actuator (3) - Arrow Indicates Front Page 1994 OK Present error: Replace the BCM. Refer to See: Body Control Module/Service and Repair. - Past error: Error was detected in the BCM branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. CAN Communication Circuit TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CAN Communication Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system. 4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT) Check the continuity between the data link connector terminals. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the harness and repair the root cause. 3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT) Check the continuity between the data link connector and the ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the harness and repair the root cause. 4.CHECK ECM AND IPDM E/R TERMINATION CIRCUIT 1. Remove the ECM and the IPDM E/R. 2. Check the resistance between the ECM terminals. Page 285 The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub. Page 1262 Page EM-20 Page 2919 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Rear REAR DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 3. Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool, and remove cylinder body. 4. Remove caliper and disc rotor. If the disc rotor cannot be removed, remove as follows: - Make sure parking brake lever is completely disengaged. - Hold down the disc rotor with the wheel nut and remove the adjuster hole plug. - Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver through the plug opening and rotate the adjuster in the direction shown to loosen and retract the brake shoes. - Prior to removing disc rotor, make alignment mark using a marker between the hub and disc rotor. - Remove wheel nut and rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install the disc rotor. Align the marks made during removal on the hub and disc rotor. 2. Install the cylinder body, and tighten the torque member bolts to specification. Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View. CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off oil and grease on washer seats on axle assembly and mounting surface of cylinder body. 3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View. CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer for the union bolts. - Securely attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body. 4. Add new brake fluid and bleed the air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5. Adjust the parking brake. Refer to See: Parking Brake System/Testing and Inspection. 6. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. Page 768 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. ATC Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair ATC Defroster Door Motor DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation Defroster Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the steering member from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Disconnect the defroster door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the two screws and remove the defroster door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Component INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Page 3235 Page 2069 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Page 3202 - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. Page 3008 Page 163 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 4771 3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection, and perform step 3 again. Component Description ASCD INDICATOR Component Description ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in combination meter. CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD system is ready for operation. SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met. CRUISE indicator is illuminated. - SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD setting. SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD)/System Description for the ASCD function. Diagnosis Procedure ASCD INDICATOR Diagnosis Procedure 1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC Check that DTC UXXXX is not displayed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/U Code Charts/U0101. 3.CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION Does combination meter operate normally? Yes or No Page 2427 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation LH and See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation RH. CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil. 2. Remove the spark plugs using a suitable tool. If replacing the spark plugs use the correct spark plug for maximum performance. Refer to See: Maintenance. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. Page 492 DESCRIPTION Page 3348 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 3116 Starter Motor: Description and Operation STARTING SYSTEM System Description Power is supplied at all times: to starter motor terminal B, and - through 40A fusible link (letter k, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to ignition switch terminal B. With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied: from ignition switch terminal ST - to IPDM E/R terminal 4. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminal 1. With the selector lever in the P or N position, power is supplied: through PNP switch terminal 5 - to IPDM E/R terminal 53. Ground is supplied at all times: to IPDM E/R terminals 38, 50 and 60 - through body grounds E9, E15 and E24. Provided that the IPDM E/R receives a starter relay request ON signal from the BCM over the CAN lines, the IPDM E/R grounds the starter relay and power is supplied: from terminal 3 of the IPDM E/R - to terminal S of the starter motor windings. The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter motor. The starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the starter motor operates. Page 2048 Front Disc Brake Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Disc Brake Removal And Installation FRONT DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 3. Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool, then remove cylinder body. 4. Remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on both disc rotor and wheel hub when removing disc rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. CAUTION: Align matching marks made during removal when reusing disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten torque member bolts to specification. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front/Exploded View. CAUTION: Before installing the cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe any oil off the knuckle spindle washers and cylinder body attachment surfaces. 3. Install brake hose to the cylinder body, and tighten union bolt to the specification. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front/Exploded View. CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer for union bolts. - Attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body attachment part. 4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Page 588 Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Page 4282 Page 3787 REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Unclip the heater pump from the cowl top extension. 4. Disconnect the heater pump electrical connector and the two heater hoses, then remove the heater pump. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the heater pump, replace the heater pump as an assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 2073 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Page 2712 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Locations Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Automatic Air Conditioner REFRIGERANT Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 900 ± 50 g (1.98 ± 0.11 lb) Manual Air Conditioner REFRIGERANT Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 900 ± 50 g (1.98 ± 0.11 lb) Page 1517 11. Remove the timing chain tensioner assembly. a. Pull the lever down and release the plunger stopper tab. b. Insert the stopper pin into the tensioner body hole to hold the lever and keep the stopper tab released. NOTE: An allen wrench [2.5 mm (0.098 in)] is used for a stopper pin as an example. c. Insert the plunger into the tensioner body by pressing the timing chain slack guide. d. Keep the slack guide pressed and hold the plunger stopper tab in by pushing the stopper pin deeper through the lever and into the timing chain tensioner body hole. e. Make a gap between water pump gear and timing chain by turning the crankshaft pulley approximately 20° clockwise. 12. Remove timing chain tensioner. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop timing chain tensioner bolts inside front timing chain case. 13. Remove the three water pump bolts. Make a maximum gap between water pump gear and timing chain by turning crankshaft pulley counterclockwise until timing chain loosens on water pump sprocket. 14. Screw M8 bolts [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.49 in) length: approx. 50 mm Page 2005 OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of display control unit. 2. Check the resistance between the display control unit harness connector terminals. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the display control unit branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the display control unit. Refer to. Models with color display: See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Integrated Display System/Power Supply And Ground Circuit Inspection For Display Control Unit - Models with navigation system: See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Navigation System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Supply And Ground Circuit Inspection For Display Control Unit OK or NG OK >> Present error: Replace the display control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair/Integrated Display System. - Past error: Error was detected in the display control unit branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. Display Unit Branch Line Circuit TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Display Unit Branch Line Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the display unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of display unit. 2. Check the resistance between the display unit harness connector terminals. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the display unit branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the display unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Description and Operation/Integrated Display System. OK or NG OK >> Present error: Replace the display unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair/Integrated Display System. - Past error: Error was detected in the display unit branch line. Page 3352 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 1784 2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown. Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214) 3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free from defects and foreign materials. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the front of the vehicle. - Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. Page 3685 Removal 1. Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the three screws and remove the blower motor. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 791 NOTE: To ease installation, first remove the A/C support clip from the lower section high/low pressure pipe and secure it to the dash panel threaded stud. 2. Install the new upper high/low pressure pipe through the engine compartment. a. Install the high/low pressure pipe to the front expansion valve and only hand tighten the connector bolt (1) as shown. - Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2) - Electric throttle control actuator (3) - Arrow Indicates Front b. Hand tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown. - Arrow Indicates Front c. Hand tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. d. Install the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) to the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. e. Attach the high/low pressure pipe to the A/C support clip (secured to the dash panel threaded stud). f. Tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown to specification. 3. Complete the installation of the lower high/low pressure pipe. CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections. - Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones. - Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil. Page 1949 Information Bus: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAN PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems information. WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. - Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the "SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM". - Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. CAN Fundamental PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Harness Repair - Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area. NOTE: A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in). - Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area. NOTE: Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The spliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twisted line are lost. - Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communication line. CAN PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Harness Repair Page 349 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm assembly (5). Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Page 4006 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Page 5135 Heated Glass Element: Service and Repair REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Filament Repair REPAIR EQUIPMENT Conductive silver composition (DuPont No. 4817 or equivalent) - Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long - Drawing pen - Heat gun - Alcohol - Cloth REPAIRING PROCEDURE 1. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a cloth dampened in alcohol. 2. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of drawing pen. Shake silver composition container before use. 3. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break. 4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for continuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver composition is deposited. Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted. 5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum distance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and hot air outlet. If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24 hours. Page 1067 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Before starting engine, check the levels of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of engine coolant, engine oil, working fluid, fuel and exhaust gas. - Bleed air from passages in pipes and tubes of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. - After cooling down engine, again check amounts of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items: VIN Registration Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and ID/Model Variation. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display. Locations Horn Relay: Locations ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 4288 Component Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2077 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 1756 Page 3852 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair MTC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Procedures. 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Locations. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. Page 4185 AV-DVD-06 Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info. Trailer Lamps: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info. Classification: EL03-043H Reference: NTB04-049H Date: April 13, 2011 TRAILER LIGHT WIRING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard previous versions of this is bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES SERVICE INFORMATION NOTE: This bulletin provides information to be shared with all affected customers. ^ This TSB contains the appropriate hookup points for connecting a trailer light wiring harness to the towing vehicle's electrical system. ^ The wiring diagrams contained in this bulletin are for Nissan vehicles that have trailer towing capability (see the owners manual) but do not have a Genuine Nissan accessory towing kit (with wiring) available. Page 1420 Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm assembly (5). Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Locations Collision Avoidance Sensor: Locations REAR SONAR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Axle Nut Page 1403 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Fuel Pressure Check FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. FUEL PRESSURE CHECK CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because V42 models never have fuel return system. Method A CAUTION: The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other purposes. - Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge. - Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector). - To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check. - Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it. - Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure. 3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. - Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover. Diagram Information and Instructions Cruise Control: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 3544 Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Special Service Tools LIFTING POINT Special Service Tool The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. CAUTION: Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition. - Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine, transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a transmission jack or equivalent. - Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear axle, suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a transmission jack or equivalent. - Be careful not to smash or do anything that would affect piping parts. Page 5027 Page 3216 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove coolant reservoir fasteners. 3. Move coolant reservoir aside. 4. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 5. Remove IPDM E/R harness cover. 6. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 7. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4883 Page 3661 Page 3636 The defroster nozzle is part of the instrument panel and is replaced as an assembly. Removal Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel . Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Fresh Air Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation FRESH AIR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel . 2. Remove the defroster nozzle. 3. Remove the fresh air duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Defroster Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation DEFROSTER DUCT Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the defroster duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH and LH Side Demister Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the RH or LH side demister duct. RH, LH, and Center Ventilator Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation RH, LH, AND CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. Page 2074 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column covers. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Cover. 2. Remove wiper washer switch electrical connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Front Disc Brake Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Disc Brake Removal And Installation FRONT DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 3. Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool, then remove cylinder body. 4. Remove disc rotor. CAUTION: Put matching marks on both disc rotor and wheel hub when removing disc rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. CAUTION: Align matching marks made during removal when reusing disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten torque member bolts to specification. Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front/Exploded View. CAUTION: Before installing the cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe any oil off the knuckle spindle washers and cylinder body attachment surfaces. 3. Install brake hose to the cylinder body, and tighten union bolt to the specification. Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front/Exploded View. CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer for union bolts. - Attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body attachment part. 4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Page 1612 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting Front Door Window Regulator: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting EL08-031A Reference: NTB09-027A Date: July 15, 2010 FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60) SERVICE INFORMATION If any of the following work has been done: ^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly ^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator ^ installation of a new glass window ^ installation of a new glass run ....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following: ^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B NOTE: The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror. If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in this bulletin. NOTE: Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will not reset the Limit Switch. SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH 1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in the glass raising (up) direction. Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the fresh air duct. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the mass air flow sensor. 3. Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator. 4. Disconnect the PCV hose. 5. Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper) with the mass air flow sensor attached. 6. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case (upper), as necessary. CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. Do not shock it. - Do not disassemble it. - Do not touch the sensor. 7. Remove the air cleaner case (lower). 8. Remove resonator in the fender, lifting left fender protector, as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER NOTE: Specifications Piston: Specifications Available Piston Page 3241 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket - 2 (RH) And Rear Power Socket (2nd Row) POWER SOCKET Front Power Socket - 2 (RH) and Rear Power Socket (2nd Row) REMOVAL and INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove inner socket from ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 2. Disconnect power socket electrical connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2537 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Checking A/T Fluid A/T FLUID Checking A/T Fluid 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Check for any transaxle fluid leaks. 3. Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperature using the "COLD" range on the A/T fluid level gauge. a. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set parking brake. b. Start the engine and move the transaxle selector lever through each gear position. Leave the selector lever in the "P" park position. c. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. CAUTION: Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge. d. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint-free paper. e. Re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge into the charging pipe as far as it will go. f. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the reading. If the reading is at or below the low side of the range, add the necessary specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe and then re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge. CAUTION: Do not overfill the transaxle. - Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while driving. 4. Drive the vehicle for approximately 5 minutes at moderate speeds. Page 1161 Engine Oil Pressure: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE OIL PUMP OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Page 2958 - Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Locations Headlamp Relay: Locations IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4340 Resetting After installing each component to the vehicle, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the door glass automatically to raise the door glass to the top position. Page 946 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 5168 Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. - While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. - The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. - Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal. - Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. - The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. - Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident. CAUTION: Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. - Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. - Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. - The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. Repairing Water leaks for Rear Window Glass Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the rear window area while pushing glass outward. To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Locations Auxiliary Water Pump Relay: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 112 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System. ACTIVE TEST Page 422 Page 3713 Check the clearance (B) all the way around between the clutch disc (1) and pulley (2) using a suitable tool (A) as shown. Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance (B) : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) If the specified clearance (B) is not obtained, replace the adjusting shim(s) and recheck the clearance (B) as shown. BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque. Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor CONSULT-III and CAN diagnostic support monitor (on-board diagnosis function) are used for detecting root cause. MONITOR ITEM (CONSULT-III) Example: CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR indication Without PAST With PAST Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Page 3490 CAUTION: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. When installing wheel hub and bearing assembly to steering knuckle, align cutout in toner ring cover with wheel sensor mounting hole in steering knuckle. - When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. (When not using the alignment mark, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake.) Page 3504 - Check the stabilizer bushings for deterioration or cracks. Replace if necessary. - Check that the connecting rod ball joint can rotate in all directions. If movement is not smooth and free, replace connecting rod. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - When installing stabilizer bar, make sure that the stabilizer clamps are facing in the correct direction as shown. - Make sure that slit in stabilizer bushing is in the position as shown. - Lubricate the inner and outer surfaces of the stabilizer bushing using a silicone lubricant. - Install stabilizer bar with ball joint socket properly placed as shown. - When installing wheel and tire, refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. Service and Repair Back Window Glass: Service and Repair REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear wiper arm and motor. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the connectors and grounds for the rear window defogger. - Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. - If the rear window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: When a windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. - Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. INSTALLATION Page 1991 Diag On CAN System Description Diag on CAN DESCRIPTION "Diag on CAN" is a diagnosis using CAN communication instead of previous DDL1 and DDL2 communication lines, between control units and diagnosis unit. System Diagram Page 367 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4330 8. Remove the TORX bolts (T30) and the door lock assembly. Door lock assembly bolts : 5.3 Nm (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb) 9. Remove the TORX bolt (T30) from the outside handle bracket. 10. While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide it toward the rear of the vehicle to remove it and the door lock assembly. 11. Disconnect the door lock actuator electrical connector. 12. Separate the outside handle cable connection from the outside handle bracket. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click is felt. Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 3275 - CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. - Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. - When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status Process to stop CAN communication is activated. - All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. - CAN communication is stopped. - When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. - When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. Page 3366 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Page 4078 Page 1297 After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will strike the pistons. 8. Remove crankshaft sprocket, if necessary. 9. Remove timing chain (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows: a. Attach stopper pin (B) to the right (A) and left (C) timing chain tensioners (secondary) (1). NOTE: - Use stopper pins included with Tool J-50246. b. Remove camshaft sprocket (INT and EXH) bolts. c. Remove the timing chains (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets (INT) and (EXH). - Turn camshaft slightly to secure slack of timing chain on timing chain tensioner (secondary) side. - Insert metal or resin plate [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] into guide between timing chain (secondary) and timing chain tensioner (secondary) plunger. Remove camshaft sprocket and timing chain (secondary) with timing chain removed from guide groove. CAUTION: Timing chain tensioner plunger can move while stopper pin is inserted in timing chain tensioner. Plunger can come out of tensioner when timing chain is removed. Use caution during removal. NOTE: Camshaft sprocket (INT) is a one piece integrated design with sprockets for timing chain (primary) and for timing chain (secondary). Page 2405 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3371 > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics in this bulletin. ^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification. 1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle: ^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge ^ Road Crown Gauge NOTE: Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use. 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Locations Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 923 select the item or perform the action. HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON When the TRIP button is pressed, the following modes will display on the screen. Warning message (if any) -- TRIP 1 -- TRIP 2 -- FUEL ECONOMY -- MAINTENANCE -- Audio or OFF -- TRIP 1 Maintenance items Press the TRIP button to display maintenance information or set maintenance intervals for the following: - Engine Oil - Tire Rotation - Tire Pressure (if so equipped) For setting the Tire Pressure display1 refer to "Tire pressure information" later in this section. Changing the maintenance interval Select the "Engine Oil" or "Tire Rotation" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button to display the screen to change the maintenance interval. Select the "Maintenance Schedule" key using the joystick and move the joystick to right or left to set the maintenance interval. Resetting the maintenance interval Page 176 C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10. d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11. e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12. Page 4586 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 2797 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove bolt, and turbine revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt. Page 1752 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 648 1. Turn the adjusting bolts in the same direction to calibrate. NOTE: Camber changes about 5' minutes with each graduation of the adjusting bolt. 2. Tighten adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. TOE-IN Measure toe-in using following procedure. If out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts. WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. - Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce rear of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture. 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both tires at the same height of hub center. This mark is a measuring point. 4. Measure distance "A" (rear side). Page 2815 - Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 2709 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 1914 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 4396 Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SLIDING DOOR Removal 1. Remove sliding door garnish. 2. Remove sliding door finisher assembly. 3. Remove sliding door handle screw covers and screws. 4. Remove sliding door handle assembly. Disconnect door lock cable and door handle cable. Refer to See: Locks/Door Locks/Service and Repair. 5. Remove lower seal. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4371 ^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise. ^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise. 2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator. 3. Install the regulator assembly into the door. 4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to regulator. 5. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top. Page 3660 Rear Passenger Compartment TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 2918 Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Brake Burnishing Procedure. Page 1256 Page EM-14 Page 414 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Service and Repair Rear Subframe: Service and Repair REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER Removal and Installation Rear Suspension Assembly Page 2594 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove bolt, and turbine revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt. Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 2714 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 1026 2. Before installing the No. 1 camshaft bracket, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the mating surface using suitable scraper. CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surface. 3. Turn the crankshaft until No. 1 piston is set at TDC on the compression stroke. The crankshaft key should line up with the right bank cylinder center line as shown. 4. Install the RH (1) and LH (2) secondary timing chain tensioners (3) on the cylinder heads. O-rings (4) - Stopper pins (5) 5. Install valve lifters. NOTE: Install them in original positions. 6. Install exhaust and intake camshafts and camshaft brackets. Intake camshaft has a drill mark on camshaft sprocket mounting flange. - Follow your identification marks (2) and (3) made during removal, or follow the identification marks (1) that are present on the new camshafts components for proper placement and direction of the components. Page 3307 Concept of Auto Active Test - IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. - If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode Page 2617 2. Submerge ATF cooler valve in a water-filled container, and then heat it up with temperature of over 82°C (180°F) for 10 minutes more. 3. Make sure that ATF cooler valve is fully closed. Page 3909 CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse O-rings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or around the connection. O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications WARNING: Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it. CAUTION: When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following. When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car. Failure to do so will cause oil to enter the low pressure chamber. Page 47 Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2658 3. Re-install the front wheel drive shafts per the Service Manual instructions. ^ Install the drive shaft 180° from the position it was removed. ^ Use new axle nuts and new cotter pins when re-installing the front wheel drive shaft. See the Parts Information section. 4. Tighten the Axle Nuts to 200 Nm (147 ft-lb), instead of 125 Nm (92 ft-lb). 5. Test drive the vehicle to confirm the incident is resolved. Page 77 1. Remove the rear air control (rear) (1) from the headlining, located over the sliding door, RH. 2. Disconnect the rear air control (rear) electrical connector and remove the rear air control (rear). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-030B Date: 100816 Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement Reference: NTB10-030B Date: August 16, 2010 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2008-2010 ARMADA & TITAN AND 2008-2009 QUEST BRAKE PEDAL PIVOT PIN INSPECTION The Claims Information in this bulletin has been amended. Please discard previous versions. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC039 NHTSA# 10V-072 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008-2010 Armada (TA60) 2008-2010 Titan (A60) 2008-2009 Quest (V42) Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign on certain specific 2008 - 2010 Armada & Titan and 2008 - 2009 Quest vehicles to inspect, and if necessary, replace the brake pedal. On a small number of the potentially affected vehicles the brake pedal assembly may have been manufactured out of specification. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC039 to this quality assurance inspection. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this activity. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS 1. Look under the dash to view the brake pedal pivot pin. Page 3638 2. Remove the clip and remove the floor junction duct extension. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Floor Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation FLOOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the floor duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear Overhead Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation REAR OVERHEAD DUCT Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the bolt and two clips, and remove the rear overhead duct. NOTE: The rear headliner duct connected to the rear overhead duct is part of the headlining trim panel and is replaced as an assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear Floor Duct DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation REAR FLOOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screw and clip, then remove the rear floor duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Grilles DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation GRILLES Removal 1. Remove the interior trim panel as necessary that contains the grille to be removed. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Page 2863 CLAIMS INFORMATION Page 2525 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 1855 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 1982 CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor Use "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" for detecting the root cause. MONITOR ITEM LIST (CONSULT-III) ECM Page 379 - Inspection End. Page 2651 3. Re-install the front wheel drive shafts per the Service Manual instructions. ^ Install the drive shaft 180° from the position it was removed. ^ Use new axle nuts and new cotter pins when re-installing the front wheel drive shaft. See the Parts Information section. 4. Tighten the Axle Nuts to 200 Nm (147 ft-lb), instead of 125 Nm (92 ft-lb). 5. Test drive the vehicle to confirm the incident is resolved. Page 1897 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Changing A/T Fluid Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid A/T FLUID Changing A/T Fluid 1. Run the engine to warm up the transaxle until the fluid is at full operating temperature "HOT". 2. Stop the engine. 3. Remove the engine undercover. 4. Drain the A/T fluid by removing the drain plug. Reinstall the drain plug to the specified tightness using a new drain washer. Drain plug : 39 N.m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft-lb) 5. Refill the transaxle with new specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe. Always refill the transaxle with the same volume amount that was drained out. Fluid grade and capacity : Refer to See: . CAUTION: Do not overfill the transaxle. 6. Run the engine at idle speed for five minutes. 7. Check fluid level and condition. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Procedures/Checking A/T Fluid. If the fluid is still contaminated, repeat step 2 through 5. ATC Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair ATC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Condenser REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 2. Remove the radiator. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator. 3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. 5. Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor. 6. Carefully release retaining clips located on top driver side of condenser and rotate the condenser out of its mounts as shown. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Component. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 1187 2. Press in valve oil seal to height (H) using Tool to specified height. Tool number : - (J-39386) NOTE: Dimension (H): height measured before valve spring seat installation. Intake and exhaust : 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in) 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 409 Page 4849 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 4748 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 3372 Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. Page 1082 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. VDC/TCS/ABS Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Locations VDC/TCS/ABS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2678 6. Put matching marks on spider assembly and shaft. 7. Remove snap ring using a suitable tool, then remove spider assembly from shaft. 8. Remove boot from shaft. 9. Clean the old grease off of the slide joint assembly. Wheel Side 1. Mount the front drive shaft in a vise. CAUTION: When mounting shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft. 2. Remove boot bands and slide the boot back. 3. Screw a sliding hammer or suitable tool 30 mm (1.18 in) or more into threaded part of joint sub-assembly. Pull joint sub-assembly out of shaft. CAUTION: Align sliding hammer or suitable tool and drive shaft then remove joint sub-assembly by pulling directly. If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or more unsuccessful attempts, replace the entire drive shaft assembly. 4. Remove boot from shaft. 5. Remove circlip from shaft. 6. While rotating ball cage, clean the old grease off of the joint sub-assembly. Damper Remove damper bands, then remove damper from shaft. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Shaft Replace shaft if there is bending, cracking, or other damage. Locations Air Bag: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Page 3370 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Daytime Running Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Locations SUNROOF Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1704 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral position. 4. Remove range lever and install Tool. Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404) 5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base line on PNP switch body. 7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments. 10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705. Page 393 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Installation LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3886 2. Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim. 3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH. 4. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 5. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. MTC INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation Intake Sensor Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Service and Repair Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral cable (2). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Front Door Window Motor: Customer Interest Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative Classification: EL09-033A Reference: NTB09-095A Date: May 5, 2010 POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60) 2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42) 2007-2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM A power window "Auto Up" will not work. ACTION Reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. 4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the top position. NOTES: > If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further diagnosis and repair information. > The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur: > Battery cable is disconnected. > Power window switch connector is disconnected. > Power window regulator is replaced. > Power window motor is replaced. > Window glass is removed. Page 1071 6. If removing rocker cover (LH), disconnect the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor. 7. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation LH (LH) and See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation RH (RH). 8. Position engine harness aside. 9. Disconnect PCV hoses. 10. Remove the engine oil dipstick. 11. Remove rocker cover bolts in the reverse order as shown. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ATC Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair ATC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Component. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. - Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 1655 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4301 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Removal and Installation of BCM REMOVAL NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove the parking brake pedal assembly. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the BCM (1) by removing the screw (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors (2). Arrow Indicates : Front INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Description See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Composition. - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure. Page 348 - Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is heard. - After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with the electric fuel pump applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping. 2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections. Page 3146 Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Power Supply Routing Circuit POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Circuit Breaker (PTC) The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The temperature (and resistance) of the thermistor element varies with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the electrical resistance will rise sharply to reduce the circuit current. This reduced current flow will cause the element to cool lowering the resistance accordingly. Once resistance falls to a specified level normal circuit current flow is allowed to resume. Page 5083 Combination Switch: Electrical Diagrams COMBINATION SWITCH Wiring Diagram - COMBSW LT-COMBSW-01 Page 1225 Page EM-8 VIN Registration Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE VIN Registration DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M). OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and ID/Model Variation. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display. Page 2849 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair G SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove center console lower cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts. CAUTION: Do not use power tools to remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. - Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. 3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts to specification. CAUTION: Do not use power tools to install the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. - Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Page 2882 CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis as shown. 3. Turn input rod to adjust the brake pedal to the specified height. When the brake pedal is adjusted to specification, tighten the lock nut to specification. Refer to See: Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Brake Booster/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Booster. Tool number : - (J-46532) 4. With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD cancel switch in until the threaded ends contact the rubber stops. 5. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch contacting the rubber stops, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock them in place. CAUTION: Make sure that the gap "C1" and "C2" between the rubber stops and switch ends are within specification. 6. Check the pedal play "A". CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released. 7. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it. Page 3682 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor ATC BLOWER MOTOR Component Front Blower Motor Rear Blower Motor Page 2621 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral position. 4. Remove range lever and install Tool. Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404) 5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns with neutral base line on PNP switch body. 7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to See: Valve Body/Adjustments. 10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705. Page 3082 CHARGING THE BATTERY CAUTION: Do not "quick charge" a fully discharged battery. - Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged. - When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Do not turn on the charger first, as this may cause a spark. - If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 55°C (131°F), stop charging. Always charge battery at a temperature below 55°C (131°F). Charging Rates Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate. NOTE: The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery charges. This indicates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge improves. The charging amps indicated above refer to initial charge rate. If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than 0.050, the battery should be replaced. Page 4120 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 4859 Component Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Testing and Inspection Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE Inspection CAUTION: If leakage occurs around hose and tube connections, retighten or, if necessary, replace damaged parts. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for leaks, cracks, distortion, deformation, without interfering with other parts or loosening connecting parts, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts. 2. Apply a stepping force of 784 N (80 kg-f, 176 lb-f) to the brake pedal with the engine running and keep it for about 5 seconds, then check each part for leaks. Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 2279 - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 3187 Page 1615 d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4. e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL) procedure. See Figure 5. ^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete. ^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in process. See Figure 6. Page 2071 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Specifications Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Injector Page 1363 1. Check to see if the 2 clips have come unattached from the sliding door welt. ^ If the clips are missing replace the door welt and proceed to step 2. ^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt by inserting the clips into the 2 holes located on the door welt, then proceed to step 2. 2. Prepare the surface by applying 3M(TM) Automotive Adhesion Promoter or equivalent on the door welt and sliding door panel. 3. Apply 3M(TM) Acrylic Plus Tape or equivalent to the area as shown in Figure 2. ^ Tape size 5 mm x 20 mm x 1 mm (0.19 in x 0.78 in x 0.039 in) 4. Firmly press the door welt onto the sliding door panel. ^ Make sure the clips are securely inserted into the 2 holes located on the sliding door panel. 5. Check to make sure this issue has been resolved. Page 3934 Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Description and Operation/Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Page 620 ^ Make sure the rear slide plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. 5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place. NOTE: Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep. The Alignment Process The Alignment Process IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the alignment. 1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack. ^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in Figure 4. ^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5). ^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then re-enter the rack. ^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front wheels straight. Page 2007 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the ECM branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ECM. Refer to See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Supply And Ground Circuit. OK or NG OK >>. Present error: Replace the ECM. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Procedure After Replacing ECM. - Past error: Error was detected in the ECM branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. Front Air Control Branch Line Circuit TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Front Air Control Branch Line Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of front air control. 2. Check the resistance between the front air control harness connector terminals. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the front air control branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the front air control. Refer to the following. Models with automatic air conditioner: See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ATC/Power Supply And Ground Circuit For Front Air Control - Models with manual air conditioner: See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/MTC/Power Supply And Ground Circuit For Front Air Control OK or NG OK >> Present error: Replace the front air control. Refer to the following. - Models with automatic air conditioner: See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Assembly/Service and Repair - Models with manual air conditioner: See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Module HVAC/Service and Repair - Past error: Error was detected in the front air control branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. IPDM E/R Branch Line Circuit TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS IPDM E/R Branch Line Circuit Page 1443 Component Locations EGR Temperature Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1293 9. Install upper oil pan bolts as shown. Upper oil pan bolts : 22.0 N-m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb) 10. Install lower oil pan. 11. Install IVT control valve covers as follows: a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides). b. Install new seal rings on the IVT control valve covers. c. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT control valve covers. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. - Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes to install the IVT control valve covers. - Tighten the intake valve timing control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. - A: Bank 1 (Conventional RH bank) - B: Bank 2 (Conventional LH bank) Page 817 5. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. - If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Install the radiator drain plug. If the cooling system was drained completely, install the reservoir tank and the cylinder block drain plugs and tighten to specification. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in place of the cylinder block LH drain plug, do not remove the engine block heater. The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water. - Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plugs. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants. Page 1586 Page 1619 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 958 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Classification: BT07-032A Reference: NTB07-070A Date: September 25, 2009 SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009 Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly: ^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged ^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power ^ When the sunroof motor was changed ACTION Perform the following initialization procedure: 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. 3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position. 4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally. NOTE: If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information. Service Precautions Service Port HVAC: Service Precautions PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Refrigerant Connection A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations. Expansion valve to cooling unit - Evaporator pipes to evaporator (inside cooling unit) - Refrigerant pressure sensor FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This reduces the possibility of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction of the O-ring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing characteristics. - The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby facilitating piping connections. O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION Front A/C Compressor and Condenser Page 3184 Inspection With CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Inspection with CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. Connect CONSULT-III and select "IPDM E/R" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 2. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Check display content in self-diagnosis results. NOTE: The Details for Display for the Period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory. Contents displayed NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.-INSPECTION END. CAN COMM CIRC-Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System. Removal and Replacement Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement Front Coil Spring And Strut COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Remove cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the wheel sensor wire and front brake hose from the brackets on the front shock absorber (strut). 4. Disconnect the connecting rod upper link using power tool. 5. Support the wheel hub and steering knuckle assembly with a suitable wire. 6. Remove the shock absorber (strut) lower bolts and nuts using power tool. 7. Remove the three upper strut mounting nuts using power tool. CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut on vehicle. 8. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber (strut) assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. - When installing the strut spacer, it must be positioned as shown. - Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension. WARNING: Always replace the shock absorber (strut) lower mounting nuts. - When installing shock absorber (strut) to steering knuckle, be sure to hold bolts when tightening nuts. - Install wheel and tire. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. Rear Suspension SHOCK ABSORBER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Pax Run Flat Tires And Wheels See: Page 4682 3. Using needle nose pliers, install the anti-rattle spring as shown in Figure 3. 4. Check to make sure both ends of the anti-rattle spring are correctly installed and fully seated as shown in Figure 4. 5. Check to make sure the seat is operating properly and the anti-rattle spring stays in place. Page 1105 Figure 2. NOTE Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION Tighten the bolt no more then necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Ring Page 2883 Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments BRAKE PEDAL Inspection and Adjustment INSPECTION 1. If equipped with adjustable pedals, move the brake pedal to the forward most position (closest to the floor). 2. Inspect the brake pedal height, play, and switch clearance from the dash lower panel as shown. CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedals, the brake pedal must be set in the forward most position (closest to the floor) for checking the brake pedal specifications. Tool number : - (J-46532) 3. Adjust the brake pedal as necessary. ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning 45° counterclockwise. 2. Loosen the lock nut on the input rod. Component Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Component Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1173 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold INTAKE MANIFOLD Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Fuel Pressure/Testing and Inspection. 2. Remove the intake manifold collector (upper and lower). Refer to See: Intake Manifold Collector. 3. Remove the fuel rail with the fuel injectors. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Rail/Service and Repair. 4. Loosen the intake manifold nuts and bolts in the order as shown using power tool, and remove the intake manifold. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion Using straightedge and feeler gauge, inspect the surface distortion of both the intake manifold and the intake manifold collector (lower). Limit : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Procedures Brake Pad: Procedures Front FRONT DISC BRAKE On Board Inspection PAD WEAR INSPECTION - Inspect the thickness of the pad through the cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary. Rear REAR DISC BRAKE On Board Inspection PAD WEAR INSPECTION - Inspect the thickness of the pad through the cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary. Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Ignition Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4505 Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Daytime Running Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Locations Combination Switch: Locations CORNERING LAMP Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 792 a. Under the vehicle, tighten the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A) as shown to specification. b. Install the A/C pipe clamp (2) and tighten the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B). c. As necessary, reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3). d. Attach the other pipe support clip to the dash panel threaded stud. e. From the engine compartment, tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown to specification. Arrow Indicates Front CAUTION: - Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when tightening the fittings. 4. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold collector. 5. Check that there is sufficient clearance between the lower high/low pressure pipe and the front stabilizer bar. Adjust the lower high/low pressure pipe as necessary. 6. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and check the A/C system for leaks. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 7. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Removal And Installation For Low-Pressure Flexible Hose REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Procedures. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 2. Remove the engine under cover. 3. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to See: Locations. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Locations. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal And Installation For High/Low-Pressure Pipe REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure Pipe Wheel Bearing Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Wheel Bearing SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing Page 1885 Specifications Steering Wheel: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Steering Wheel Page 2497 ^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed. ^ C-III Security Card is installed. ^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still cable-connected to the vehicle. 1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect the VI to the vehicle. CAUTION 2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer. CAUTION 3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery: For Conventional Vehicles ^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate. NOTE: The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended. CAUTION For Hybrid Vehicles ^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station. ^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery. Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2300 - Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is heard. - After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with the electric fuel pump applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping. 2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections. Page 2061 Attachment General Procedure Page 1823 Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling. - Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. Page 2840 The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub. Page 4552 Console: Service and Repair Assembly CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY Assembly Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly Procedures Brake Master Cylinder: Procedures BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER On Board Inspection LEAK INSPECTION Check for leaking in the master cylinder installation surface, the reservoir tank installation surface, the reservoir hose connections, and the brake tube connections. Page 5088 Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures COMBINATION SWITCH CONSULT-III Function (BCM) CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be monitored. 6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Page 2327 Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. Page 2950 4. Tighten all flare nuts and connecting bolts to specification. Refer to See: Hydraulic Circuit. 5. Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. 6. Bleed air from the brake system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 1317 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets (no picture shown). NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in Page 4134 Page 2491 Locations Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 2256 The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. 1. Disconnect the tube clamp at the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube at the mass air flow sensor. 2. Separate the mass air flow sensor from the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. 3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and remove the air cleaner case (upper). 4. Remove the air cleaner filter. 5. Install a new air cleaner filter. 6. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Page 4841 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm assembly (5). Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Page 136 Page 5189 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR GLASS Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the inside seal. 8. Remove the door glass bolts. 9. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear end to pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR Removal Page 610 5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly. ^ Mount the top claws first. ^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13. ^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14. ^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level. IMPORTANT: Page 2546 7. Remove return spring. 8. While pushing the 2nd coast brake piston by hand, apply compressed air (4kg/cm2) into the oil passage as shown and remove 2nd coast brake piston. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the O-ring and 2nd coast brake piston. 9. Remove O-rings from 2nd coast brake piston. 10. Remove snap ring using suitable tool. 11. Remove 2nd brake flange, 2nd brake discs and 2nd brake plates. Page 3053 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 172 Service Procedure Check NATS On The Vehicle 1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0. a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2. ^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration procedure. b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2. Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST 2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model Year (see Figure 1). 3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5. b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4. 4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details" panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1). a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data update. After you do this, proceed with step 5. CAUTION: The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if necessary. b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM. Proceed with step 5. Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning 5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows: a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released. b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds. c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds. Locations Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Locations Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations - Install primary timing chain so the mating mark (punched) on camshaft sprocket is aligned with the yellow link on the timing chain, while the mating mark (notched) on the crankshaft sprocket is aligned with the gold link on the timing chain, as shown. - When it is difficult to align mating marks of the primary timing chain with each sprocket, gradually turn the camshaft using a wrench on the hexagonal portion to align it with the mating marks. Page 5131 - - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - Check filament. Refer to See: Filament Check. If filament is OK. Check the condition of the harness and the connector. If filament is NG. Repair filament. NG - Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER HARNESS 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rear window defogger relay. 3. Check continuity between rear window defogger relay connector B4 terminal 5 and rear window defogger connector D504 terminal +. 5 - + : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG - Repair or replace harness. Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Inspection REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Inspection 1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH OPERATION With CONSULT-III Check ("REAR DEF SW", "IGN ON SW") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT-III. Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between BCM connector ground. Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications CONNECTING ROD BEARING Undersize BEARING CLEARANCE Page 2016 Service and Repair Wiper Switch: Service and Repair FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Wiper and Washer Switch REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column covers. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Cover. 2. Remove wiper washer switch electrical connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Power Steering Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................... Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent. Page 3571 Tires: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Tire Page 5086 OK or NG OK - GO TO 4. NG - Check harness between BCM and combination switch for open or short circuit. 4.BCM OUTPUT TERMINAL INSPECTION 1. Turn lighting switch and wiper switch to OFF. 2. Set wiper dial to position 4. 3. Connect BCM and combination switch connectors. 4. Turn ignition switch ON, and check combination switch input (BCM output) terminal voltage waveform of suspect malfunctioning system. OK or NG OK - Open circuit in combination switch, GO TO 5. NG - Replace BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair. 5.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION Referring to table below, perform combination switch inspection. Page 4868 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 3342 SPECIAL TOOLS Hydraulic Circuit Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Hydraulic Circuit BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE Hydraulic Circuit Page 4644 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Page 3349 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Front Suspension Stabilizer Bar: Service and Repair Front Suspension STABILIZER BAR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Remove the steering gear bolts on the lower side. Refer to See: Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Support steering gear. 3. Disconnect the connecting rod end at the stabilizer bar using power tool. - Prevent the connecting rod from turning by inserting a hex wrench into the end of the ball stud, then remove nut. 4. Remove the two stabilizer bar clamps from the front suspension member. 5. Remove the stabilizer bar by withdrawing from side. Remove the two stabilizer bushings as necessary. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the stabilizer bar for deformation or cracks and replace if necessary. Page 1978 4. Search for the possible cause using CAN communication signal chart using information from the interview with the customer. NOTE: For the details of CAN communication signal, refer to See: Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Trouble Diagnosis/CAN Communication Signal Chart. a. ABS warning lamp turned ON and speedometer did not move: This means that "ABS warning lamp signal" and "Vehicle speed signal" could not communicate between M&A; and ABS (4-a in the figure below). b. The tachometer moved normally: This means that "Engine speed signal" could communicate normally between ECM and M&A; (4-b in the figure below). Page 759 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Locations Impact Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Page 2406 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 533 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 2558 DESCRIPTION Page 2483 Page 1723 - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling. - Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Page 3946 - If equipped with VDC, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning for steering angle sensor adjustment. - After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. CAUTION: The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct position. - With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position. Page 858 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets (no picture shown). NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in Page 1373 CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when setting the Tool. b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt so that there is a 10 mm (0.39 in) gap between bolt and crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Keep loosened crankshaft pulley bolt in place to protect the crankshaft pulley from dropping. c. Position a suitable tool at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to remove crankshaft pulley. CAUTION: Do not use a puller claw on the outside edge of the crankshaft pulley. 24. Disconnect the oil pressure switch harness connector. 25. Disconnect valve timing control harness connector. 26. Remove the Bank 1 (RH) (A) and Bank 2 (LH) (B) IVT control valve covers. - Loosen the IVT control valve cover bolts in the reverse order as shown. CAUTION: The shaft in the IVT control valve cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the IVT control valve cover by pulling straight out until the IVT control valve cover disengages from the camshaft sprocket. - A: Bank 1 (Conventional RH bank) - B: Bank 2 (Conventional LH bank) - C: Dowel pin hole 27. Remove the A/C idler pulley and bracket and the drive belt auto-tensioner. 28. If necessary, remove the idler pulley and water pump cover. 29. Remove the front timing chain case. Page 4005 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 1975 Past Error -- Open Circuit -- Review CAN communication signal chart based on information received from the interview with the customer and on past error information from SELF-DIAG RESULTS and CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR. 1. SELF-DIAG RESULTS: Inspect the control units indicating "U1000" or "U1001" on SELF-DIAG RESULTS. Page 1724 Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. Page 1341 Page EM-11 Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedure Timing Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedure Classification: EM10-001 Reference: NTB10-046 Date: March 19, 2010 ALTIMA, MAXIMA, AND QUEST; REVISED VQ35 ENGINE TIMING CHAIN PROCEDURES APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Altima (L31) - VQ35DE engine ONLY 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2009 Quest (V42) SERVICE INFORMATION Removal and installation procedures for the VQ35 engine front timing chain case and timing chains (primary and secondary) have been updated to no longer require removal of the rocker covers and intake collector. In addition, new removal and installation procedures have been added for the timing chain tensioners (primary and secondary) and secondary timing chain tensioner shoe. The updated procedures are available via hyperlink in this bulletin (see below). Nissan Service Manuals for 2004-2006 Altima, 2004-2008 Maxima, and 2004-2009 Quest vehicles will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible. Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown below for any VQ35 engine front timing chain case, timing chain, or timing chain tensioner-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle. Page 991 Towing Information: Service and Repair Vehicle Recovery TOW TRUCK TOWING Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) Front Use the towing hook only, not other parts of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged. - Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only the towing hook. - The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle. - Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. Rear Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. - Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems. - Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at an angle. - Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. Page 402 4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. 9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. - Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. Page 2717 Page 4826 The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION maintenance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilometers). Select the "Reset" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button. Displaying the maintenance notice reminder Select the "Display Maintenance Notification" key and press the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically at the set maintenance interval. The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met: - The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition key is turned OFF - The ignition key is turned ON the next time the vehicle will be driven. To return to the previous display after the MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press the BACK button. The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the following conditions are met: - "Reset" key is selected. - "Display Maintenance Notification" is set OFF. - The maintenance interval is set again. HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed, the SETTINGS screen will appear on the display. You can select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle. Move the joystick and press the ENTER button to select each item to be set. System settings Select the "System Settings" key by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER button. The SYSTEM SETTINGS menu will be displayed. Locations Trailer Lighting Module: Locations TRAILER TOW Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4411 1. Check to see if the 2 clips have come unattached from the sliding door welt. ^ If the clips are missing replace the door welt and proceed to step 2. ^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt by inserting the clips into the 2 holes located on the door welt, then proceed to step 2. 2. Prepare the surface by applying 3M(TM) Automotive Adhesion Promoter or equivalent on the door welt and sliding door panel. 3. Apply 3M(TM) Acrylic Plus Tape or equivalent to the area as shown in Figure 2. ^ Tape size 5 mm x 20 mm x 1 mm (0.19 in x 0.78 in x 0.039 in) 4. Firmly press the door welt onto the sliding door panel. ^ Make sure the clips are securely inserted into the 2 holes located on the sliding door panel. 5. Check to make sure this issue has been resolved. Page 436 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 4900 LT-INT/L-03 Locations Trailer Lighting Module: Locations TRAILER TOW Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Service and Repair Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation REMOVAL Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4422 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 1856 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 2213 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >>Go to See: Ignition System/Description and Operation/Ignition Signal. NG >>GO TO 8. 8.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF. 3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop approximately 0 V. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 13. NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)-GO TO 9. NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.) >>GO TO 11. 9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >>GO TO 10. NG >>GO TO 11. 10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 18. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis Classification: EM09-013 Reference: NTB10-002 Date: January 12, 2010 DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan IF YOU CONFIRM There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s), ACTION Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any repairs performed. Page 733 Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Fuel Level Sender Unit Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm assembly (5). Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Page 4325 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly FRONT DOOR LOCK Disassembly and Assembly DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY Remove the key cylinder escutcheon pawl and remove the door key cylinder. Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 609 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Page 1891 2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon 3. Select System Diagnosis Page 4760 Cruise Control: Electrical Diagrams ASCD Brake Switch ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Wiring Diagram EC-ASCBOF-01 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Never use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Crankshaft Sprocket Page 1488 Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 1236 Page EM-19 Page 483 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Classification: EL09-014 Reference: NTB09-036 Date: April 27, 2009 IPDM SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM SERVICE INFORMATION The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly. The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses. ^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays. ^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed. ^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable". CAUTION: NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM. Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle. Such incidents may include: ^ Headlights inoperative. ^ Radiator fan inoperative ^ Fog lamps inoperative ^ Wiper inoperative Page 2987 Other Inspections Check shoe sliding surface for excessive wear and damage. - Check anti-rattle pin for excessive wear and corrosion. - Check return spring for sagging. - Check that adjuster moves smoothly. - Check either visually or with a vernier caliper to see if there is any excessive wear, cracks, or damage inside the drum. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Exploded View and apply brake grease to the specified points during installation. - There is a difference between the adjusters orientation from left and right. Assemble the adjuster so the threaded part expands when rotating it in the direction shown by the arrow. - Shorten adjuster by rotating it. - When disassembling the adjuster, apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone based grease to the threads. - After replacing brake shoes or disc rotors, or if brakes do not function well, perform break-in operation as follows. 1. Adjust the parking brake pedal stroke to the specified stroke. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. 2. Perform break-in (drag run) operation by driving the vehicle under the following conditions: Drive the vehicle forward. - Maintain vehicle speed at approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) keeping it constant in forward direction. - Apply the parking brake at an operating force of approximately 147 N (15 kg-f, 33 lb-f) with constant force. - Release the parking brake after approximately 10 seconds. 3. After break-in operation, check lever stroke of the parking brake. Readjust if it is no longer at the specified stroke. To prevent the lining from getting too hot, allow a cool off period of approximately 5 minutes after every break-in operation. - Do not perform excessive break-in operations, because it may cause uneven or early wear of the lining. Page 4462 ^ Bolt A (shown in Figure 1 above) will need to be removed. NOTE: You may not need to completely remove the lower finisher. Unclipping the top and pulling it back may give you enough access. 2. Check bolt "B" (see Figure 1). ^ If bolt B is loose or missing, replace it with a new one. ^ New bolt is listed in the parts information. ^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of the new bolt and torque bolt to 5.7 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 51 in-lb) NOTE: If bolt B is missing, make sure to find the missing bolt and remove it from the vehicle. The missing bolt, if left loose in the passenger compartment, could cause a rattle. 4. Reassemble all parts in reverse order. ^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of bolt A and torque bolt to 15.2 N·m (1.6 kg-m, 11 ft-lb). 5. Make sure the power back door motor works correctly with no abnormal noise. ^ Cycle the power back door (open and close) 5 times. Page 2215 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 16. NG >>GO TO 15. 15.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors F14, E5 - Harness for open or short between ECM and ground >>Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 16.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis For Intermittent Incident/Description See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis For Intermittent Incident/Diagnosis Procedure. OK or NG OK >>Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Description and Operation/System Description. NG >>Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 4564 REMOVAL 1. Disconnect both negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least 3 minutes. 2. Remove sun visor assemblies. - Disconnect harness from each sun visor assembly. 3. Remove sun visor holders. 4. Remove front roof console assembly. Disconnect harnesses from sunroof switch assembly. Page 3422 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Air Bleeding Hydraulic System POWER STEERING FLUID Bleeding Hydraulic System 1. Raise the front end of vehicle until the wheels are clear of the ground. 2. Add Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent into the steering fluid reservoir tank to the specified level. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. Then quickly turn the steering wheel fully to right and left and lightly touch steering stoppers. Repeat steering wheel operation until the fluid level no longer decreases. 3. Start the engine then repeat step 2 above. Incomplete air bleeding will cause the following symptoms: Air bubbles in reservoir tank - Clicking noise in oil pump - Excessive buzzing in oil pump If this happens, bleed out the air repeating step 2 above. Fluid noise may occur in the valve or oil pump. This is common when the vehicle is stationary or while turning the steering wheel slowly. This does not affect the performance or durability of the system. Revolution Sensor Replacement Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Revolution Sensor Replacement ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Revolution Sensor Replacement 1. Remove intake air duct. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt. Page 3671 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Procedures Power Steering Pump: Procedures POWER STEERING OIL PUMP On-Vehicle Service CHECKING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Before starting, check belt tension, driving pulley and tire pressure. 1. Set Tool. Open shut-off valve. Then bleed air. Refer to See: Power Steering Fluid/Service and Repair/Checking Fluid Level. Tool numbers : KV48103500 (J-26357 and J-26357-10), KV48102500 (J-33914) 2. Run engine at idle speed or 1,000 rpm. Make sure temperature of fluid in tank rises to 60° - 80°C (140° - 176°F). WARNING: Warm up engine with shut-off valve fully opened. If engine is started with shut-off valve closed, fluid pressure in oil pump increases to maximum. This will raise oil temperature abnormally. 3. Check pressure with steering wheel fully turned to left and right positions with engine idling at 1,000 rpm. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds. Oil pump maximum standard pressure : 8,800 kPa (89.76 kg/cm2, 1,276 psi) - If pressure reaches maximum operating pressure, system is OK. - If pressure increases above maximum operating pressure, check power steering pump flow control valve. Refer to See: Specifications. 4. If power steering pressure is below the maximum operating pressure, slowly close shut-off valve and check pressure again. CAUTION: Do not close shut-off valve for more than 15 seconds. If pressure increases to maximum operating pressure, gear is damaged. Refer to See: Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. - If pressure remains below maximum operating pressure, pump is damaged. Refer to See: Removal and Replacement/Removal and Installation. 5. After checking hydraulic system, remove Tool and add fluid as necessary. Then completely bleed air out of system. Refer to See: Power Steering Fluid/Service and Repair/Checking Fluid Level. Component Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2601 Shift Interlock Cable: Service and Repair Installation KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Installation 1. Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder. 2. Turn ignition key to lock position. 3. Set selector lever to P position. 4. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder. 5. Install casing cap to bracket. 6. Move slider in order to secure adjuster holder to interlock rod. Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4526 1. Adjust the seat so you have access to the armrest bolt cover. 2. Remove the armrest bolt cover. ^ Use a plastic trim tool. 3. Remove bolt and armrest. 4. Push the insert out of the armrest as shown in Figure 3 and 4 using a suitable tool. Procedures Steering Gear: Procedures On-Vehicle Service POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE On-Vehicle Service CHECKING STEERING GEAR Check gear housing and boots for looseness and damage. - Check gear housing and boots for fluid leakage. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Fluid Leakage. - Check connection with steering column for looseness. - Prior to removing the steering gear from the vehicle, check rack sliding force. Refer to "Checking rack sliding force". - If rack sliding force is not within specification, adjust rack sliding force. Refer to See: Adjustment Of Rack Sliding Force. CHECKING STEERING LINKAGE Check ball joint, and other component parts for looseness, wear, and damage. CHECKING GEAR HOUSING MOVEMENT 1. Check the movement of steering gear housing during stationary steering on a dry paved surface. Apply a force of 49 N (5 kg-f, 11 lb-f) to steering wheel to check the gear housing movement. Turn off ignition key while checking. Movement of gear housing : ±2 mm (±0.08 in) or less 2. If movement exceeds the limit, replace or repair as necessary. CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE 1. Disconnect steering column lower joint and knuckle arms from the gear. 2. Start and run engine at idle to make sure steering fluid has reached normal operating temperature. 3. Using a suitable spring gauge, pull tie-rod slowly to move it from neutral position to ±11.5 mm (±0.453 in) at speed of 3.5 mm (0.138 in)/s. Check that rack sliding force is within specification. Refer to See: Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And Linkage. Adjustment Of Rack Sliding Force POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE Adjustment of Rack Sliding Force DECREASE Decrease rack sliding force as follows: 1. Loosen adjusting screw two rotations counterclockwise. CAUTION: Do not remove adjusting screw. - Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw is removed or loosened more than two rotations. Page 1351 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: f‘~ STACK: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Page 2454 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection A/T INDICATOR A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate 1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. Select "METER/M&A;" on CONSULT-III. 2. Using "DATA MONITOR", confirm each indication while operating the shift lever. NOTE: If more than one input is ON, A/T indicator will enter fail-safe function and the display will turn off. OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - GO TO 2. 2.CHECK TCM Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures. OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC. Page 4105 e. A "Basic Features" list showing specific phone features and "Compatibility" for each feature will be displayed. f. Use this list to determine if the customer's concern(s) relates to any of the listed features. g. If the feature related to the customer's concern(s) shows as "N" (not compatible): ^ STOP YOUR DIAGNOSIS HERE. ^ Do NOT perform any further diagnosis for this incident. ^ Do NOT perform any repairs for this incident. ^ Do NOT replace any parts for this incident. ^ The customer concern(s) cannot be addressed due the phone's feature(s) being incompatible. ^ If the customer still wants the feature(s) to function, they will need to get an approved phone showing the feature(s) as "Y" (compatible) in the "Basic Features" list. h. If the feature related to the customer's concern(s) shows as "Y" (compatible), perform diagnosis in the applicable section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Quick Reference QUICK REFERENCE Poor Sound Quality 1. If a customer concern of poor sound quality is verified, in the vehicle and / or "land" side (other end of the call), perform the following steps. ^ Have the customer lower the in-vehicle phone volume by using the audio system volume control. NOTE: Lowering the in-vehicle phone volume improves noise canceling performance. Speaker Adaptation 1. If a customer concern related to Voice Recognition is verified: a. Verify the vehicle you are working on has Speaker Adaptation feature. Page 1383 - When handling camshaft sprocket (INT), be careful of the following: CAUTION: - Handle carefully to avoid any shock to camshaft sprocket. - Do not disassemble. (Do not loosen bolts (A) as shown). NOTE: For removal of timing chain tensioner (secondary), refer to Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner). [Removing camshaft bracket (No. 1) is required.] Inspection Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 5108 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Automatic Air Conditioner REFRIGERANT Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 900 ± 50 g (1.98 ± 0.11 lb) Manual Air Conditioner REFRIGERANT Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 900 ± 50 g (1.98 ± 0.11 lb) Page 2448 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 5073 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Classification: EL09-014 Reference: NTB09-036 Date: April 27, 2009 IPDM SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM SERVICE INFORMATION The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly. The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses. ^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays. ^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed. ^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable". CAUTION: NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM. Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle. Such incidents may include: ^ Headlights inoperative. ^ Radiator fan inoperative ^ Fog lamps inoperative ^ Wiper inoperative Page 1814 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Before starting engine, check the levels of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of engine coolant, engine oil, working fluid, fuel and exhaust gas. - Bleed air from passages in pipes and tubes of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. - After cooling down engine, again check amounts of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items: Page 58 Repair Flow Chart Page 1119 Engine Oil: Service and Repair ENGINE OIL Changing Engine Oil WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot. - Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface, then start the engine to warm up the oil. 2. Check for oil leaks from the engine. 3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Remove the oil drain plug and oil filler cap. 5. Drain the engine oil. 6. Install the oil pan drain plug. Oil pan drain plug : Refer to See: Oil Pan/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Clean the oil pan drain plug and install using a new washer. 7. Refill the engine with new engine oil. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. CAUTION: The refill oil capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. - Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. 8. Warm up the engine and check the oil pan drain plug and oil filter for oil leaks. 9. Stop engine and wait at least 10 minutes. 10. Check engine oil level. Refer to See: . Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations WARNING CHIME Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4246 Navigation Module: Locations Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 796 b. Hand tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown. - Arrow Indicates Front c. Hand tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. d. Install the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) to the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. e. Attach the high/low pressure pipe to the A/C support clip (secured to the dash panel threaded stud). f. Tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown to specification. 3. Complete the installation of the lower high/low pressure pipe. CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections. - Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones. - Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil. a. Under the vehicle, tighten the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A) as shown to specification. b. Install the A/C pipe clamp (2) and tighten the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B). c. As necessary, reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3). d. Attach the other pipe support clip to the dash panel threaded stud. Page 2978 Parking Brake Control: Specifications Parking Drum Brake SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Parking Drum Brake Page 1585 Page 3798 Rear A/C CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or around the connection. Page 2121 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1340 Page EM-10 Page 2076 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 2360 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1683 Page 5111 ATC Blower Motor: Locations ATC Front Passenger Compartment TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 1571 Page 3278 Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction - When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. - When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF. Page 4074 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability Classification: EL09-014 Reference: NTB09-036 Date: April 27, 2009 IPDM SERVICE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM SERVICE INFORMATION The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly. The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses. ^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays. ^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed. ^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable". CAUTION: NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM. Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle. Such incidents may include: ^ Headlights inoperative. ^ Radiator fan inoperative ^ Fog lamps inoperative ^ Wiper inoperative Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Page 2562 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Oil Filter: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Classification: EM07-001D Reference: NTB07-042D Date: May 25, 2010 MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY 2004-2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Courtesy Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview How To Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis INTERIOR ROOM LAMP How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis 1. Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. 2. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to See: Description and Operation. 3. Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to See: Preliminary Check. 4. Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. 5. Does the interior room lamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. 6. Inspection End. Preliminary Check INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Preliminary Check SWITCH INSPECTION Ensure lamps on demand switch is in the DOOR or ON position. BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Page 2060 Page 1877 Page 3037 The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub. Page 1141 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets (no picture shown). NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in Page 940 Always replace the seal after every disassembly. 3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification. NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel. Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb) 4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Page 372 Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 788 3. Reposition the coolant reservoir tank aside. 4. Reposition the power steering fluid reservoir aside. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Procedures. 6. Remove the high-pressure pipe. Refer to See: Locations. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Locations. CAUTION: - Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal And Installation For High/Low-Pressure Pipe REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure Pipe REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. WARNING: Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose and throat. - If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming removal. 2. Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the ECM from the cowl top extension and reposition it out of the way. 4. Remove the two heater pump clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater pump out of the way. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Heater Core/Service and Repair/Heater Pump. 5. Disconnect the heater hose clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater hose out of the way. 6. Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System. 7. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 8. Carefully cut the high pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown. CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe. A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut. - Do not allow debris to fall into the cut ends of the pipe. Page 5115 GW-DEF-03 Page 3971 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both terminals and wait at least three minutes. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 3. Remove center console lower cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 4. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 5. Remove bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts. - Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to make sure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one. - Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/CONSULT-III Function (Air Bag). Page 3057 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2000 CAN System (Type 2) TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CAN System (Type 2) DIAGNOSIS SHEET Page 762 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Page 5076 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 4121 Page 1345 Page EM-15 Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations WARNING CHIME Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2089 f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13. ^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens. g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14. h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15. ^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes. Page 4958 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Page 1204 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets (no picture shown). NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in Page 2412 Page 2428 - Do not drop or shock spark plug. If spark plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used. Checking and adjusting spark plug gap is not required between change intervals. Spark plug gap (nominal) : 1.1 mm (0.043 in) INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions. Refer to See: Maintenance. - The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Frequent engine starts - Low ambient temperatures - The cold type spark plug is suitable when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Extended highway driving - Frequent high engine revolution. Front Suspension Alignment: Specifications Front Suspension Wheel Alignment Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) Wheelarch Height SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) Description and Operation Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed for both the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat. It operates simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level. When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level occurs, seat belt slack resulting from clothing or other factors is immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle passengers are securely restrained. When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and the restraining force of the seat belt exceeds a specified level, the load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt web tension while maintaining force. Page 370 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 2503 20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer. CAUTION: During data transfer: ^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections. ^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF. ^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal. NOTE: ^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or ^ The Error in Figure 9A displays. a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged. b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned OFF (see step 3 and 4). c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1). Part 2 Page 812 ^ Blue LLC one quart concentrate: P/N 999MP - L255QTP > The one quart concentrate containers are intended for extreme cold weather application. > Use the concentrate without mixing (do not add water). > Add directly to the cooling system in specific amounts as directed on the container label. Additional Information for using Blue LLC Blue LLC and Green-colored Nissan LLC (P/N 999MP-AF000P) are compatible with each other: ^ Blue can be mixed/added with Green ^ Green can be mixed/added with Blue CAUTION: ^ Adding Green LLC to Blue LLC will reduce/shorten the life expectancy of the Blue LLC to that of the Green LLC (4 years / 60,000 miles). ^ LLC must always be used with demineralized or distilled water, otherwise the life expectancy of the LLC (Blue or Green) will be degraded and cooling system damage may occur. Page 3214 Component Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Component PARKING BRAKE CONTROL Component Page 4241 Collision Avoidance Module: Service and Repair REAR SONAR SYSTEM Sonar Control Unit REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair to gain access to sonar control unit. 2. Disconnect electrical connector then remove sonar control unit. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1433 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUG Page 5082 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1799 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUG Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Timing Chain Tensioner: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Classification: EM07-001D Reference: NTB07-042D Date: May 25, 2010 MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY 2004-2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1749 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 2251 Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. Page 4132 Cellular Phone: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures TELEPHONE Bluetooth Control Unit Self-Diagnosis Function The Bluetooth control unit has two diagnostic checks. The first diagnostic check is performed automatically every ignition cycle during control unit initialization. The second diagnostic check is performed by the technician using the steering wheel audio control switches prior to trouble diagnosis. BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT INITIALIZATION CHECKS Internal control unit failure - Bluetooth antenna connection open or shorted - Steering wheel audio control switches (SEND/END) stuck closed - Vehicle speed pulse count - Microphone connection test (with playback to operator) - Bluetooth inquiry check STARTING THE DIAGNOSTIC MODE 1. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON. 2. Wait for the Bluetooth system to complete initialization and the Bluetooth ON indicator to stop flashing. This may take up to 10 seconds. 3. Press and hold the steering wheel audio control switch SEND button for at least 5 seconds. The Bluetooth system will begin to play a verbal prompt. 4. While the prompt is playing, momentarily press both the steering wheel audio control switches SEND and END buttons simultaneously. The Bluetooth system will sound a 5 second beep. 5. While the beep is sounding, momentarily press both the steering wheel audio control switches SEND and END buttons simultaneously again. 6. The Bluetooth system has now entered into the diagnostic mode. Results of the diagnostic checks will be verbalized to the technician by the system. Service and Repair Sliding Door Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair DOOR FINISHER Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR Removal 1. Release clip and remove front corner cover. 2. Remove screw cover then screw from cup of power window and door lock/unlock switch assembly. 3. Remove power window and door lock/unlock switch assembly. Release clip and disconnect harness connectors. 4. Remove memory seat/fuel door release switch assembly. Release clip and disconnect harness connectors. 5. Remove step light. Release tab and disconnect harness connectors. 6. Remove door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from door handle assembly. Release clips and remove door lock cable and door handle cable. Refer to See: Front Door/Locations See: Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair. 7. Remove screws and front door release handle from front door finisher. Page 1468 2. If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side. 3. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode. 4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter. Tool number : KV991J0070 (J-45695) 5. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed position. Use Specified engine coolant or equivalent. Refer to See: Maintenance. 6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification. Compressed air supply pressure : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2, 80 - 120 psi) CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. 7. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose. Page 1902 18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM. The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to use. 19. Select Next NOTE: If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with Reprogramming. Specifications Power Steering Pump: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Power Steering Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Engine Oil: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Classification: EM07-001D Reference: NTB07-042D Date: May 25, 2010 MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY 2004-2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Removal And Installation For Condenser Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Removal And Installation For Condenser REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Condenser REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 2. Remove the radiator. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator. 3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. 5. Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor. 6. Carefully release retaining clips located on top driver side of condenser and rotate the condenser out of its mounts as shown. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Component. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 3213 Page 1689 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 408 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3785 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the side cover. 3. Remove the front heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new front heater core. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR HEATER CORE Removal 1. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. 4. Remove the rear heater core bracket. 5. Remove the rear heater core. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3233 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Service and Repair Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation FRONT DOOR GLASS Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the inside seal. 8. Remove the door glass bolts. 9. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear end to pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR Removal Page 1307 INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe) REMOVAL 1. Remove the timing chains (secondary). 2. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe by evenly prying at base of shoe with suitable tool as shown. INSTALLATION 1. Install new secondary timing chain tensioner shoe using Tool (A) as shown. - Tighten the bolt until the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe is fully seated on the secondary timing chain tensioner. CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolt. Tool number : (J-50246) 2. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1519 3. Install the water pump. CAUTION: Do not allow cylinder block to interfere with the O-rings when installing the water pump. Check that timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged. - Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly. 4. Remove dust and foreign material completely from back side of chain tensioner and from installation area of rear timing chain case. 5. Turn the crankshaft pulley approximately 20° clockwise so that the timing chain on the timing chain tensioner side is loose. NOTE: When installing the timing chain tensioner, engine oil should be applied to the oil hole and tensioner. 6. Install the timing chain tensioner. 7. Remove the stopper pin. 8. Install chain tensioner and water pump cover. a. Before installing, remove all traces of sealant from mating surface of water pump cover and chain tensioner cover using a scraper. Also remove traces of sealant from the mating surface of the front cover. Page 1642 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4391 1. Remove sliding door finisher. Refer to See: Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove exterior door handle. 3. Disconnect sliding door lock assembly electrical connectors. 4. Remove sliding door lock assembly. Remove screws from front and rear latches. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SLIDING DOOR CABLE ASSEMBLY AND MOTOR Page 2667 7. Remove support bearing bolts using power tool, and pry drive shaft from transaxle. - Pry off drive shaft from transaxle. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Move joint up/down, left/right, and in axial direction. Check for any rough movement or significant looseness. - Check boot for cracks or other damage, and for grease leakage. - If damaged, disassemble drive shaft to verify damage, and repair or replace as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Refer to "Removal and Installation (Right Side)" for tightening torque. Install in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. - In order to prevent damage to differential side oil seal, place Tool "A" onto oil seal before inserting drive shaft as shown. Slide drive shaft into slide joint and tap with a hammer to install securely. Tool number : KV38106800 (J-34297) - Install new circlip on drive shaft in the circular clip groove on transaxle side. Refer to See: Disassembly And Assembly (Left Side). CAUTION: Make sure the new circlip on the drive shaft is securely fastened. - After its insertion, try to pull the flange out of the slide joint by hand. If it pulls out, the circlip is not properly meshed with the transaxle side gear. IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Fuse: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 3644 1. Remove the interior trim panel as necessary that contains the grille to be removed. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair or See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the grille from the interior trim panel. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1579 Page 2409 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 772 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6 Locations Headlamp Relay: Locations IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4642 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 4405 1. Check to see if the 2 clips have come unattached from the sliding door welt. ^ If the clips are missing replace the door welt and proceed to step 2. ^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt by inserting the clips into the 2 holes located on the door welt, then proceed to step 2. 2. Prepare the surface by applying 3M(TM) Automotive Adhesion Promoter or equivalent on the door welt and sliding door panel. 3. Apply 3M(TM) Acrylic Plus Tape or equivalent to the area as shown in Figure 2. ^ Tape size 5 mm x 20 mm x 1 mm (0.19 in x 0.78 in x 0.039 in) 4. Firmly press the door welt onto the sliding door panel. ^ Make sure the clips are securely inserted into the 2 holes located on the sliding door panel. 5. Check to make sure this issue has been resolved. Page 793 REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. WARNING: Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose and throat. - If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming removal. 2. Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the ECM from the cowl top extension and reposition it out of the way. 4. Remove the two heater pump clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater pump out of the way. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Heater Core/Service and Repair/Heater Pump. 5. Disconnect the heater hose clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater hose out of the way. 6. Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System. 7. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 8. Carefully cut the high pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown. CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe. - A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut. - Do not allow debris to fall into the cut ends of the pipe. 9. Carefully cut the low pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as shown. CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe. - A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut. 10. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold collector to allow removal of the cut A/C pipes. 11. Disconnect the high pressure pipe connection (1), low pressure pipe connection (2), and the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) located near the RH front Page 2394 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 1491 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the side cover. 3. Remove the front heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new front heater core. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR HEATER CORE Removal 1. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. 4. Remove the rear heater core bracket. 5. Remove the rear heater core. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 3058 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 1984 Driver Seat Control Unit BCM NOTE: Replace the unit when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG". Front Air Control Service and Repair Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation REMOVAL Page 1382 After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will strike the pistons. 8. Remove crankshaft sprocket, if necessary. 9. Remove timing chain (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows: a. Attach stopper pin (B) to the right (A) and left (C) timing chain tensioners (secondary) (1). NOTE: - Use stopper pins included with Tool J-50246. b. Remove camshaft sprocket (INT and EXH) bolts. c. Remove the timing chains (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets (INT) and (EXH). - Turn camshaft slightly to secure slack of timing chain on timing chain tensioner (secondary) side. - Insert metal or resin plate [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] into guide between timing chain (secondary) and timing chain tensioner (secondary) plunger. Remove camshaft sprocket and timing chain (secondary) with timing chain removed from guide groove. CAUTION: Timing chain tensioner plunger can move while stopper pin is inserted in timing chain tensioner. Plunger can come out of tensioner when timing chain is removed. Use caution during removal. NOTE: Camshaft sprocket (INT) is a one piece integrated design with sprockets for timing chain (primary) and for timing chain (secondary). Locations Antenna: Locations AUDIO ANTENNA Location of Antenna Description and Operation Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 907 Fuse: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Fuse - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse. - Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. - Do not partially install fuse, always insert it into fuse holder properly. - Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Page 3635 Defroster Nozzle DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation DEFROSTER NOZZLE NOTE: Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B) Terminal Arrangement Page 4008 ^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times. 14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt. Page 2193 Refueling Vapor Recovery System: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) Component Inspection REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE With CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair. 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. c. Drain fuel using "FUEL PUMP RELAY" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. 4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [-13.3 kPa (-0.136 kg/cm2, -1.93 psi)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair. 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows: a. Remove fuel gauge retainer. b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. 3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. 4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [-13.3 kPa (-0.136 kg/cm2, -1.93 psi)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. Front Suspension Alignment: Service and Repair Front Suspension FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY Front Wheel Alignment DESCRIPTION NOTE: Before checking the front wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection (Unladen*). *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION Check the tires for wear and improper inflation. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Specifications. - Check the wheel runout. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Wheels/Testing and Inspection. - Check the front wheel bearings for looseness. Refer to See: Suspension/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle. - Check the front suspension for looseness. Refer to See: Suspension/Service and Repair/Procedures/Front Suspension Assembly. - Check the steering linkage for looseness. Refer to See: Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Procedures/On-Vehicle Service. - Check that the front shock absorbers work properly. - Check the vehicle height (posture) in the unladen condition. Refer to See: Suspension/Service and Repair/Procedures/Front Suspension Assembly. GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed. This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle. - The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is centered. - The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle. - The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level. 2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. - Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule. THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in this. Refer to See: Specifications. 1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators. - The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators may not be correct. - This may result in an ERROR. 2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method. - Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways. - See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information. CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION NOTE: Camber, caster and kingpin inclination are preset at factory and cannot be adjusted. 1. Measure the camber, caster and kingpin inclination of both the right and left wheels using attachment Tool and a suitable alignment gauge. Camber, caster and kingpin inclination : Refer to See: Specifications. Page 599 Page 2951 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear Brake Piping And Hose BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE Rear Brake Piping and Hose REMOVAL CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. - All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling. - Cover the open end of lines and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt. 1. Connect vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve. 2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal. 3. Remove flare nut connecting brake tube and hose, then withdraw lock spring. 4. Remove connecting bolt and disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Attach the brake hose to the brake tube and temporarily tighten the flare nut as much as possible by hand. 2. Attach the brake hose with a lock spring, then tighten the connecting bolt and flare nut using a torque wrench to specification. Refer to See: Hydraulic Circuit. Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Classification: BT07-032A Reference: NTB07-070A Date: September 25, 2009 SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009 Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly: ^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged ^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power ^ When the sunroof motor was changed ACTION Perform the following initialization procedure: 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. 3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position. 4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally. NOTE: If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information. Service and Repair Grille: Service and Repair FRONT GRILLE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Release the tabs attaching front grille to front bumper fascia, then remove front grille. NOTE: If equipped, remove the screws and remove the front license plate bracket from front bumper fascia. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1162 Engine Oil Pressure: Capacity Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit OIL PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE OIL PUMP OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Page 5173 Resetting After installing each component to the vehicle, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the door glass automatically to raise the door glass to the top position. Page 5104 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 3533 Wheel Bearing: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing (Rear) Page 2661 Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Dynamic Damper SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Damper Page 1445 - Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the valve lifter and camshaft. - Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later to determine the required replacement lifter size. 6. Turn crankshaft 240°. 7. Set No.3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 8. Check only those valves as shown. Page 1986 MONITOR ITEM LIST (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS) Display Control Unit NOTE: CAN diagnostic support monitor of the display control unit is indicated on the vehicle display. Refer to the following. Models with color display: Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Integrated Display System/CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display). - Models with navigation system: Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Navigation System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/CAN Communication Line Check. Data Sheet TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Data Sheet ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS COPY SHEET Page 3994 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Page 3365 > Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels > Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and inspections. 4. Check the target mounts. ^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11). NOTE: The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines. Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment. Locations Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Description and Operation Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 1933 DESCRIPTION System Description Heated Glass Element: Description and Operation System Description REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Schematic REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER System Description The rear window defogger system is controlled by BCM (body control module) and IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room). The rear window defogger operates only for approximately 15 minutes. Power is supplied at all times through 20A fuses (No. 32 and 37, located in the IPDM E/R) - to rear window defogger relay terminals 3 and 6 Page 686 - Do not drop or shock spark plug. If spark plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used. Checking and adjusting spark plug gap is not required between change intervals. Spark plug gap (nominal) : 1.1 mm (0.043 in) INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions. Refer to See: . - The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Frequent engine starts - Low ambient temperatures - The cold type spark plug is suitable when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Extended highway driving - Frequent high engine revolution. Page 3664 Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Page 2006 NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. Driver Seat Control Unit Branch Line Circuit TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Driver Seat Control Unit Branch Line Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Driver seat control unit - Harness connector B400 - Harness connector B37 - Harness connector B1 - Harness connector M11 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of driver seat control unit. 2. Check the resistance between the driver seat control unit harness connector terminals. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the driver seat control unit branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the driver seat control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Memory Positioning Systems/Description and Operation. OK or NG OK >> Present error: Replace the driver seat control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Memory Positioning Systems/Service and Repair. - Past error: Error was detected in the driver seat control unit branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. ECM Branch Line Circuit TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ECM Branch Line Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of ECM. 2. Check the resistance between the ECM harness connector terminals. Page 4173 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 966 7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem (see Figure 6). ^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7). Tire to Rim Slippage: ^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire may become un-balanced. ^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage. ^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry. ^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced. WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage Classification: FA10-006 Reference: NTB10-126 Date: October 21, 2010 WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise. NOTE: Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a warrantable repair If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows: 1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle. 2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands. 3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). 4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one. Page 1268 32. Remove all old Silicone RTV Sealant from all the bolt holes and bolts. CAUTION: Do not damage the threads or mating surfaces. 33. Use a scraper to remove all of the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the front timing chain case and opposite mating surfaces. CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces. INSTALLATION 1. Install dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up to a point close to taper in order to shorten protrusion length. 2. Install the new front oil seal on the front timing chain case. Apply new engine oil to the oil seal edges. NOTE: Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. a. Install the new front oil seal so that it becomes flush with the face with front timing chain case using suitable drift. Page 2388 Ignition Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 3726 2. Disconnect the rear air control (rear) electrical connector and remove the rear air control (rear). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 887 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair OIL Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor - Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) Oil Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the engine and set the following test conditions: Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm - A/C switch: On - Blower fan speed: Maximum position - Temperature control: Optional [set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F).] - Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes. Adjust the oil quantity according to the following table. Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system. Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement Page 1909 40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19. NOTE: For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF. ^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data. 41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42. 41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed. ^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service Manual (ESM) for this procedure. NOTE: If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle. IAVL can now be performed. 42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF. ^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs. Page 3683 MTC BLOWER MOTOR Component Front Blower Motor Rear Blower Motor Page 474 Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Ignition Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 2200 Page 1149 14. Remove the front drive shafts. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation (Left Side). 15. Remove the front suspension member. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension Member. 16. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensors and air flow ratio (A/F) sensors and remove the two three way catalysts manifold from the exhaust manifolds using power tool. Refer to See: Exhaust System/Service and Repair/Exploded View and See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair. 17. Remove the rear cover plate from the upper oil pan. 18. Loosen the lower oil pan bolts using power tool in order as shown. 19. Remove the lower oil pan. a. Insert Tool between the lower oil pan and the upper oil pan. - After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface using Tool and remove the liquid gasket sealing. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) - In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the Tool (1) where the Silicone RTV Sealant is applied. Use a plastic hammer to slide the Tool (2) by tapping on the side. CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed screwdriver is used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces. Page 4425 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 4247 Page 4424 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 1764 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Interior - Anti-Rattle Spring Falls Off 2nd Row Seats Seat Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Anti-Rattle Spring Falls Off 2nd Row Seats Classification: BT09-003 Reference: NTB09-034 Date: April 24, 2009 ANTI-RATTLE SPRING HAS FALLEN OFF THE LEFT AND / OR RIGHT 2ND ROW SEAT APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM The inner and/or outer anti-rattle spring has fallen off from the left and/or right 2nd row seat. AND The seat continues to latch and otherwise operate normally. ACTION Install a new anti-rattle spring. NOTE: Do not replace the seat assembly for this incident if it should occur. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. SERVICE PROCEDURE WARNING: Make sure to wear safety glasses when performing this Service Procedure. Page 3152 Fuse: Locations Fuse And Fusible Link Box FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX Terminal Arrangement Page 3643 FLOOR DISTRIBUTION DUCT Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct. 3. Remove the floor junction duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT EXTENSION Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 2. Remove the clip and remove the floor junction duct extension. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the floor duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR OVERHEAD DUCT Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the bolt and two clips, and remove the rear overhead duct. NOTE: The rear headliner duct connected to the rear overhead duct is part of the headlining trim panel and is replaced as an assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR FLOOR DUCT Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screw and clip, then remove the rear floor duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. GRILLES Removal Page 1172 - If removed, install the electric throttle control actuator bolts in the order as shown. Install gasket with three protrusions facing down. Electric throttle control actuator bolts : 8.4 N.m (0.86 kg-m, 74 in-lb) - Install the intake manifold collector (lower) bolts in the order as shown. Intake manifold collector (lower) bolts : 19.6 N.m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) Service and Repair Fluid Pan: Service and Repair ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Side cover REMOVAL 1. Remove engine under cover. 2. Drain ATF. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Changing A/T Fluid. 3. Remove side cover bolts and side cover. INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Automatic Transmission/Component. Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Oil Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Classification: EM07-001D Reference: NTB07-042D Date: May 25, 2010 MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY 2004-2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 1171 Limit : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) - If it exceeds the limit, replace the intake manifold collector (lower). INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After installation, it is necessary to re-calibrate the electric throttle control actuator as follows: 1. Perform the "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" when harness connector of the electric throttle control actuator is disconnected. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning. 2. Perform the "Idle Air Volume Learning" when the electric throttle control actuator is replaced. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning. - If removed, install power valve bolts in the order as shown. Power valve bolts : 19.6 N.m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) - If removed, tighten the intake manifold collector (upper) bolts in the order as shown. Intake manifold collector (upper) bolts : 19.6 N.m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) Page 4570 CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER Removal 1. Remove seat belt anchor. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 2. Remove front and rear kicking plates. 3. Remove center pillar lower finisher. Disconnect harness to power opening door switch. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Locations Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Page 52 - To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). - Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. Page 2033 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater Page 886 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Air Conditioner OIL Name ................................................................................................................................................... ............................... NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S Manual Air Conditioner OIL Name ................................................................................................................................................... ............................... NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S Drivetrain - Front Axle Clicking Noise On Acceleration Axle Shaft Assembly: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Front Axle Clicking Noise On Acceleration Classification: FA06-004B Reference: NTB06-085B Date: October 19, 2009 CLICKING NOISE FROM FRONT AXLES DURING TAKE-OFF/ACCELERATION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles, Parts Information, and Service Procedure sections have been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: An applied vehicle has a "clicking" noise coming from the front axles during take-off/acceleration. ACTION: Apply Molykote M77 grease (P/N 44003-7S000) to the front wheel drive shaft bearing surfaces. NOTE: Make sure to use the new torque specification for the axle nut: 200 Nm (147 ft-lb), instead of 125 Nm (92 ft-lb). IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove both front wheel drive shafts from the axle hubs. Refer to the FAX section of the applicable Service Manual for the removal procedure. Page 2221 Page 3887 REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim. Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Brake Fluid Type ....................................................................................................................... Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 4892 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Marker Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection Classification: EL03-030E Reference: NTB03-074E Date: January 4, 2010 EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been revised. Please discard all previous versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models SERVICE INFORMATION Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT due to a defect. The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not. All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed). ^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations" (warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp. ^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents. ^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense. ^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment. Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1. NOTE: This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location. Page 3760 INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the rear A/C pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 1276 - When handling camshaft sprocket (INT), be careful of the following: CAUTION: - Handle carefully to avoid any shock to camshaft sprocket. - Do not disassemble. (Do not loosen bolts (A) as shown). NOTE: For removal of timing chain tensioner (secondary), refer to Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner). [Removing camshaft bracket (No. 1) is required.] Inspection Page 3390 1. Turn the adjusting bolts in the same direction to calibrate. NOTE: Camber changes about 5' minutes with each graduation of the adjusting bolt. 2. Tighten adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to See: Suspension/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. TOE-IN Measure toe-in using following procedure. If out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts. WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. - Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce rear of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture. 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both tires at the same height of hub center. This mark is a measuring point. 4. Measure distance "A" (rear side). 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 turn). Page 2261 Service and Repair Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair REAR VIEW MONITOR Rear View Camera Control Unit REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the front passenger seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Removal And Installation. 3. Disconnect the rear view camera control unit connector. 4. Remove the screws (1) and remove the rear view camera control unit (2). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4339 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the door glass bolts. 8. Raise the door glass up into the door frame/channel and hold in place with a suitable tool (A). 9. Disconnect the harness connector for the regulator assembly. 10. Remove the regulator nuts, and remove the regulator assembly. Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. Wire wear - Regulator deformation The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". Door glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Disassembly 1. Remove the regulator motor bolts. 2. Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly. Assembly Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator nuts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the regulator motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the door glass. - Removal and installation of the door glass run. Page 1821 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. Component Locations Engine Control Module: Component Locations Engine Control Component Parts Location TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 3084 Battery: Removal and Replacement BATTERY Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery negative and positive terminals. CAUTION: When disconnecting, disconnect battery negative terminal first. 2. Remove battery frame nuts and battery frame. 3. Remove battery cover. 4. Remove battery. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: When connecting, connect battery positive terminal first. Reset electronic systems as necessary. Refer to See: Procedures/Required Procedures After Battery Disconnection. Service and Repair EGR Valve: Service and Repair EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine cover using power tool. 2. Remove air cleaner case (upper), mass air flow sensor, and air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube as an assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair. 3. Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign material. 4. Disconnect the EGR temperature sensor electrical connector and bracket. Page 1600 8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.) 9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.) 10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. 11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2). 12. Select Select. Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Locations Door Switch: Locations WARNING CHIME Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 758 PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor mechanism (see Figure 2). 2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2). CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip. Service and Repair Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair COOLING FAN Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove radiator. Refer to See: Radiator/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Perform this step when engine is cold. 2. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly from radiator. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Inspection. - Start and warm up engine. Visually inspect that there are no engine coolant or A/T fluid leaks. Page 956 Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment Page 3282 NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory. DATA MONITOR All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu Page 2498 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. ATC Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations ATC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 2733 Control Module: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 441 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater Procedures Transmission Cooler: Procedures A/T FLUID A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning Whenever an automatic transaxle is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator must be inspected and cleaned. Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can contaminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of A/T fluid. In either case, malfunction of the newly serviced A/T may result. Debris, if present, may build up as A/T fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris. A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE 1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses. 2. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses. 3. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the steel cooler tubes or bypass valve. NOTE: Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose remains on the tube fitting. 4. Allow any A/T fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into the oil pan. 5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose. CAUTION: Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. - Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation. - Avoid contact with eyes and skin. - Do not breath vapors or spray mist. 6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds. Page 537 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 699 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Before starting engine, check the levels of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of engine coolant, engine oil, working fluid, fuel and exhaust gas. - Bleed air from passages in pipes and tubes of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. - After cooling down engine, again check amounts of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items: Page 1258 Page EM-16 Page 3186 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119 Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure Classification: EM09-015 Reference: NTB10-009 Date: January 19, 2010 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube. NOTE: The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads may not be considered a warrantable expense. This procedure can be performed by two methods: Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed ^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle. ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed. Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed ^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle. ^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice. Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is performed on the vehicle. Service Procedure Rust Penetrant Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure: Locations Remote Control Module: Locations AUDIO Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Locations Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Page 3689 Page 1838 Body Control Module: Locations ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Locations Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection 1.FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION Check that the following fusible links or IPDM E/R fuses are not blown. OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Replace fuse or fusible link. 2.POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector E120 terminals 1, 2 and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness. 3.GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121 and E124. 2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121(A) terminal 60, E124(B) terminal 38 and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK - Inspection End. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R ground circuit harness. Page 1859 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 2008 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). IPDM E/R - Harness connector E25 - Harness connector M90 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of IPDM E/R. 2. Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R harness connector terminals. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the IPDM E/R branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the IPDM E/R. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview. OK or NG OK >> Present error: Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. - Past error: Error was detected in the IPDM E/R branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. Main Line Between TCM And Data Link Connector TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Main Line Between TCM and Data Link Connector INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector E26 - Harness connector M91 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the harness connectors E26 and M91. 2. Check the continuity between the TCM harness connector and the harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the main line between the TCM and the harness connector E26. Component Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 287 The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub. Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info. Trailer Lamps: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info. Classification: EL03-043H Reference: NTB04-049H Date: April 13, 2011 TRAILER LIGHT WIRING This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard previous versions of this is bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES SERVICE INFORMATION NOTE: This bulletin provides information to be shared with all affected customers. ^ This TSB contains the appropriate hookup points for connecting a trailer light wiring harness to the towing vehicle's electrical system. ^ The wiring diagrams contained in this bulletin are for Nissan vehicles that have trailer towing capability (see the owners manual) but do not have a Genuine Nissan accessory towing kit (with wiring) available. Page 2004 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the combination meter branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Combination Meter/Power Supply And Ground Circuit Inspection. OK or NG OK >> Present error: Replace the combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. - Past error: Error was detected in the combination meter branch line. NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. Data Link Connector Branch Line Circuit TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Data Link Connector Branch Line Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check the resistance between the data link connector terminals. OK or NG OK >> Present error: Check the following items again. - Decision of CAN system type. - Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included)]. - Not copied from on-board diagnosis. - Procedure for detecting root cause. - Past error: Error was detected in the data link connector branch line circuit. NG >> Repair the data link connector branch line. Display Control Unit Branch Line Circuit TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Display Control Unit Branch Line Circuit INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG Page 1605 21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete. NOTE: If you can't print the above screen: a. Select the Print icon. b. Select Save. c. Select OK. A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC. NOTE: If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in the following file location: At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start. Page 4856 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Locations Horn Relay: Locations ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Page 3806 2. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 3. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to See: Component. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Component. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. MTC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Procedures. 2. Remove the engine under cover. 3. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to See: Locations. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Locations. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. ATC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe REMOVAL 1. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. 2. Remove the windshield washer fluid bottle filler neck. 3. Reposition the coolant reservoir tank aside. 4. Reposition the power steering fluid reservoir aside. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 6. Remove the high-pressure pipe. Refer to See: Component. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Component. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. MTC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe REMOVAL 1. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. 2. Remove the windshield washer fluid bottle filler neck. Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Timing Cover Loosely install the front timing chain case bolts. - Tighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. - Retighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. Page 815 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Coolant Type ............................................................ 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent, 50% Distilled or Demineralized Water. Locations Starter Relay: Locations IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1879 Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Intake Air Temperature Sensor Page 2887 align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only) for installation. - Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). - Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check brake pedal for following items. Clevis pin deformation - Crack of any welded portion - Brake pedal bent or damaged INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the brake pedal. - If equipped, check the brake pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the brake pedal forward or backward. - After installing the brake pedal assembly, adjust as necessary. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Locations Trailer Lighting Module: Locations TRAILER TOW Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 166 27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example). 28. Select Select 29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example). 30. Select Confirm Page 4851 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 5028 Page 1556 The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs. NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair. 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following: ^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube. ^ Separated / missing band clamp(s). ^ Weld separation(s). 3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040 inch) space. ^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair. 4. If a weld or band clamp is separated, or the band clamp is missing, install new band clamps as needed. ^ For band clamp(s) location, refer to the pictures below that applies to your vehicle. Page 4758 Page 2969 3. Holding down the piston with the stopper cap, push the stopper cap tabs so they are firmly into the cylinder grooves, then attach the stopper cap. CAUTION: Do not reuse the stopper cap. 4. Apply brake fluid to the grommets and attach to the cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse the grommets. 5. Place master cylinder assembly is a vise as described in disassembly step 2. 6. Install the reservoir tank pin so that the pin is evenly seated on both sides of the reservoir, using a suitable tool [commercial service tool: diameter approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)]. CAUTION: Do not reuse reservoir tank grommets and pin. 7. If necessary, install brake fluid level switch. WITH VDC MODELS Disassembly 1. Place the side flange of cylinder body with chamfering around the pin insertion hole facing up, and firmly set master cylinder assembly in a vise. CAUTION: When setting the master cylinder assembly with the vise, be sure not to over-tighten. - When securing with a vise, use copper plates or cloth to protect the flange. Page 1150 20. Remove the four upper oil pan to transaxle bolts. 21. Remove the upper oil pan. a. Loosen the bolts in the order as shown, using power tool. b. Insert a suitable tool into the notch (1) of the upper oil pan as shown. c. Pry off the upper oil pan by moving the suitable tool up and down (2) as shown. 22. Remove the O-ring seals from the bottom of the cylinder block and oil pump housing, use new O-rings for installation. 23. Remove front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket. 24. Remove the oil strainer. Page 830 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Checking A/T Fluid A/T FLUID Checking A/T Fluid 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Check for any transaxle fluid leaks. 3. Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperature using the "COLD" range on the A/T fluid level gauge. a. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set parking brake. b. Start the engine and move the transaxle selector lever through each gear position. Leave the selector lever in the "P" park position. c. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. CAUTION: Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge. d. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint-free paper. e. Re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge into the charging pipe as far as it will go. f. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the reading. If the reading is at or below the low side of the range, add the necessary specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe and then re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge. CAUTION: Do not overfill the transaxle. - Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while driving. 4. Drive the vehicle for approximately 5 minutes at moderate speeds. Page 3185 Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R Page 4550 Console: Service and Repair Disassembly CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY Disassembly 1. Remove center console. Refer to See: Removal. 2. Remove front bin assembly. 3. Remove rear console trim cover. 4. Remove RH and LH console side trim panels. 5. Remove storage bin door assembly. Page 2804 Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Locations Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Specifications Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Mass Air Flow Sensor Component Locations EGR Temperature Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 275 Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Locations Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 3098 Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF", - doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, - pedals are not depressed, and - parking brake is released. Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. - A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. Page 1892 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 2935 Cylinder Body CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. Check inner wall of cylinder for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace cylinder body. - Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface with a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston CAUTION: Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper. Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Check that there is no wear, damage, or cracks in the sliding pin bolts and sliding pin boots, and if there are, replace them. ASSEMBLY 1. Apply a rubber grease to the piston seal and attach to cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston seals. 2. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot cylinder-side lip into the cylinder body groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston boot. 3. Apply a brake fluid to the piston, insert into the cylinder body by hand and firmly attach the piston boot piston-side lip into the piston boot. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. Page 4907 - to key switch terminal 1, and - through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to BCM terminal 57, and - through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box) - to BCM terminal 70. When the key is inserted in key switch, power is supplied through the key switch terminal 2 - to BCM terminal 37. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)] - to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied to BCM terminal 67 - through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When the front door LH is opened, ground is supplied to BCM terminal 47 - through front door switch LH terminal 1 - through case ground of front door switch LH. When the front door RH is opened, ground is supplied to BCM terminal 12 - through front door switch RH terminal 1 - through case ground of front door switch RH. When the sliding door LH is opened, ground is supplied to BCM terminal 48 - through sliding door switch LH terminal 1 - through case ground of sliding door switch LH. When the sliding door RH is opened, ground is supplied to BCM terminal 13 - through sliding door switch RH terminal 1 - through case ground of sliding door switch RH. When the liftgate is opened, ground is supplied to BCM terminal 43 - through back door switch terminal 1 (without power back door) or back door latch (door ajar switch) terminal 7 (with power back door) - through back door switch terminal 3 (without power back door) or back door latch (door ajar switch) terminal 8 (with power back door) - through grounds D403 and D404. When doors are locked or unlocked by either door lock/unlock switch, BCM receives a ground signal to BCM terminal 22 - through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 12 (without rear power vent windows) - through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 17 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 15 (without rear power vent windows), or - through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16 - through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11 - through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When the front door LH is unlocked by the key, the BCM receives a ground signal to BCM terminal 22 - through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 12 (without rear power vent windows) - through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 6 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 7 (without rear power vent windows) - through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 6 - through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 5 - through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When the front door LH is locked by the key, the BCM receives a ground signal to BCM terminal 22 - through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 12 (without rear power vent windows) - through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 4 (with rear power vent windows) or terminal 6 (without rear power vent windows) - through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 1 - through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 5 - through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When a signal, or combination of signals is received by BCM, ground is supplied through BCM terminal 63 - to lamps on demand switch terminal 3 - through lamps on demand switch terminal 4 (with switch in DOOR position) Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Standard .............................................................................................................................................. ................. 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 185 psi)/300 rpm Minimum ........................................................ ........................................................................................................ 981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142 psi)/300 rpm Differential limit between cylinders .............................................................................................................................. 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm Page 4168 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 1656 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. - Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. - Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. Page 4592 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 2488 Page 2043 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Removal and Installation of BCM REMOVAL NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove the parking brake pedal assembly. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the BCM (1) by removing the screw (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors (2). Arrow Indicates : Front INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Description See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Composition. - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure. Page 4727 INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3252 Fuse: Locations Fuse And Fusible Link Box FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX Terminal Arrangement Page 4689 3. Using needle nose pliers, install the anti-rattle spring as shown in Figure 3. 4. Check to make sure both ends of the anti-rattle spring are correctly installed and fully seated as shown in Figure 4. 5. Check to make sure the seat is operating properly and the anti-rattle spring stays in place. Page 4014 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Third Row Seat Belt SEAT BELTS Third Row Seat Belt COMPONENTS Third Row Center Page 630 Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure 2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road. Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center ^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less. ^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less. When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle should be driven on a straight flat road. Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side. Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road. Tools and Equipment Fuel Supply Line: Tools and Equipment Niss./Toy. Line Disconnect Tool AST tool# 8026 5/16"Fuel Line Disconnect Tool. Used for disconnecting the fuel line from the fuel rail. Applicable to 2004 and newer Nissan and Toyota Models - 5/16" Fuel Line Disconnect Tool - Quick Line Removal*Green-Anodized Aluminum Construction - See Application Chart - Included in the #8110 Line Disconnect Set. Contact AST for pricing. Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943 This Tool is also available in the following kits: Page 1385 1. Internal chain guide 2. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 3. Mating mark (copper link) 4. Mating mark (punched) 5. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) 6. Mating mark (yellow link) 7. Timing chain (secondary) 8. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 9. Tension guide 10. Water pump 11. Crankshaft sprocket 12. Mating mark (notched) 13. Timing chain (primary) 14. Slack guide 15. Timing chain tensioner (primary) 16. Mating mark (back side) 17. Crankshaft key NOTE: The figure above shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that on the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed. 1. Make sure that dowel pin hole, dowel pin of camshaft and crankshaft key are located as shown. (No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC) NOTE: - Though camshaft does not stop at the position as shown, for the placement of cam nose, it is generally accepted camshaft is placed for the same direction of the figure. Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side) : At cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side) : At cylinder head upper face side in each bank. Crankshaft key : At cylinder head side of right bank. 2. Install the timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows: CAUTION: Mating marks between timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all mating mark positions repeatedly during the installation process. a. Push plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. Page 2937 CAUTION: Before measuring, make sure the axle end play is 0 mm (0 in). Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection/Rear Wheel Hub. 3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout is outside the specified value after performing the above operation, turn the disc rotor using Tool. Tool number : 38-PFM90.5 Thickness Inspection Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness is not within specification, replace disc rotor. Page 3010 Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Locations Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4179 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 3803 Hose/Line HVAC: Removal and Replacement Component REFRIGERANT LINES Component Front A/C Compressor and Condenser Page 3253 Fuse: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Fuse - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse. - Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. - Do not partially install fuse, always insert it into fuse holder properly. - Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. Page 1800 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation LH and See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation RH. CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil. 2. Remove the spark plugs using a suitable tool. If replacing the spark plugs use the correct spark plug for maximum performance. Refer to See: Maintenance. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. Page 1957 - When data link connector branch line is open, "ECU list" displayed on the CONSULT-III "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" may be the same as when the CAN communication line has short-circuit. However, symptoms differ depending on the case. See below chart for the differences. Example: Main Line Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Open Circuit Example: CAN-H, CAN-L Harness Short Circuit Page 2632 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 3283 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System. ACTIVE TEST Page 4791 Audible Warning Device: Electrical Diagrams WARNING CHIME Wiring Diagram - CHIME DI-CHIME-01 Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery Replacement Classification: EL09-042 Reference: NTB09-118 Date: October 28, 2009 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR RESET APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below. IF YOU CONFIRM ^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side. And ^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason. ACTION 1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery. 2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. NOTES: ^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage the printed circuit board (PCB). ^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key. 2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver. Page 5191 Resetting After installing each component to the vehicle, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the door glass automatically to raise the door glass to the top position. Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) COMPONENT PARTS AND HARNESS CONNECTOR LOCATION Page 4193 4. Remove the video monitor and housing. 5. Remove the video monitor hinge screws and remove the video monitor. Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal. Page 2680 5. Pack drive shaft with specified amount of new grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent). Grease amount : 134 - 144 g (4.73 - 5.08 oz) 6. Install new stopper ring to housing of slide joint assembly. 7. After installation, pull shaft to check engagement between slide joint assembly and stopper ring. 8. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown. CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Clean all grease from surfaces. 9. Make sure boot installation length "L" is the length specified below. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool into the large end of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation. Boot installation length "L" : 167.9 mm (6.61 in) CAUTION: Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value. - Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot. 10. Secure large and small ends of boot with new boot bands as shown. CAUTION: Discard old boot bands and replace with new ones. 11. Install new dust shield to slide joint housing. 12. After installing housing and shaft, make sure boot position is correct. If boot position is not correct, remove old boot bands then reposition the boot and secure with new boot bands. Wheel Side Page 1970 d. Reception item of "BCM": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means BCM cannot receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between BCM and TCM (line 2-d in the figure below). e. Reception item of "EPS" and "I-KEY": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal communication between EPS and I-KEY and their receiving units. Do not draw any line. NOTE: On CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST), "UNKWN" is indicated even though the item is not used in the trouble diagnosis. For the details of each item on CAN diagnostic support monitor, refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis/CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor. Page 2600 Shift Interlock Cable: Service and Repair Removal KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Removal 1. Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster holder. 2. Remove casing cap from bracket of control device and remove interlock rod from cable. 3. Remove holder from key cylinder and remove key interlock cable. Page 983 Wheel Fastener: Specifications Tightening torque of wheel nut ................................................................................................................................................... 112 N.m (11 kg-m, 83 ft-lb) Page 1691 9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. 12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads. ^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12. Page 2965 Brake Master Cylinder: Removal and Replacement BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER Removal and Installation CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas, it may cause damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 3. Remove the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube attached to air cleaner case (upper). Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect the harness connector for the brake fluid level switch. 5. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tubes and the hose from the reservoir tank to the sub tank using a suitable tool. 6. Remove the master cylinder nuts and remove the master cylinder. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. - Never reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Place master cylinder onto brake booster and tighten the master cylinder nuts to specification. 2. Connect the sub tank hose to the master cylinder reservoir tank and fill the sub tank with new brake fluid. 3. Plug all ports on master cylinder with your fingers to prevent air suction while releasing brake pedal. 4. Have an assistant depress brake pedal slowly several times until no air comes out of the master cylinder. Install and tighten brake tube flare nuts to specification. Refer to See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit. - Refill the brake system fluid and bleed the air from the brake system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal. Page 1785 - Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is heard. - After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with the electric fuel pump applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping. 2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections. Page 4790 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Page 428 ATC Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair ATC AMBIENT SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor connector. NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening, in front of the condenser. 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Specifications Starter Motor: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Starter Page 3383 Alignment: Specifications Rear Suspension Wheel Alignment SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*) Wheelarch Height SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) Page 1950 - Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area. NOTE: A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in). - Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area. NOTE: Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The spliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twisted line are lost. - Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communication line. CAN Fundamental PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis CAUTION: Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal. - Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less. - Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when checking the harness. CAN PRECAUTIONS Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis CAUTION: Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal. - Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less. - Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when checking the harness. Technician Safety Information Axle Shaft Assembly: Technician Safety Information PRECAUTIONS Precaution CAUTION: When installing each rubber part, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on the ground. *Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. - After installing the removed suspension parts, check the front wheel alignment. - Do not jack up the vehicle by the transverse link . Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing drive shaft. Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible. - Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts. - Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the service location. - Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover must be placed over parts. - Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts. - Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with kerosene which shall be removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths. Navigation Sysetm - Various Garmin Nuvi(R) Issues Global Positioning System: Customer Interest Navigation Sysetm - Various Garmin Nuvi(R) Issues Classification: EL09-017 Reference: NTB09-047 Date: June 17, 2009 NISSAN (GARMIN) PORTABLE NAVIGATION UNIT ISSUES APPLIED VEHICLES: Any equipped with the Nissan (Garmin) Nuvi 750 unit. SERVICE INFORMATION If there is any incident with the function of the Nuvi 750 Portable Navigation Unit BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY REPAIRS: Perform a System Reset of the Unit by sliding the "Power Key" to the left and hold for eight (8) seconds, then return it to the normal position. If a System Reset resolves the incident inform the customer that this System Reset can be performed by them at any time such an incident may occur. NOTE: ^ DO NOT REPLACE the Unit when a System Reset will resolve an incident, if one should occur. ^ This action will perform a "Soft Reset" (i.e. "reboot") of the Unit. ^ This action will not affect stored user data such as "Favorites", "Recently Found", etc. ^ This System Reset instruction is in the Unit Owner's Manual and referenced in NNA CLAIMS BULLETIN WB/09-014* "Replacement Procedures for Nissan (Garmin) Portable Navigation Unit". *This CLAIMS BULLETIN can be found at NNAnet.com. Go to: Applications > My Documents Click on Advanced in the Search area Under Advanced Search select the Include archives box Type GARMIN in the Keywords box and click on SEARCH Disclaimer Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information Classification: WT11-003 Reference: NTB11-029 Date: March 21, 2011 TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION ^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration. ^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly. ^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin. Tire Mounting Tips: NOTE: These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment 1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid. ^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process. 2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and corrosion. Page 86 NOTE: ^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control unit using the old starter. ^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is: ^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb) Page 292 Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 2093 Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Automatic Air Conditioner OIL Capacity Total in system .............................................................................................................................................................. 220 ml (7.44 US fl oz, 7.7 Imp fl oz) Compressor (service part) charging amount ..................................................................... Refer to ATC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor". Manual Air Conditioner OIL Capacity Total in system .............................................................................................................................................................. 220 ml (7.44 US fl oz, 7.7 Imp fl oz) Compressor (service part) charging amount .................................................................... Refer to MTC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor". Driver Air Bag Module Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a driver air bag direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the spiral cable must be replaced. - Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three minutes. - When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2. Remove the side lids LH/RH. 3. Remove the driver air bag module bolts. 4. Lift the driver air bag module from the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag harness and horn connectors, then remove the driver air bag module. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Description and Operation/Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors, CAUTION: When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. - Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. - Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. - Do not disassemble air bag module. - Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new bolts. - Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). Page 1608 31. Select Diagnosis 32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%. When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of the screen will light (become enabled). 33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon. Page 3454 - Initially, tighten nut on outer tie-rod socket and knuckle arm to specification. Then tighten further to align nut groove with first pin hole so that the cotter pin can be installed. CAUTION: Tightening torque must not exceed 49 N.m (5 kg-m, 36 ft-lb). Refill power steering system and bleed air after installation. Refer to See: Service and Repair See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Fluid Leakage See: Power Steering/Power Steering Fluid/Service and Repair/Checking Fluid Level. Page 4635 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Removal And Installation Camshaft: Service and Repair Removal And Installation CAMSHAFT Removal and Installation CAUTION: Apply new engine oil to parts marked in illustration before installation. REMOVAL 1. Remove the timing chains. Refer to See: Timing Components/Timing Chain/Service and Repair. Page 4634 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics Classification: AT09-016A Reference: NTB10-003A Date: February 11, 2010 5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774 This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY SERVICE INFORMATION If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis. ^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774. IMPORTANT NOTE: If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed. Locations Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1132 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered "Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. Page 5200 Windshield: Service and Repair WINDSHIELD GLASS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove inside mirror. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Inside Mirror. 2. Partially remove the headliner (front edge). Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove cowl top cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 4. Apply protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. - If the windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: When a windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. - Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. - While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. - The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. - Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. - The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. - Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. Page 3828 Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair MTC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Condenser REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Procedures. 2. Remove the radiator. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator. 3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. 5. Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor. 6. Carefully release retaining clips located on top driver side of condenser and rotate the condenser out of its mounts as shown. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Locations. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Page 535 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Diagram Information and Instructions Heated Glass Element: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 286 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor inoperative. - Pull out the sensor, be careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness. - Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the wheel sensor bolt to the specified torque. - Before installing the wheel sensor, make sure there are no foreign materials (such as iron fragments) adhered to the pick-up part of the wheel sensor, to the inside of the wheel sensor mounting hole or on the rotor mounting surface. FRONT WHEEL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove the front wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Partially remove the front wheel fender protector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor. 4. Remove the harness wire from mounts and disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR WHEEL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor from the rear wheel hub and bearing assemblies. 2. Remove the harness wire from mounts and harness wire clips from the rear suspension member. 3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub. Page 4421 DESCRIPTION Page 241 Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Automatic Drive Positioner AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Front Axle Nut Page 3279 Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Auto Active Test IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Auto Active Test DESCRIPTION In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: - Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Cornering lamps - Front fog lamps - Headlamps (High, Low) - A/C compressor (magnet clutch) - Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch Check (With Automatic Back Door System) or See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) when the auto active test cannot be performed. INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the following nine steps are repeated three times. (A): Oil pressure warning lamp is blinking when the auto active test is operating. Specifications Knock Sensor: Specifications Knock Sensor Torque .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb Power Door Lock System Power Sliding Door Switch: Locations Power Door Lock System POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 146 Page 3363 2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows: ^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates. ^ Center the turn plates to the tires. ^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel. DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body. Locations Variable Induction Control Solenoid: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Service and Repair Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair STOP LAMP Bulb Replacement HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP Removal 1. Remove the rear washer nozzle. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle/Service and Repair/Rear Wiper And Washer System/Rear Washer Nozzle. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the nuts and remove the high-mounted stop lamp. 4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the high-mounted stop lamp housing. 5. Pull the bulb from the socket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. STOP LAMP Refer to See: Tail Lamp/Tail Light Bulb/Service and Repair. Page 2613 7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. 8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet hose. 9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (71 - 128 psi) through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. 11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the fluid cooler steel lines to the transaxle. 12. Remove the banjo bolts. 13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transaxle by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds. 14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (71 - 128 psi) through each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transaxle for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines. 16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings. 17. Perform "A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE". A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE NOTE: Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification. 1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses. 2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose. 3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose. CAUTION: Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. - Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation. - Avoid contact with eyes and skin. - Do not breath vapors or spray mist. 4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds. Page 2766 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 1901 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattles Heat Shield: Customer Interest Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattles Classification: EM10-003 Reference: NTB10-097 Date: August 23, 2010 EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002 - 2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35DE (V6) engine only 2007 - 2010 Altima Sedan (L32) 2008 - 2010 Altima Coupe (CL32) 2007 - 2010 Altima Hybrid (L32HV) 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2009 - 2010 Maxima (A35) 2004- 2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle. ACTION: Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION). ^ Refer to REPAIR PROCEDURE. Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE WARNING: Page 2051 Page 1757 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Diagram Information and Instructions Entertainment Systems: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 2027 NOTES: ^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply. ^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program, Website order via link on dealer portal. ^ WD-40 is available from various local sources. Removal Tool ^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and strip the sensor. ^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box end wrench or 6-point deep well socket. 1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice. 2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds. ^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the threads. Page 3626 Grilles Page 1840 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Removal and Installation of BCM REMOVAL NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove the parking brake pedal assembly. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the BCM (1) by removing the screw (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors (2). Arrow Indicates : Front INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Description See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Composition. - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure. Page 4100 Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Keyfob Battery Replacement Page 2908 FRONT DISC BRAKE Removal and Installation of Brake Pad WARNING: Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize a hazard of airborne particles or other materials. CAUTION: While removing pad assemblies, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - Be careful not to damage piston boot or get oil on disc rotor. Always replace shims when replacing pads. - If shims are rusted or show peeling of rubber coat, replace them with new shims. - It is not necessary to remove torque member mounting bolt except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. In this case, suspend cylinder body with wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Carefully monitor brake fluid level because brake fluid will return to reservoir when pushing back piston. - Burnish the brake pads (or linings) and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces after refinishing or replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at a very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Brake Burnishing Procedure. REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove lower sliding pin. 3. Hang the cylinder body with a wire and remove the pad and shim assemblies, then pad retainers from the torque member. CAUTION: Do not damage piston boot. - When removing pad retainer from torque member, lift pad retainer in the direction of arrow as shown so as not to deform it. - Keep rotor clean and free from brake fluid. INSTALLATION 1. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) or equivalent, to the pad back plate and inner shim sides. Install inner shims and outer shim covers to inner and outer pads. Page 4785 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 4082 Antenna: Electrical Diagrams AUDIO ANTENNA Wiring Diagram - W/ANT AV-W/ANT-01 Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Brake Fluid Type ....................................................................................................................... Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 Page 619 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Ignition Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 4786 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 4030 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 711 ^ Pulley should turn with some dragging ^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator. Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Washer Motor REMOVAL 1. Remove fender protector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 2. Remove front and rear washer motor electrical connector and front and rear washer hoses. 3. Pull out front and rear washer motor in the direction of the arrow as shown, and remove the front and rear washer motor from the washer fluid reservoir. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: When installing front and rear washer motor, there should be no packing twists, etc. Page 760 5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5). ^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit. 6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure 6A. NOTE: ^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle. ^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle. Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8: ^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned. ^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring. ^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no wrinkles or ridges are present. ^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D" ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece. 7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B). Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1722 4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. 9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. - Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. Page 4283 ^ When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a power-type module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. A power-type module/converter uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle taillight, stoplight, and turn signal circuits only as a signal source. (See the illustration above.) The module/converter must draw no more than 5 milliamps from the vehicle turn signal circuits and no more than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail light circuits. CAUTION: Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements listed above may negatively affect the performance and function of the vehicle's electrical system. See a professional trailer dealer or trailer rental agency for installation of the proper equipment. Customers who inquire about towing should be reminded of the following: ^ Always check for correct operation of the turn signals, stoplights, and taillights every time a trailer is hitched up for towing. ^ The towing capacity for 350Z (Coupe Only), Altima, Maxima, and Sentra is 1,000 lbs. For more information, refer customers to the Owner's Manual as well as the Nissan Towing Guide, available online at NissanUSA.com. Page 1062 Service and Repair Coolant Outlet: Service and Repair WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING Removal and Installation WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. REMOVAL 1. Drain engine coolant from radiator and drain plugs on both sides of cylinder block. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove fresh air duct, air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, mass air flow sensor and upper air cleaner case as an assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair. 3. Remove radiator upper hose and heater hose. 4. Remove connector(s) from heater pipe. 5. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove water outlet, heater pipe, water connector, and water bypass pipe nuts and bolts. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Securely insert each hose, and install a clamp at a position where it does not interfere with the pipe bulge. - When inserting a water pipe into water connector, apply neutral detergent to O-ring. CAUTION: Use new O-rings for installation. Refill engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Inspection. - Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks. Crash Zone Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CRASH ZONE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three minutes. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2. Remove front grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Grille/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 4. Remove crash zone sensor nuts. CAUTION: Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not disassemble crash zone sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Page 1549 Page 170 Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Page 2997 CAUTION: Because vacuum hose contains a check valve, it must be installed in the correct orientation. Refer to the stamp or label to confirm correct installation. The brake booster will not operate normally if the hose is installed in the wrong direction. - Insert the vacuum hose for at least 24 mm (0.94 in). - Never use lubricating oil during assembly. Page 3769 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations MTC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 3964 Side Air Bag: Description and Operation Side Curtain Air Bag SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Side Curtain Air Bag Side curtain air bag modules are located above the vehicle headlining. Vehicles with side curtain air bags are equipped with labels as shown. Page 608 ^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates. ^ Chock the left rear wheel. Preliminary Checks: 3. Perform pre-alignment checks. ^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.) ^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation) ^ Tire pressure ^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components ^ Wheel bearing axial play ^ Ball joints of suspension arms ^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage ^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack) ^ Vehicle weight > Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers > Fuel level is full Page 4752 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 3021 Repair Flow Chart Page 4506 ^ When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a power-type module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. A power-type module/converter uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle taillight, stoplight, and turn signal circuits only as a signal source. (See the illustration above.) The module/converter must draw no more than 5 milliamps from the vehicle turn signal circuits and no more than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail light circuits. CAUTION: Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements listed above may negatively affect the performance and function of the vehicle's electrical system. See a professional trailer dealer or trailer rental agency for installation of the proper equipment. Customers who inquire about towing should be reminded of the following: ^ Always check for correct operation of the turn signals, stoplights, and taillights every time a trailer is hitched up for towing. ^ The towing capacity for 350Z (Coupe Only), Altima, Maxima, and Sentra is 1,000 lbs. For more information, refer customers to the Owner's Manual as well as the Nissan Towing Guide, available online at NissanUSA.com. Page 4783 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 1227 Page EM-10 Page 532 DESCRIPTION Page 1663 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 363 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 2959 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque specifications when connecting the brake tubes. - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). Page 1331 Page EM-1 Page 3842 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Air Conditioner OIL Name ................................................................................................................................................... ............................... NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S Manual Air Conditioner OIL Name ................................................................................................................................................... ............................... NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S Page 5182 Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. - Keep primers and adhesives in a cool dry place. ideally they should be stored in a refrigerator. - Do not leave primers and adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps off. - The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time depends on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperature and lower humidities. Repairing Water Leaks for Slide Door Glass Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the glass area while pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Page 541 Electrical Units Location Rear Vision Camera: Locations Electrical Units Location ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Crash Zone Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CRASH ZONE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three minutes. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2. Remove front grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Grille/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 4. Remove crash zone sensor nuts. CAUTION: Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not disassemble crash zone sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Interior - Seat Arm Rest Is Loose Arm Rest: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Arm Rest Is Loose Classification: BT09-050 Reference: NTB09-089 Date: September 11, 2009 2004 - 2009 QUEST; SEAT ARMREST LOOSE APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM The armrest on a captain chair (front seats or 2nd row seats) is loose. ACTION 1. Remove the armrest. 2. Replace bolt insert. 3. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to bolt threads and torque to 28 Nm (2.85 kg-m, 20.6 lb-ft). IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 1080 Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped) 1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side) movement (see Example 1): ^ See above table for maximum movement specification. ^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended. Page 3810 NOTE: To ease installation, first remove the A/C support clip from the lower section high/low pressure pipe and secure it to the dash panel threaded stud. 2. Install the new upper high/low pressure pipe through the engine compartment. a. Install the high/low pressure pipe to the front expansion valve and only hand tighten the connector bolt (1) as shown. - Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2) - Electric throttle control actuator (3) - Arrow Indicates Front b. Hand tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown. - Arrow Indicates Front c. Hand tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. d. Install the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) to the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. e. Attach the high/low pressure pipe to the A/C support clip (secured to the dash panel threaded stud). f. Tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown to specification. 3. Complete the installation of the lower high/low pressure pipe. CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections. - Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones. - Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil. Page 4861 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams A/T INDICATOR Wiring Diagram - AT/IND DI-AT/IND-01 Page 712 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection DRIVE BELTS Checking Drive Belts WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is not running. 1. Inspect belt for cracks, fraying, wear or oil adhesion. If necessary, replace with a new one. 2. Inspect drive belt deflections by applying 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f) on the belt midway between pulleys as shown. 3. Measure the belt tension using Tool at the locations as shown. Tool number : BT-3373-F NOTE: Inspect drive belt deflection or tension when engine is cold. - Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is not within specifications. CAUTION: - When checking belt deflection or tension immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specification value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys. - Tighten idler pulley lock nut by hand and measure deflection or tension without looseness. Page 3483 - Check that the projecting part inside the upper seat and the flange part of bracket are attached as shown. - Check that the projection part outside the upper seat directs to vehicle front. - Position the hollow of the rubber seat with the groove part of rear lower link to install. - Install coil spring with the side of two paint markers directing to lower side. - After installing the rear lower link and coil spring, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension. Page 1597 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 646 c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specified torque. Lock nut : Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE 1. Set the front wheels in a straight-ahead position. Then move the vehicle forward until the front wheels rest on the turning radius gauge as shown. 2. Rotate steering wheel all the way right and left; measure the turning angles "A" and "B" as shown. Wheel turning angle (full turn) : Refer to See: Specifications. Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) And Rear Power Socket (Cargo) Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) And Rear Power Socket (Cargo) POWER SOCKET Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) and Rear Power Socket (Cargo) REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove inner socket from ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 3. Disconnect power socket electrical connector. 4. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 1270 6. Install front timing chain case. a. Install lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top surface of oil pan (upper). CAUTION: Be careful that oil pan gasket is in place. b. While pressing front timing chain case from its front and top as shown, hammer dowel pin until the outer end becomes flush with surface using suitable tool. - Install dowel pin on the rear timing chain case into dowel pin hole in front timing chain case. 7. Loosely install the front timing chain case bolts. Bolt position Bolt diameter 1, 2 : 8 mm (0.31 in) 3 - 22 : 6 mm (0.24 in) 8. Tighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. - Retighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown. Bolt position Tightening specification 1, 2 : 28.5 N-m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb) 3 - 22 : 12.8 N-m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb) Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Door: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 5242 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear Wiper And Washer System Rear Wiper Motor REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Rear Wiper Motor REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Remove rear wiper arm. Refer to See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair. 2. Remove pivot cap. 3. Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect rear wiper motor electrical connector. 5. Remove rear wiper motor bolts, and remove rear wiper motor. Installation CAUTION: Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts. Page 1995 3. Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R terminals. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace the ECM and/or the IPDM E/R. 5.CHECK SYMPTOM Connect all the connectors. Check if the symptoms described in the "Symptom (Results from interview with customer)" are reproduced. Inspection result Reproduced-GO TO 6. Non-reproduced-Start the diagnosis again. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedure when past error is detected. 6.CHECK UNIT REPRODUCTION Perform the reproduction test as per the following procedure for each unit. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Disconnect one of the unit connectors of CAN communication system. NOTE: ECM and IPDM E/R have a termination circuit. Check other units first. 4. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal. Check if the symptoms described in the "Symptom (Results from interview with customer)" are reproduced. NOTE: Although unit-related error symptoms occur, do not confuse them with other symptoms. Inspection result Reproduced-Connect the connector. Check other units as per the above procedure. Non-reproduced-Replace the unit whose connector was disconnected. CAN Communication Signal Chart TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CAN Communication Signal Chart Refer to See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis Work Flow/How To Use CAN Communication Signal Chart for how to use CAN communication signal chart. TYPE 1/TYPE 2 NOTE: Refer to See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/CAN/Abbreviation List for the abbreviations of the connecting units. Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) > Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires > Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly Classification: RS01-001B Reference: NTB01-005B Date: November 12, 2009 "D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES IF YOU CONFIRM Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s). ACTION Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to: ^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings. ^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. Page 1881 Page 1384 Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary. - Inspect all timing chains and associated parts for wear or damage, replace as necessary. Installation Service and Repair Sliding Door Window Glass: Service and Repair SLIDE DOOR GLASS Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Apply protective tape around the slide door glass to protect the painted surface from damage. 2. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: When a slide door glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. - Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. - While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. - The rubber seal must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. - Inform customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. WARNING: Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesives are flammable. - The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. - Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. if affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to area with fresh air. Driving the vehicle before urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the slide door glass in case of an accident. CAUTION: Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Page 2534 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................ Genuine Nissan Matic "K" NOTE:Using Automatic Transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. Diagram Information and Instructions Cellular Phone: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Page 2249 4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. - Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. 5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. - Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. 9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable accelerator pedal as shown. - When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to release the cable end. NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the accelerator pedal. - Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward. - Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor. CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the pedal bracket. - Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. Page 1584 Page 1516 Water Pump: Service and Repair WATER PUMP Removal and Installation WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. CAUTION: When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belt. - Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using radiator cap tester. REMOVAL 1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove engine coolant reservoir tank. Refer to See: Radiator/Service and Repair. 3. Remove IPDM E/R bolts and position aside. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. 4. Remove RH wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 5. Remove fender protector (RH). Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 6. Remove drive belts. Refer to See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 7. Remove idler pulley and idler pulley bracket. 8. Support engine and remove front engine insulator and bracket. Refer to See: Engine/Service and Repair. 9. Remove water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block. 10. Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover. Page 5031 Combination Switch: Electrical Diagrams COMBINATION SWITCH Wiring Diagram - COMBSW LT-COMBSW-01 Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations WARNING CHIME Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose Sliding Door Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose Classification: BT09-006 Reference: NTB09-014 Date: March 4, 2009 SLIDING DOOR WELT HAS LOOSENED FROM THE DOOR PANEL APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 - 2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM The door welt (rubber trim) is coming loose from the sliding door panel (clips have detached). ACTION Check to see if the clips are missing from the door welt: ^ If the clips are missing, replace the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape. ^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1750 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 4765 When the SET/COAST switch is depressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. RESUME OPERATION When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is depressed after cancel operation other than depressing MAIN switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet following conditions. Brake pedal is released - A/T shift lever is in other than P and N positions - Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH) Component Description AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) Component Description ASCD STEERING SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P1564 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P1572 and See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component Description See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/ASCD Brake Switch. STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P1572 , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P1805 and See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component Description See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/ASCD Brake Switch. ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P2100, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P2101, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P2118 and See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P2119. ASCD INDICATOR Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Indicator/Component Description See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/ASCD Indicator. Component Locations Knock Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2911 - While removing pad assemblies, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. - Be careful not to damage piston boot or get oil on disc rotor. Always replace shims when replacing pads. - If shims are rusted or show peeling of rubber coat, replace them with new shims. - It is not necessary to remove torque member mounting bolt except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. In this case, suspend cylinder body with wire so as not to stretch brake hose. - Carefully monitor brake fluid level because brake fluid will return to reservoir when pushing back piston. - Burnish the brake pads (or linings) and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces after refinishing or replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at a very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Brake Burnishing Procedure. REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tires assemblies using power tool. 2. Remove bottom sliding pin bolt. 3. Hang the cylinder body with a wire and remove the pad and shim assemblies, then pad retainers from the torque member. CAUTION: Do not damage piston boot. - When removing pad retainer from torque member, lift pad retainer in the direction of arrow as shown so as not to deform it. - Keep rotor clean and free from brake fluid. INSTALLATION 1. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the rear of the pad and to both sides of the shim, and attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad, and the outer shim to the outer pad. 2. Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member. CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than the torque member, as shown. 3. Push the piston in so that the pad is firmly attached and attach the cylinder body to the torque member. CAUTION: By pushing in the piston, the brake fluid returns to the master cylinder reservoir tank and the sub tank. Watch the brake fluid level in the sub tank. NOTE: Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), makes it easier to push in the piston. 4. Install the sliding pin bolt and tighten to specification. Refer to See: Rear/Exploded View. 5. Check the brake for any drag. 6. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at Page 1274 Tool number : (J-50288) - If the original timing chain markings are not legible, use paint or equivalent to mark the timing chains to the sprockets. 4. If removing the timing chains (secondary), loosen camshaft sprocket bolts. 5. Compress the timing chain tensioner (primary). a. Pull lever down and release plunger stopper tab. Plunger stopper tab can be pushed up to release (coaxial structure with lever). b. Insert stopper pin into timing chain tensioner (primary) body hole to hold lever, and keep the stopper tab released. c. Depress the plunger into the tensioner body by pressing the slack guide. d. Keep the slack guide pressed and lock the plunger in by pushing the stopper pin through the lever and into the chain tensioner body hole. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. 6. Remove the internal chain guide. - Slack guide does not need to be removed. 7. Remove timing chain (primary). CAUTION: Page 2569 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams A/T INDICATOR Wiring Diagram - AT/IND DI-AT/IND-01 Page 207 Ignition Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Page 3610 Removal And Installation INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation DRIVER SIDE Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Lower Panel LH. 2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel. Page 939 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) CAUTION: Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the tire and wheel will result. - If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly. REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 4. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 6. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to See: See: . NOTE: Service and Repair Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3 minutes. Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing. Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it. Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function and delete the memory by CONSULT-III. If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunctions. Refer to Page 469 Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. Page 2278 4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure. Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline. - Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube and No.1 spool. - Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the No.1 spool on fuel tube. - Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00). - When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. - Use a torque driver to tighten clamps. - Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 -0.08in). Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 Nm (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13in-lb) - Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. 5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22lb) to confirm fuel tube does not come off. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. 7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 8. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings. - During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 10. Check the following. - Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. Method B CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick connector O-ring maintains seal ability. - Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Fuel Rail/Service and Repair. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. - Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. Locations Remote Switch: Locations REAR VIEW MONITOR Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4109 Page 3813 suspension strut tower (3) as shown. 12. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe connector bolt (1) from the front expansion valve as shown. - Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2) - Electric throttle control actuator (3) - Arrow Indicates Front 13. Use a suitable tool to pry the pipe support clip (1) from the threaded stud on the dash panel as shown. - Arrow Indicates Front 14. Remove the top section of the high/low pressure pipe (1) as shown. - Arrow Indicates Front CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination. 15. Remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe. a. Access the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe from under the vehicle. b. Remove the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A). c. Remove the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B) to release the A/C pipe clamp (2). Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Electronic Brake Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information Classification: BR10-011 Reference: NTB10-145 Date: December 15, 2010 ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC SERVICE INFORMATION When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first. ^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC diagnosis. ^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis. ^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs. When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM). ^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM. ^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for those DTCs in the applicable ESM. CLAIMS INFORMATION Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for repairs performed. Page 5172 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the door glass bolts. 8. Raise the door glass up into the door frame/channel and hold in place with a suitable tool (A). 9. Disconnect the harness connector for the regulator assembly. 10. Remove the regulator nuts, and remove the regulator assembly. Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. Wire wear - Regulator deformation The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION". Door glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Disassembly 1. Remove the regulator motor bolts. 2. Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly. Assembly Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. - Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator nuts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator. - Removal and installation of the regulator motor from the regulator. - Removal and installation of the door glass. - Removal and installation of the door glass run. Page 2831 Repair Flow Chart Page 2501 16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5). ^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB, diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing. 17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.) Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B) FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B) Terminal Arrangement VDC/TCS/ABS Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations VDC/TCS/ABS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2769 Page 5079 Page 2681 1. Insert the amount of grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) into joint sub-assembly serration hole until grease begins to ooze from ball groove and serration hole. After inserting grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off old grease that has oozed out. 2. Cover serrated part of shaft with tape. Install new boot band and boot to shaft. Be careful not to damage boot. CAUTION: Discard old boot band and boot; replace with new one. 3. Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft. 4. Attach new circlip to shaft. The circlip must fit securely into shaft groove. Attach nut to joint sub-assembly. Use a suitable tool to press-fit. CAUTION: Discard old circlip and replace with new one. 5. Insert the amount of new grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) listed below into housing from large end of boot. Grease amount : 170 - 190 g (6.00 - 6.70 oz) Page 2347 Page 3759 REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly from the vehicle. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the rear blower motor. 3. Remove the variable blower control (rear). 4. Remove the rear air mix door motor. 5. Remove the rear duct and blend door assembly. Refer to See: Air Duct/Service and Repair/Automatic/Removal And Installation. 6. Disassemble the rear heater and cooling unit assembly to remove the evaporator. Locations Hazard Warning Switch: Locations TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 906 Fuse: Locations Fuse And Fusible Link Box FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX Terminal Arrangement Page 5087 - Inspection End. Page 1932 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 1990 Information Bus: Component Tests and General Diagnostics CAN Communication System System Description CAN Communication System - CAN communication is a multiplex communication system. This enables the system to transmit and receive large quantities of data at high speed by connecting control units with two communication lines (CAN-H and CAN-L). - Control units on the CAN network transmit signals using the CAN communication control circuit. They receive only necessary signals from other control units to operate various functions. - CAN communication lines adopt twisted-pair line style (two lines twisted) for noise immunity. SYSTEM DIAGRAM Each control unit passes an electric current to the termination circuits when transmitting CAN communication signal. The termination circuits produce an electrical potential difference between CAN-H and CAN-L. CAN communication system transmits and receives CAN communication signals by the potential difference. CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CIRCUIT Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions Classification: WT10-005 Reference: NTB10-114 Date: September 27, 2010 INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) SERVICE INFORMATION Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensor. NOTE: The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair. Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling tools. Not Recommended tire inflator tools. Page 2568 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 4117 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements Classification: MT02-001B Reference: NTB03-015B Date: December 21, 21009 2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above. IMPORTANT NOTE: Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs. Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35 Special oil is not used. Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift quality, for customer pay use as well. Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship Chemical Care Product Program. Disclaimer Locations Collision Avoidance System Switch: Locations REAR SONAR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Component VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Component Variable Blower Control (Front) Variable Blower Control (Rear) Page 5037 Service and Repair Solar Sensor: Service and Repair OPTICAL SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the front demister grille. Refer to See: Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns/Ambient Light Sensor/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector (2). 3. Twist the optical sensor (1) counter clockwise to remove it from the defroster grille. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Timing Chain Tensioner: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area Classification: EM07-001D Reference: NTB07-042D Date: May 25, 2010 MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY 2004-2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system. ^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM). ^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause. Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis. ACTION: 1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin. 2. Change the engine oil and filter. 3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin. IMPORTANT: The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. PARTS INFORMATION Page 613 ^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep. 7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and adjustments. NOTE: If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster and easier. ^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system. If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe: ^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering system movement during the adjustment process. ^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a centered steering wheel. ^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right. This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall mounted rack and pinion units. IMPORTANT: If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct. After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment 8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order. 9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight flat road. Page 2898 4. Add new brake fluid and bleed the air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5. Adjust the parking brake. Refer to See: Parking Brake System/Testing and Inspection. 6. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Rear Brake Burnishing Procedure. Disassembly and Assembly REAR DISC BRAKE Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque member and cylinder. 2. Remove the sliding pin and the sliding pin boot from the torque member. 3. Remove the retaining ring from the cylinder body using a screwdriver or suitable tool, as shown. 4. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. WARNING: Do not place your finger in front of piston. 5. Remove piston seals from cylinder body using a screwdriver or suitable tool, as shown. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. CALIPER INSPECTION Page 3075 Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Main Bearing Cap Page 2410 Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location Locations Power Sliding Door Module: Locations AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Automatic Air Conditioner OIL Capacity Total in system .............................................................................................................................................................. 220 ml (7.44 US fl oz, 7.7 Imp fl oz) Compressor (service part) charging amount ..................................................................... Refer to ATC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor". Manual Air Conditioner OIL Capacity Total in system .............................................................................................................................................................. 220 ml (7.44 US fl oz, 7.7 Imp fl oz) Compressor (service part) charging amount .................................................................... Refer to MTC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor". Page 4133 Cellular Phone: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters Bluetooth Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout TELEPHONE Bluetooth Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout Terminal And Reference Value For Bluetooth Control Unit TELEPHONE Terminal and Reference Value for Bluetooth Control Unit Page 2968 9. Tap flange using a soft block such as wood, and carefully pull the secondary piston assembly straight out to prevent cylinder inner wall from being damaged. Inspection After Disassembly Master cylinder Check that there is no damage, friction, rusting, or pinholes on the cylinder inner wall, and replace if there are any non-standard conditions. Piston Check cup for damage. Replace the piston if damage is found. Assembly CAUTION: Never use mineral oils such as kerosene, gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process. - Make sure there is no foreign matter such as dirt or dust attached to the inner cylinder walls, the piston, or the cap seal, and use care to avoid damaging parts with the assembly tools. - Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it. 1. Apply fluid to cylinder inner wall body and contact surface of the piston assembly. Then insert secondary piston assembly and primary piston assembly into cylinder body in this order. CAUTION: Do not reuse the primary and secondary piston assemblies. - Be sure to replace the assembly without disassembling the new inner kit. - Pay attention to the orientation of the piston cup, and insert straight to prevent the cup from being caught by cylinder inner wall. 2. Perform a visual inspection of the secondary piston slit through the tank boss hole on the secondary side of the cylinder body, and install the piston stopper using a suitable tool. Page 2768 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 2781 REPAIR FLOW CHART Page 721 The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to See: See: . 1. Disconnect the tube clamp at the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube at the mass air flow sensor. 2. Separate the mass air flow sensor from the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. 3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and remove the air cleaner case (upper). 4. Remove the air cleaner filter. 5. Install a new air cleaner filter. 6. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Page 1937 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 2548 1. Install O-rings in 2nd brake sleeve and 2nd brake piston. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring. - Apply ATF to O-ring. 2. Coat the inner surfaces of oil pump assembly with ATF. 3. Press 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve into oil pump assembly. 4. Install snap ring using suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage oil pump assembly. 5. Place return spring on 2nd brake piston with the spring side up. 6. Install 2nd brake flange, 2nd brake discs and 2nd brake plates. Page 4902 LT-INT/L-05 WITHOUT REAR ROOF CONSOLE Page 5196 Most windshield damage that occurs due to impact is easily identified as shown above. Cracks can spread and become larger from the original strike point or crush mark due to: ^ Thermal stresses caused by temperature fluctuation ^ External physical stresses, such as hand touch, wind force, or vehicle vibration during driving (pot holes) A lead, or crack from one of the star cracked impact points can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge. Single crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass Single cracks must be inspected along the entire crack for impact marks. ^ If any impact mark is found anywhere along the crack, it indicates the damage occurred from an object striking the windshield. This is not covered under warranty. Page 4478 ^ Bolt A (shown in Figure 1 above) will need to be removed. NOTE: You may not need to completely remove the lower finisher. Unclipping the top and pulling it back may give you enough access. 2. Check bolt "B" (see Figure 1). ^ If bolt B is loose or missing, replace it with a new one. ^ New bolt is listed in the parts information. ^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of the new bolt and torque bolt to 5.7 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 51 in-lb) NOTE: If bolt B is missing, make sure to find the missing bolt and remove it from the vehicle. The missing bolt, if left loose in the passenger compartment, could cause a rattle. 4. Reassemble all parts in reverse order. ^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of bolt A and torque bolt to 15.2 N·m (1.6 kg-m, 11 ft-lb). 5. Make sure the power back door motor works correctly with no abnormal noise. ^ Cycle the power back door (open and close) 5 times. Page 3809 - Arrow Indicates Front CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination. 15. Remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe. a. Access the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe from under the vehicle. b. Remove the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A). c. Remove the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B) to release the A/C pipe clamp (2). NOTE: Reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3) for additional clearance to remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe as necessary. d. Pry off the pipe support clip (1) secured to the dash panel threaded stud, using a suitable tool. e. Carefully remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe (1). CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination. INSTALLATION CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections. - Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones. - Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil. NOTE: The service replacement high/low pressure pipe is a two piece pipe assembly. 1. Install and position the new lower high/low pressure pipe without tightening the connections. Page 605 IMPORTANT: If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or charged back). ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the Service Dept. 4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order: ^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface. If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. ^ Make sure the front turn plates: > Do not wobble (no up/down movement). > Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions. If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments. Front Suspension Ball Joint: Specifications Front Suspension SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Lower Ball Joint Page 4077 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Page 1301 - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. b. Before installing timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets, confirm mating marks are visible. If necessary, use paint or equivalent to re-mark the camshaft sprockets at each mating mark. c. Install timing chains (secondary) (8) and camshaft sprockets [INT (1) and EXH (9)]. - Left bank mating marks (6) - Align the timing chain mating marks (secondary) (2) (yellow color link) with the ones on camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH)(4), (5), (7) and (10)(punched), and install them. NOTE: - Mating marks for camshaft sprocket (INT) are on the back side of camshaft sprocket (secondary). - There are two types of mating marks, circle (7), (10) and oval (4), (5) types. They should be used for the right and left banks, respectively. Right bank : Use circle type (7) and (10). Left bank : Use oval type (4) and (5). - Align dowel pin (3) and pin hole on camshafts with the groove (11) and dowel pin on sprockets, and install them. - On the intake side, align pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft front end with dowel pin (3) on the back side of camshaft sprocket, and install them. - On the exhaust side, align dowel pin on camshaft front end with pin groove (11) on camshaft sprocket, and install them. - In case that positions of each mating mark and each dowel pin do not fit on mating parts, make fine adjustment to the position by slightly turning camshaft(s). - Bolts for camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is enough to prevent the dislocation of dowel pins. d. Confirm the mating marks are aligned, then finger tighten camshaft sprocket bolts. Final tightening will be done with all timing chains installed. e. Remove stopper pins out from timing chain tensioners (secondary). 3. Install timing chain (primary) as follows: Locations Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 931 Board-On Lift LIFTING POINT Board-on Lift CAUTION: Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting. The board-on lift attachment at the front end of the vehicle should be set on the front of the sill under the front door opening. Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift. Page 2175 Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365) - Install the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst support bolts in the order as shown. Arrow Indicates : Engine front Three way catalyst support bolts : 22.0 N.m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb) - Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts. - Install the three way catalyst manifolds heat shield bolts. Three way catalyst manifold heat shield bolts : 8.3 N.m (0.85 kg-m, 73 in-lb) Page 3073 JIS = Japan Industrial Standard, used for Japan produced batteries CCA = Cold Cranking Amps, standard for North American produced batteries IMPORTANT: ^ JIS batteries have different testing specifications than CCA batteries. ^ If you must use the GR-8 Battery Tester in a mode other than MODEL mode, JIS Mode MUST ALWAYS BE USED for JIS batteries otherwise an incorrect result will occur. NEVER test a JIS battery using the CCA test in the GR-8; the test software in the GR-8 is different for JIS and CCA modes. ANY CCA value you may have for a JIS-type battery is inaccurate for testing purposes. ^ ALWAYS test with the GR-8 using the MODEL mode (if available). ^ Selecting MODEL and vehicle type will automatically select the proper JIS or CCA value for the Original Equipment battery. ^ If the applicable vehicle is not listed, update the GR-8 to make sure it has the most recent data package. (1) (1) To run the Midtronics Update Wizard for the GR-8 tester in CONSULT III: ^ Make sure the cables from the GR-8 to the multitasker are connected and both units are turned on. ^ Click on the ASIST icon. ^ Click on INFO. Tool Box. ^ Select Midtronics GR-8. ^ Midtronics Update Wizard file screen displays. ^ Click on Change MUP File. ^ The Select a MUP file window displays with the path: C:\ProgramFiles\Midtronics\MUW. ^ Select 192-725C and click OK. ^ Click on next and follow the prompts on the Midtronics Update Wizard screen. If the applicable vehicle still is not listed: 1) Determine which type of battery (CCA or JIS) is installed in the vehicle. See below for descriptions of each battery. 2) Select CCA or JIS in the GR-8 based on the type of battery installed. See below for more information. Determine the Battery Type Batteries with JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) Number Page 3172 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement Testing and Inspection Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Fusible Link A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident. - Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. - Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Page 2670 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Disassembly And Assembly (Right Side) FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side) DISASSEMBLY Transaxle Side 1. Press shaft in a vise. CAUTION: When retaining shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft. 2. Remove circlip and dust shield from slide joint housing. 3. Remove boot bands and slide the boots back. 4. Put matching marks on slide joint housing and shaft before separating slide joint housing. Page 3898 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations MTC TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption Recovery Classification: EC10-015 Reference: NTB10-078 Date: June 21, 2010 REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin. While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop (become interrupted) before it is 100% complete. One of two messages may appear: ^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe. ^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0". In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped. NOTE: ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III. The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later. IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING ^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. ^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads. ^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable. ^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter. Page 276 Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location Page 2266 2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown. Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214) 3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank. CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free from defects and foreign materials. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. - Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the front of the vehicle. - Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown. - Connect the quick connector as follows: - Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials. Page 5020 DESCRIPTION Page 4890 Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. - The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. - The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. Page 2719 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams A/T INDICATOR Wiring Diagram - AT/IND DI-AT/IND-01 Page 1771 - Keep fuel hose connections clean. 3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. - When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi) 7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging - Fuel filter for clogging - Fuel pump - Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". Page 3453 4. Remove the front stabilizer bar bracket rear bolts and loosen the front bolts. Refer to See: Suspension/Stabilizer Bar/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. 5. Remove the lower joint pinch bolt. Refer to See: Steering Column/Service and Repair. 6. Drain the power steering fluid. 7. Disconnect the power steering high and low pressure lines from the steering gear. 8. Reposition the stabilizer bar up and out of the way. 9. Remove the two gear housing bolts using power tool. Refer to "Removal and Installation". Do not remove the gear housing mounting bracket from the gear housing. 10. Remove the power steering gear and linkage assembly. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. Use the specified tightening torque when installing the high-pressure tube and low-pressure hose connections. Refer to See: Power Steering/Power Steering Line/Hose/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Excessive tightening will damage threads of connection or O-ring. The O-ring in low-pressure hose connector is larger than that in high-pressure connector. Take care to install the proper O-ring. Page 4038 3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see Figure 3). ^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information. 4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring. ^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt NOTE: ^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring. ^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly. Page 1304 TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER 1. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(LH) 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket RH (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain (primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Timing chain (secondary) 10. Camshaft sprocket LH (EXH) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Tension guide Removal and Installation (Primary Timing Chain Tensioner) REMOVAL 1. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. 2. Remove the fender protector side cover RH. 3. Support the engine with suitable jack and remove the RH engine insulator, mount and bracket. Specifications Accelerator Pedal: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Accelerator Control PEDAL TRAVEL Page 2068 Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421 Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming Classification: EC09-007 Reference: NTB09-029 Date: April 21, 2009 CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles SERVICE INFORMATION A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the on-line version of this bulletin. This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical Service Bulletins in ASIST. CAUTION Part 1 Updated March 25, 2009 CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure. IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure: ^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated). ^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed. NOTE: The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST synchronization. Page 1910 Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416 Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures Classification: EC00-007C Reference: NTB00-052C Date: April 16, 2004 ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ATTENTION: THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED. ^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised. ^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information. ^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052. APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder (R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101 IF YOU CONFIRM: The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above). ACTIONS: ^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1). ^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4). ^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING" procedure (see step 5). ^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6. ^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7). CAUTION: Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL 'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection. IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing this repair. Gap Spark Plug: Specifications Gap SPARK PLUG Page 1372 10. Remove cooling fan assembly. 11. Disconnect lower radiator hose from engine. 12. Disconnect the power steering fluid reservoir tank hose from the power steering pump and fluid cooler and remove the power steering fluid reservoir tank. 13. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. 14. Remove the fender protector side cover RH. 15. Remove the drive belt. 16. Remove the power steering pump. 17. Remove the lower oil pan. Loosen the lower oil pan bolts using power tool in order as shown. a. Cut the sealant using Tool and remove the lower oil pan. Tool number : (J-37228) CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the mating surface. - Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. b. Slide the Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the lower oil pan. 18. Remove upper oil pan bolts in reverse order as shown. 19. Remove the generator. 20. Remove the A/C compressor bolts and position the A/C compressor aside. 21. Remove the generator bracket. 22. Support the engine with suitable jack and remove the RH engine, mount and bracket. 23. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows: a. Remove access plate and install Ring Gear Stopper Tool. Tool number : (J-50288) Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock Installation/Removal Classification: WT09-002 Reference: NTB09-056 Date: July 14, 2009 ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan SERVICE INFORMATION Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts. WARNING: Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts. Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut and/or key. CLAIMS INFORMATION Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty. Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines ^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed. ^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush. ^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened. ^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks. ^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the Service Manual. Disclaimer Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions How To Read Wiring Diagram HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL How to Read Wiring Diagram CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. - Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. - Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements, "Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR". - Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE - Cell Phone - Bluetooth(R) Initial Diagnosis Technical Service Bulletin # 09-063 Date: 090727 Cell Phone - Bluetooth(R) Initial Diagnosis Classification: EL09-019 Reference: NTB09-063 Date: July 27, 2009 BLUETOOTH(R) PHONE SYSTEM; INITIAL DIAGNOSIS APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with factory equipped Bluetooth(R) phone system SERVICE INFORMATION If a vehicle comes to the dealer with a Bluetooth(R) phone system related concern, use this bulletin for initial diagnosis. ^ This bulletin will help reduce unnecessary diagnosis and parts replacement. Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section below, and QUICK REFERENCE. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. Make sure the customer's Bluetooth(R) related concern is understood. a. Customer comment(s) _______________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ 2. Verify the customer's concern(s). NOTE: The customer's phone may be required, depending upon their concern(s). 3. Write down the customer's cell phone brand, model number, and service provider. Brand (Motorola, Blackberry, etc.) _________________________________ Model (Razr, Pearl, etc.) _________________________________ Model Number (V3m, 8120, etc.) _________________________________ Service Provider (Verizon, Sprint, etc.) _________________________________ ^ It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved list with one provider, but may not be on the approved list with other providers. 4. Go to www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/. a. Using the website's search engine, find out if the customer's phone is on the approved list. b. Put the correct application in "Vehicle", "Year", "Equipped With" (as applicable), "Phone Manufacturer", and then click on "Search". c. If the phone is NOT on the approved list: ^ STOP YOUR DIAGNOSIS HERE. ^ Do NOT perform any further diagnosis for this incident. ^ Do NOT perform any repairs for this incident. ^ Do NOT replace any parts for this incident. ^ The customer needs to obtain a Bluetooth(R) phone that is on the approved list before any further action. d. IF the customer's phone is on the approved list, click on the picture of the phone. Service and Repair Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair REAR VIEW MONITOR Rear View Camera Control Unit REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the front passenger seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Removal And Installation. 3. Disconnect the rear view camera control unit connector. 4. Remove the screws (1) and remove the rear view camera control unit (2). Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4114 DESCRIPTION Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation Classification: BT07-032A Reference: NTB07-070A Date: September 25, 2009 SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009 Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60) IF YOU CONFIRM Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly: ^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged ^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power ^ When the sunroof motor was changed ACTION Perform the following initialization procedure: 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. 3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position. 4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally. NOTE: If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information. Page 3457 4. Before installing the dust boot, coat the contact surfaces between the boot and the inner tie-rod with grease. 5. Install the boot clamps and boot bands securely. Page 5026 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Component Shift Interlock Cable: Service and Repair Component KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Component CAUTION: Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts. After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one. Component Heater Core Case: Service and Repair Component HEATER and COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Component Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly Page 2441 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 771 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 1880 Page 1390 4. Remove the Bank 1 (RH) IVT control valve cover. - Loosen the IVT control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. CAUTION: The shaft in the IVT control valve cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the IVT control valve cover by pulling straight out until the IVT control valve cover disengages from the camshaft sprocket. 5. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner as follows: a. Pull the lever (C) down to release the plunger stopper tab (B). b. Insert the stopper pin A into the tensioner body hole to hold the lever (C) and keep the plunger stopper tab (B) released. c. Compress the plunger (D) into the tensioner body (1) by pressing the slack guide (2). d. Keep the slack guide (2) pressed and lock the plunger (D) in by pushing the stopper pin A through the lever (C) and into the chain tensioner body hole. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246. e. Remove timing chain tensioner bolts and then remove the timing chain tensioner. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop timing chain tensioner bolts inside timing chain case. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing primary timing chain tensioner, push in plunger and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the back and the mounting surfaces of primary timing chain tensioner. - After installation, pull out stopper pin. - When installing the IVT control valve covers perform the following steps. 1. Install IVT control valve covers as follows: a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides). Service and Repair Sliding Door Handle: Service and Repair SLIDE DOOR LOCK Removal and Installation OUTSIDE HANDLE 1. Remove the sliding door finisher. Refer to See: Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the grommet, and the outside handle escutcheon bolt (TORX T30) from grommet hole. 3. While pulling the outside handle (1), remove outside handle escutcheon (2). 4. While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle to remove (2). 5. Remove the front gasket and rear gasket. Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location ENGINE COMPARTMENT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Checking Brake Fluid Level Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Brake Fluid Level BRAKE FLUID Checking Brake Fluid Level - Check fluid level in the sub tank. It should be between "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the sub tank. - Visually check around the reservoir tank and sub tank for leaks. - If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks. - Release parking brake lever and see if brake warning lamp goes off. If not, check brake system for leaks. Page 3210 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System. ACTIVE TEST Service and Repair Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair BRAKE FLUID Bleeding Brake System CAUTION: Carefully monitor brake fluid level at the sub tank during bleeding operation. - Fill the sub tank with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding the air out of system. - Place a container under the sub tank to avoid spilling brake fluid. - Do not loosen the line fittings at the ABS actuator during air bleeding. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and control unit connector or negative battery terminal. 2. Connect a transparent vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal several times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve to release air. 5. Close air bleeder valve. 6. Release brake pedal slowly. 7. Tighten air bleeder valve to specification. Air bleeder valve : Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front/Exploded View, See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View. 8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 until no more air bubbles come out of air bleeder valve. 9. Bleed the brake hydraulic system air bleeder valves in the following order: Right rear brake to Left front brake to Left rear brake to Right front brake Page 1022 6. Remove camshaft RH (1) and LH (2) secondary timing chain tensioner (3) from cylinder head with the stopper pin (5) inserted. NOTE: Stopper pin (5) was installed when secondary timing chain was removed. O-rings (4) INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Visual Check Check camshaft for scratches, seizure and wear. Replace if necessary. Camshaft Runout 1. Put V-block on precise flat bed and support No. 2 and No. 4 journal of camshaft as shown. 2. Set dial gauges vertically to No. 3 journal as shown. 3. Turn camshaft in one direction slowly by hand, measure the camshaft runout on the dial gauges. Runout is the largest indicator reading after one full revolution. 4. If actual runout exceeds the limit, replace the camshaft. Camshaft Cam Lobe Height 1. Measure camshaft cam lobe height as shown. Refer to See: Maintenance. 2. If wear has reduced the lobe height below specifications, replace the camshaft. Page 502 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures Audible Warning Device: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures WARNING CHIME CONSULT-III Function (BCM) CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS NOTE: If "CAN communication U1000" is indicated, after printing the monitor item, go to "CAN System". Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis/CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor. Page 1606 In the Administrator window select My Computer. In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C). In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder. In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder. In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder. When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time. Select and print the file/screen image that you want. NOTE: During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems. Erase DTCs from all systems 22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen). 23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. 24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.) 25. Select Connect. 26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear. Page 4463 Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Service and Repair BACK DOOR LOCK Back Door Power Lift Assembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the LH rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the closure rod to door bolt. 3. Remove the back door motor gear assembly. 4. Remove the back door motor. Disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 4081 Abbreviations HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Abbreviations The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: Locations Ambient Light Sensor: Locations AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Drivetrain - Front Axle Clicking Noise On Acceleration Axle Shaft Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Front Axle Clicking Noise On Acceleration Classification: FA06-004B Reference: NTB06-085B Date: October 19, 2009 CLICKING NOISE FROM FRONT AXLES DURING TAKE-OFF/ACCELERATION This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles, Parts Information, and Service Procedure sections have been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) IF YOU CONFIRM: An applied vehicle has a "clicking" noise coming from the front axles during take-off/acceleration. ACTION: Apply Molykote M77 grease (P/N 44003-7S000) to the front wheel drive shaft bearing surfaces. NOTE: Make sure to use the new torque specification for the axle nut: 200 Nm (147 ft-lb), instead of 125 Nm (92 ft-lb). IMPORTANT: The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to successfully completing the repair. PARTS INFORMATION CLAIMS INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove both front wheel drive shafts from the axle hubs. Refer to the FAX section of the applicable Service Manual for the removal procedure. Page 1676 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 10-030B Date: 100816 Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement Reference: NTB10-030B Date: August 16, 2010 VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2008-2010 ARMADA & TITAN AND 2008-2009 QUEST BRAKE PEDAL PIVOT PIN INSPECTION The Claims Information in this bulletin has been amended. Please discard previous versions. CAMPAIGN ID#: PC039 NHTSA# 10V-072 APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008-2010 Armada (TA60) 2008-2010 Titan (A60) 2008-2009 Quest (V42) Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility INTRODUCTION Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign on certain specific 2008 - 2010 Armada & Titan and 2008 - 2009 Quest vehicles to inspect, and if necessary, replace the brake pedal. On a small number of the potentially affected vehicles the brake pedal assembly may have been manufactured out of specification. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER Nissan has assigned identification number PC039 to this quality assurance inspection. This number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this activity. DEALER RESPONSIBILITY It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS 1. Look under the dash to view the brake pedal pivot pin. Page 4904 LT-INT/L-07 Procedures Hose/Line HVAC: Procedures REFRIGERANT LINES HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Discharging Refrigerant WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers. Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant Page 4985 If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step. SERVICE PROCEDURE Page 1581 Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic Classification: EL10-028 Reference: NTB10-106 Date: September 10, 2010 NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System SERVICE INFORMATION All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic. VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic: ^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not operate. ^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM, I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information as needed. Page 628 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426 Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics Classification: ST08-001D Reference: NTB08-097D Date: April 26, 2011 DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin. APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R SERVICE INFORMATION If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue. Diagnostic Flow Chart Road Test Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair. IMPORTANT: ^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as: > Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory) System Description Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) System Description - IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. - IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, oil pressure switch signal reception, etc. - It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (High, Low) - Parking lamps - Tail and license plate lamps - Cornering lamps - Front fog lamps 2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger relay. 4. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor (magnet clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. - Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows: IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status Page 4386 Power Sliding Door Switch: Locations Automatic Sliding Door System AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 442 Oxygen Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 794 suspension strut tower (3) as shown. 12. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe connector bolt (1) from the front expansion valve as shown. - Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2) - Electric throttle control actuator (3) - Arrow Indicates Front 13. Use a suitable tool to pry the pipe support clip (1) from the threaded stud on the dash panel as shown. - Arrow Indicates Front 14. Remove the top section of the high/low pressure pipe (1) as shown. - Arrow Indicates Front CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination. 15. Remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe. a. Access the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe from under the vehicle. b. Remove the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A). c. Remove the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B) to release the A/C pipe clamp (2). Page 3038 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS Wheel Sensors WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. - When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor inoperative. - Pull out the sensor, be careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness. - Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the wheel sensor bolt to the specified torque. - Before installing the wheel sensor, make sure there are no foreign materials (such as iron fragments) adhered to the pick-up part of the wheel sensor, to the inside of the wheel sensor mounting hole or on the rotor mounting surface. FRONT WHEEL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove the front wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Partially remove the front wheel fender protector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor. 4. Remove the harness wire from mounts and disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR WHEEL SENSOR Removal 1. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor from the rear wheel hub and bearing assemblies. 2. Remove the harness wire from mounts and harness wire clips from the rear suspension member. 3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Sensor Rotor SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub. Page 1860 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Exhaust Manifold Page 1738 Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 5103 Harness Indication - Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. - Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. Page 3667 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Locations Key Reminder Switch: Locations WARNING CHIME Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2094 Engine Control Module: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 2931 ASSEMBLY 1. Apply rubber grease or brake fluid to the piston seals and install them into cylinder body. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston seals. 2. Apply rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot cylinder-side lip into the cylinder body groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston boot. 3. Apply brake fluid to the piston, insert into the cylinder body by hand and firmly attach the piston boot piston-side lip into the piston groove. CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. 4. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member. 5. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) or equivalent, to the pad back plate and inner shim sides. Install inner shims and outer shim covers to inner and outer pads. Page 5243 1. Clean up the pivot area as shown. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness. 2. Install rear wiper motor. 3. Attach pivot cap. 4. Connect rear wiper motor electrical connector. 5. Install back door finisher lower. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 6. Attach rear wiper arm. Refer to See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair. Washer Motor REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Washer Motor Refer to See: Windshield Washer Pump/Service and Repair. Page 2650 IMPORTANT: Make sure to mark the drive shaft and hub as shown in Figure 1 before removing the drive shaft. NOTE: Do not remove the axles from the transmission for this bulletin. 2. Apply a moderate coat of Molykote M77 Grease (P/N 44003-7S000) to the entire front wheel drive shaft bearing surface (see Figure 2). Page 871 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Leakage POWER STEERING FLUID Checking Fluid Leakage Check the lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration. 1. Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm. Make sure temperature of fluid in oil tank rises to 60° - 80°C (140° - 176°F). 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each lock position for five seconds and carefully check for fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds. 4. If fluid leakage at connectors is noticed, loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. 5. If fluid leakage from power steering oil pump is noticed, check the power steering oil pump. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Procedures. 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of power steering fluid, indicating a steering gear leak. Page 3211 Inspection With CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Inspection with CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis) 1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. Connect CONSULT-III and select "IPDM E/R" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 2. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Check display content in self-diagnosis results. NOTE: The Details for Display for the Period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R. - PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory. Contents displayed NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.-INSPECTION END. CAN COMM CIRC-Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System. Page 642 Locations Auxiliary Water Pump Relay: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Page 1286 Timing Chain: Service and Repair M/T Models "The content of this article/image reflects the changes identified in TSB NTB 10-046" ON-VEHICLE REPAIR FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE 1. Front timing chain case 2. Seal ring 3. Collared O-ring 4. IVT control valve cover RH 5. Chain tensioner cover 6. Collared O-ring 7. Seal ring 8. IVT control valve cover LH 9. RH engine mounting bracket 10. Water pump cover 11. Water hose clamp 12. Crankshaft pulley 13. Front oil seal 14. Idler pulley 15. Idler pulley bracket A. Refer to Installation B. To A/C compressor Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove engine under cover. 2. Drain the engine oil. 3. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 4. Drain the power steering fluid. 5. Remove engine room cover. 6. Remove front air duct. 7. Remove battery tray. 8. Remove upper radiator hose. Latch (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Latch (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM Removal and Installation NOTE: The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable. Page 4869 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) CAUTION: Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the tire and wheel will result. - If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly. REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. 3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. 4. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. 6. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then install seal on transmitter. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. NOTE: Page 1968 DETECT THE ROOT CAUSE Identify the root cause using the created diagnosis sheet. Identifying the root cause Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible cause. Narrow the search. NOTE: - Color-code when drawing lines. - Do not draw a line onto a existing line. - Drawing a line is not necessary if the circuit is shorted. Refer to "Present Error -- Short Circuit --", "Past Error -- Short Circuit --". Refer to the following for details of the trouble diagnosis procedure. - "Present Error -- Open Circuit --" - "Present Error -- Short Circuit --" - "Past Error -- Open Circuit --" - "Past Error -- Short Circuit --" NOTE: When the root cause appears to be a branch line or short circuit, be sure to check the control unit as well as the communication line. Present Error -- Open Circuit -- Identify the error circuit using information from the "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" ("ECU list" included). 1. ECU list: Check the items indicated in "ECU list". Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the error circuit. NOTE: CAN communication line has no error if units other than Diag on CAN units are not indicated. An error may be on the power supply of the control unit, DDL1 line or DDL2 line. a. "TCM" which is Diag on CAN unit, is not indicated on "ECU list". This indicates that DLC is not receiving a signal from TCM. Draw a line to Page 4176 Page 1212 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets (no picture shown). NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in Page 3431 Power Steering Pump: Removal and Replacement Removal and Installation POWER STEERING OIL PUMP Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove side splash guard. 3. Remove heat insulator. 4. Loosen adjustment screw and oil pump bolt, then remove belt. 5. Drain power steering fluid. 6. Remove power steering oil pump union bolt and hose. 7. Remove power steering oil pump bracket bolts. 8. Remove power steering oil pump. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten component connections to specification. Refer to See: Disassembly and Assembly. - Adjust belt tension. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Testing and Inspection. - Refill power steering system and bleed air after installation. Refer to See: Service and Repair See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Fluid Leakage See: Power Steering Fluid/Service and Repair/Checking Fluid Level. Disassembly and Assembly Page 2087 ^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is finished. See Figure 7. f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7. For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM 7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows: a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8. b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9. Page 2408 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 2144 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 2996 Apply specified vacuum to the brake booster. Then check output rod length, using a suitable tool. INSTALLATION 1. Loosen the lock nut to adjust the input rod length so that the dimension shown satisfies the specified value. Standard value : 110 mm (4.33 in) 2. After adjusting, temporarily tighten the lock nut to install the booster assembly to the vehicle. At this time, make sure to install a gasket between the booster assembly and the vehicle. 3. Connect the brake pedal with the clevis of the input rod while installing brake pedal assembly onto brake booster studs. 4. Install nuts to secure brake pedal assembly to brake booster and tighten to specification. 5. Install the brake piping from the brake master cylinder to ABS actuator. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit. 6. Install the brake master cylinder to the brake booster. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 7. Adjust the height and play of the brake pedal. 8. Tighten the lock nut of the input rod to the specification. 9. Adjust brake pedal. Refer to See: Brake Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection. 10. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. Vacuum Lines VACUUM LINES Removal and Installation Page 1939 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram. Testing and Inspection Hood Latch: Testing and Inspection HOOD Hood Lock Control Inspection CAUTION: If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it. 1. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height. 2. While operating the hood opener, carefully make sure the front end of the hood is raised by approx. 20 mm (0.79 in). Also make sure the hood opener returns to the original position. 3. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply "body grease" to the points shown in the figure. Page 3816 e. From the engine compartment, tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown to specification. - Arrow Indicates Front CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when tightening the fittings. 4. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold collector. 5. Check that there is sufficient clearance between the lower high/low pressure pipe and the front stabilizer bar. Adjust the lower high/low pressure pipe as necessary. 6. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and check the A/C system for leaks. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 7. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Locations Collision Avoidance Module: Locations REAR SONAR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Calculated Load Value Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Calculated Load Value SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Calculated Load Value Page 1269 CAUTION: Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil seal. NOTE: Make sure the garter spring is in position and seal lip is not inverted. 3. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case. CAUTION: Use new O-rings for installation. 4. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to front timing chain case as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. - Before installation, wipe off the protruding sealant. - 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia. 5. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to top surface of oil pan (upper) as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Locations Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Component Parts Location Page 3873 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair MTC AMBIENT SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor connector. NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening, in front of the condenser. 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Page 3550 Recommended tire inflating tools. Aftermarket Tire Sealers Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's Owner's Manual). ^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that can cause damage to TPMS sensors. NOTE: Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Page 3378 Page 1593 4. Select Engine 5. Select OK 6. Select Work Support Page 1746 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 751 2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. 3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector. ^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC). ^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and camshaft sprockets (no picture shown). NOTE: The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing chains. ^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke after removing the front timing chain case (front cover), put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned). ^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner. NOTE The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing. 4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements Classification: AT07-006B Reference: NTB08-049B Date: March 13, 2009 NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard all earlier versions. APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R) SERVICE INFORMATION If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information, the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used as specified by the part number in this bulletin. If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used. PARTS INFORMATION Page 2052 Page 1572 Body Control Module: Service and Repair BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Removal and Installation of BCM REMOVAL NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove the parking brake pedal assembly. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the BCM (1) by removing the screw (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors (2). Arrow Indicates : Front INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. - When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Description See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Composition. - When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure. Page 5019 - For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION". Optional Splice Page 2442 DESCRIPTION Page 2267 - Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is heard. - After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. - Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with the electric fuel pump applying fuel pressure to the fuel piping. 2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and hose connections. Page 319 Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Intake Sensor ATC INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation Intake Sensor REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair. Page 158 CAUTION 4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF. ^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure. ^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF. ^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel heater, etc. CAUTION 5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running. If the cooling fans are running: a. Turn the ignition OFF. b. Wait for the engine to cool. c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF). d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running. 6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer. 7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear. Page 2168 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Component Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Crash Zone Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor CRASH ZONE SENSOR Removal and Installation REMOVAL CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three minutes. 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2. Remove front grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Grille/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 4. Remove crash zone sensor nuts. CAUTION: Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. - Do not disassemble crash zone sensor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Page 1692 13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it. 15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part. 16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris. CAUTION: DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders. 17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM). Page 773 Oil Filter: Service and Repair OIL FILTER Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the RH splash shield. 2. Remove the oil filter using Tool. Tool number : KV10115801 (J-38956) WARNING: Be careful not to get burned, the engine and engine oil may be hot. CAUTION: The oil filter is equipped with a relief valve. Use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent. - When removing the oil filter, use a shop cloth to absorb any oil leaks or spills. - Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts. - Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. INSTALLATION 1. Remove any foreign material adhering to the oil filter installation surface. 2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of the new oil filter as shown. 3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by turning another 2/3 turn as shown. Or tighten to specification using Tool. Page 153 7. Select VIN Registration 8. Select Next 9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF. 10. Select Start Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 3135 Page 634 2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test. 3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern. ^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60 mph. ^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel position during the road test. NOTE: ^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have been resolved. ^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then diagnosis cannot be performed. 4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center" below. 5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete. 6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step. Other Service Information Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road (see example in Figure 1). If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place. Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction. Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully counteract the effect of a highly crowned road. Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane. This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be. Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition Page 1203 CLAIMS INFORMATION Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered "Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Write down all radio station presets. Locations Door Switch: Locations WARNING CHIME Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 2671 5. Remove stopper ring using a suitable tool, then pull out slide joint housing. 6. Put matching marks on spider assembly and shaft. 7. Remove snap ring using a suitable tool, then remove spider assembly from shaft. 8. Remove boot from shaft. 9. Clean old grease off of the slide joint housing. Wheel Side 1. Mount the front drive shaft in a vise. CAUTION: When mounting shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft. 2. Remove boot bands and slide the boot back. 3. Screw a sliding hammer or suitable tool 30 mm (1.18 in) or more into threaded part of joint sub-assembly. Pull joint sub-assembly out of shaft. CAUTION: Align sliding hammer or suitable tool and drive shaft then remove joint sub-assembly by pulling directly. TCS/ABS Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5. Disconnect the brake tubes. CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. - Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. 6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the bracket. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque specifications when connecting the brake tubes. - After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Page 1152 4. Apply a bead of sealant to the cylinder block mating surface of the upper oil pan as shown. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants. - Be sure the sealant is applied as shown, and the sealant is 4.0 - 5.0 mm (0.157 - 0.197 in) or 4.5 5.5 mm (0.177 - 0.217 in) wide. - Installation must be done within 5 minutes after applying sealant. 5. Install new O-rings on the cylinder block and oil pump body. 6. Install the upper oil pan. - Tighten upper oil pan bolts in the order as shown. CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil. Page 4217 Page 2484 Page 380 Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures COMBINATION SWITCH CONSULT-III Function (BCM) CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be monitored. 6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Page 116 Page 1251 Page EM-9 Page 1779 The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. 1. Disconnect the tube clamp at the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube at the mass air flow sensor. 2. Separate the mass air flow sensor from the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube. 3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and remove the air cleaner case (upper). 4. Remove the air cleaner filter. 5. Install a new air cleaner filter. 6. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal. Page 3258 Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse And Fusible Link Box FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX Terminal Arrangement Page 761 8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D" ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7). 9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A). 10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B). 11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is firmly applied (see Figure 9). 12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt. 13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring. Page 4415 Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. - Keep primers and adhesives in a cool dry place. ideally they should be stored in a refrigerator. - Do not leave primers and adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps off. - The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time depends on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperature and lower humidities. Repairing Water Leaks for Slide Door Glass Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the glass area while pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Page 1378 9. Install upper oil pan bolts as shown. Upper oil pan bolts : 22.0 N-m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb) 10. Install lower oil pan. 11. Install IVT control valve covers as follows: a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides). b. Install new seal rings on the IVT control valve covers. c. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT control valve covers. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. - Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the chain case with the holes to install the IVT control valve covers. - Tighten the intake valve timing control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. - A: Bank 1 (Conventional RH bank) - B: Bank 2 (Conventional LH bank) Page 2211 Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Testing and Inspection Power Supply And Ground Circuit POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Diagnosis Procedure 1.INSPECTION START Start engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes >>GO TO 8. No >>GO TO 2. 2.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >>GO TO 4. NG >>GO TO 3. 3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse block (J/B) connector E30 - 10 A fuse - Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse >>Repair harness or connectors. 4.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Supply And Ground Circuit. Page 369 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS ATC Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations ATC Front Passenger Compartment TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Description and Operation Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS Page 3320 Page 3193 Page 859 Figure 2. NOTE Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed. 5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3). ^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated. CAUTION Tighten the bolt no more then necessary. 6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed. 7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed. ^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover. 8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last. 9. Reprogram the radio presets. 10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc. Page 4903 LT-INT/L-06 WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE Page 1866 EC-MIL/DL-02 Page 1918 i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 16. j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See Figure 17. k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Page 4695 Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Automatic Drive Positioner AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 4894 Page 4093 3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1. 4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2). 5. Replace the battery. ^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece. 6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together. 7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated in the dot matrix display. 8. If the indicator is still illuminated: a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door. b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off. Page 3489 7. Disconnect the outer tie-rod end from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly, temporarily tighten mounting nut. Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A) 8. Remove transverse link and steering knuckle pinch bolt and nut using power tool. Refer to See: Control Arm/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. 9. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft using a puller or suitable tool. CAUTION: When removing wheel hub and bearing assembly, do not apply an excessive angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint. - Support drive shaft when removing. 10. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 11. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. 12. Remove the lower strut bolts and nuts using power tool. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension. 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. Ball Joint Inspection Check for boot breakage, axial looseness, and torque of transverse link ball joint. Refer to See: Control Arm/Service and Repair/Front Suspension. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Refer to "Removal and Installation" for tightening torques. Locations Combination Switch: Locations CORNERING LAMP Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Page 1911 CLAIMS INFORMATION Disclaimer Page 1545 5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1 above for example. WARNING: Do NOT install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube. ^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb) 6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end. ^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within 5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2). WARNING: Page 429 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Specifications Alternator: Specifications SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Generator Page 3100 Standardized Relay STANDARDIZED RELAY Description NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. Page 2420 Knock Sensor: Connector Locations TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location Page 685 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUG Removal and Installation REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation LH and See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation RH. CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil. 2. Remove the spark plugs using a suitable tool. If replacing the spark plugs use the correct spark plug for maximum performance. Refer to See: . INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. Page 3836 Refrigerant: Service Precautions General Refrigerant Precaution PRECAUTIONS General Refrigerant Precaution WARNING: Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged. Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F). Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a warm pail of water. Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a) have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers. Page 2716 Page 3805 CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse O-rings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or around the connection. Removal And Installation For Low-Pressure Flexible Hose REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover. 2. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. 3. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to See: Component. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Component. CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. - After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. ATC REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover.